Home

TASKalfa 300i

1.
2. 1 AA aaa aaa a a 1 1 gt gt i 1 1 1 Vertical conveying unit i 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 324VIL1 TN 1 1 1 1 YC18 24VSL SSW 212 CH YC8 24VIL1 OUT 55 TI 1 1 313 1 12 Ai Ai GND 24VIL2_IN 777 YC8 212 FSW3 212 2 1 2 2 LFEED SW3 5VSL A A 5VSL YC2 111 3 10 5VSL GND 313 2 2 GND LIVE 1 iq LiT Re 2 4 9 4 4 24VSL GND 6 6 373 GND NEUTRAL 4774 21 2 connector 1 5 8 A5 A5 FEED3CL 324VILT TN 474 ala 24VSL NC 21 1 FSW2 313 6 7 Fae GND 24VSL 2 2 5 5 24VSL NC 313 i 21 2 T 6 AT AT LFEED SW 1T 1 5 8 5VSL YC19 YC7 TB4 LC2SW 9 4 A9 9 GND MHEATN ef 6 MHEATN MSW_OUT 242 171 MSW OUT 3 A10 A10 FECOSW SHEATN 5 5 2 2 SHEATN MSW FCL2 E Ree 2 AT AT 24VSL FAN4DRN 4 4 373 FAN7DRN MSW_IN i 1 1 MSW N 2 kometo 1 1 12 12 FEED2CL GND 3713 424 GND TB3 1 ZCROSSC 2 2 575 ZCROSSC J PFCL4 Li Rey Ais 1
3. YC30 5VSL YC31 YC26 MPWB 10 5 HOVSL 10VSL 10 51 51 LAMPN 6 6 H PGND 5 5 CN1 CN2 4 4 YC27 24VSL 4 4 35VSL 1 324VSL 313 INPWB 5VSL PGND 2 2 1 1 GND 3 3 LAMPN 1 1 L GND 4 4 GND GND SLEEP rd rd SLEEP 1 GA_SO 878 G SO 2 SRDY 9 9 GA SRDY 3 A OWM 4 GA SI 8 A SCLK E PAGESTART 01 8 9 TCDCLKT 8 5 SC_SI ORGVSYNC 6 o seso 19 19 DP RDY po po 5 SC SBSY 20 20 DP SEL 77H 4 c SC SDIR SC SDIR SCLK L8 8 3 SC_IRN SC_IRN 500 9 9 1 7 2 HLD ScnN 23 23 HLD ScnN 1 CON10V 24 24 CON10V CCDPWB 3 3VSL Lien GND ND 3 TXP 2 HPSW TXN 3 OPSWN 2 ODSW TMTXD 6 6 6 1 085 ORGLSWN 8 8 2 GND 9 9 I 3 1 FLMDO WRSO WRSI SM 0 GND 324VSL A 1 2 1 2 PSPWB YC4 YC24 11 1 aifi 5v HA 2 5VSL 5VSL 12VSL__ 4 4 afa 12VSL 24VSL Go 6 6 GND 8 8 6 6 GND GND 9 9 7 Y 7 GND ND 10 10 NI 8 8 GND 2 4 12 Wiring diagram No 5
4. 1 1 l CN1 i SGND TP 1 SGND 20 2 1 B5 1 B4 474 1 B3 5 5 1 SGND 616 1 B2 TY 7 1 B1 8 8 BO 9179 SGND 10 10 i G5 1 G4 12 12 i G3 13 13 1 SGND 14 i4 1 G2 15 15 1 Gi 16 16 1 GO 1 17 I SGND 18 718 1 m R5 19 19 l R4 20 20 Oo R3 21721 I a SGND 21 2 i 9 R2 23 1 23 7 Ri 24 24 i RO 25 25 1 SGND 26 26 1 DE 27 27 1 SGND 28 28 1 LR 29 29 1 UD 30 30 1 SGND 31 31 d DCLK 32 32 1 NC 33 33 SGND 34 i 5V 35 35 i 5V 36 36 1 5V 37 37 1 5V 38 38 1 SGND 39 39 1 SGND 40 40 1 1 CN2 HOT 1 f COLD 212 1 1 1 I 1 H 1 1 m V 242 1 i a PGND 1 z 12V 212 1 a BK ON 3153 1 ADJUST 4 4 i SGND 5 5 1 I 1 1 1 KEYSENSEO 15 15 1 KEYSENSE1 14 714 1 KEYSENSE2 13 13 1 KEYSENSE3 12 12 1 c KEYSENSE4 11 11 1 1 SCANO 1010 SCANT 99 5 2 EN NES a SCAN3 77 O 5 6 6 i LEDO 5 5 LEDI 4f 4 1 PH KEY 3 1 35V MSWON 2 2 SGND 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 YC1 NC 15 15 i N 14 14 i NC 13113 1 SCANG 12 12 1 E KEYSENSES 1i 11 1 d KEYSENSES 10 10 1 KEYS
5. INS _ Lower duplex I mae TAX feed roller Copying onto reverse side Switchback operation Copying onto front side normal rotation of eject motor reverse rotation of eject motor normal rotation of eject motor gt Paper path Figure 2 1 24 2 1 19 2K5 This page is intentionally left blank 2 1 20 2K5 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout 1 PWBs Machine front Machine inside _ Machine rear Figure 2 2 1 PWBs 1 Engine PWB Controls the other PWBs electrical components and optional devices 2 Main PWB 2 Controls the image processing and operation panel 3 Power source PWB PSPWB Generates 24 V DC and 5 V DC controls the fuser heaters 4 High voltage PWB HVPWB Main charging Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer 5 Scanner PWB SPWB 2 2 Controls the scanner section 6 Inverter PWB 1 Controls the exposure lamp 7 LCD inverter PWB LINPWB Controls LCD indication 8 CCD PWB
6. lt lt ESTA gt gt DIVER A AS ES ET HUA RNE ST Ui ii gt TH 3 IA AU 4 Omm WY o TFAA Jem URSUS of 10 HL gt HE 3 Omm DAA UH 4 Lh Py USA SS IA gt 1 P 9 CATHGEN IME 416 W gt 5 0 Omm BA py 18 ji gt 2 Om mm LAA XXTf 3 Omm AA EI HAEATA SEA AA 28 20 WI lt lt ESO ER gt gt MITRE MEE CPE 217 Z amp 0 ICRA 113072 V M Gr IE LORD T Time OM 7 17 dB AB 3 0mm WA mm 4 Omm AAN Bin OR 10 lt Y lt H gt AB 3 0mm UA mm 4 Omm AAN 14 9 dE 1 5 UN Hine 4 SUT 16 27 AB 2 0mm LA VAII 18 3 df A 2 Omm WAM 3 ELA MBE ABD LEE Joi P X aH 74 74 AO BIEN ICBO RAS 81 5 818 20 lt gt 6 43mm 4mm y3mm Amm Checking the angle of leading edge Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm V rification de l angle du bord avant V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l o
7. 20 For a test pattern example a Turn the adjusting screw 17 clockwise the adjuster will move in the direction of arrow and tighten 1screw 16 For a test pattern example b Turn the adjusting screw 17 counterclockwise the adjuster will move in the direction of arrow gt and tighten 1screw 16 20 Pour un exemple de mire a Tournez la vis de r glage 17 dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre le dispositif de r glage se d place dans la direction de la fl che et resserrez 1 vis 16 Pour un exemple de mire b Tournez la vis de r glage 17 dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d une montre le dispositif de r glage se d place dans la direction de la fl che et resserrez 1 vis 16 20 Para un ejemplo de patr n de prueba a Gire el tornillo de ajuste 17 en sentido horario el regulador se mover en la direcci n de la flecha y apriete 1 tornillo 16 Para un ejemplo de patr n de prueba b Gire el tornillo de ajuste 17 en sentido antihorario el regulador se mover en la direcci n de la flecha gt y apriete 1 tornillo 16 20 F r das Testmuster Beispiel a Drehen Sie die Einstellschraube 17 im Uhrzeigersinn der Anpasser bewegt sich in der Pfeilrichtung und ziehen Sie 1 Schraube 16 fest F r das Testmuster Beispiel b Drehen S
8. 1 Pi ces fournies A Carte a circuits 1 B Cable du connecteur modulaire mod les pour l Australie 120 V seulement 1 Joint de borne o een 1 D Etiquette de 1 E Etiquette de la section de fonctionnement A 1 Piezas suministradas A Tarjeta de circuitos de 1 B Cable conector modular s lo para modelos de 120 V Australianos 1 C Sello del terminal 1 D Etiqueta de 1 E Etiqueta de la secci n de funcionamiento de FAX 1 Gelieferte Teile A 1 C Verschlusskappe ud D 1 E Aufkleber f r FAX Bedienungsabschnitt 1 1 Parti di fornitura A Scheda a circuiti FAX 1 C Guarnizione terminale 2 D Etichetta E Etichetta della sezione funzionamento FAX sentence idee terit die aeg 1 Memoria 1 MHE
9. Le O as Or lt J Figure 2 1 1 Cassette paper feed section 1 Forwarding pulley 2 Paper feed pulley 3 Separation pulley 4 Paper switch 1 PSW1 5 Paper switch 2 PSW2 Lift switch 1 LSW1 7 Lift switch 2 LSW2 Paper size width switch 1 PWSW 1 9 Paper size width switch 2 PWSW2 10 Paper size length switch 1 PLSW1 11 Paper size length switch 2 PLSW2 12 Cassette bases 13 Lift operation plates 14 Right registration roller 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 Left registration roller Registration switch RSW Feed roller 1 Feed pulley Feed switch 1 FSW1 Feed roller 2 Feed pulley Feed switch 2 FSW2 Feed roller 3 Feed pulley Feed switch 3 FSW3 Vertical paper conveying guide Paper conveying guide Vertical paper conveying frame 2K5 RESFECL RESISTSW SMOTON FEED1CL UFEED_SW HILIFTSW HIPAPSW UPFECL FEED2CL HILIFTSW1 2 HILIFTMREM HIDIGO 1 2 HILENGSW LO
10. Reads the image of originals 9 Main operation unit PWB OPWB M Controls touch panel and LCD indication 10 Right operation unit PWB OPWB R Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 11 Left operation unit PWB OPWB L Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 12 Upper operation unit PWB OPWB U Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 2 2 1 2K5 13 Front operation unit PWB OPWB F Consists of the display LEDs 14 APC PWB Generates and controls the laser beam 15 PD PWB Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam 16 Fuser PWB FUPWB Consists of wiring relay circuits 17 Drum PWB Stores the individual drum unit information 18 Developing PWB DRPWB Stores the individual developing unit information 19 Interface PWB Consists of wiring relay circuits 20 Fax control PWB FCPWABJ Modulates demodulates compresses decompresses and smoothes out image data and converts resolution of image data Option List of correspondences of PWB names z 9 Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Engine PW
11. 1 4 38 13 ni o 1 4 38 14 ONSE amp ens 1 4 39 15 Image is partly 1 4 39 2K5 1 4 4 1 4 5 1 4 6 16 Fusing 1 4 39 17 Image is out of seen sdeedesecusneaddeeeesincesececueegbessddesosedeceectesscueeecbel edits 1 4 39 18 Image center does not align with the original 1 4 40 Electric problems iii a E 1 4 41 Mechanical problems Ret doit 1 4 46 SENA error CO dE 1 4 48 1 Sear to SMB ertor Codes 1 ettet ERU IEE 1 4 48 2 Scam to F TP error codes eee eame eee EORR SD We UK STERN Ie SERRA I PUR lada 1 4 49 3 Scan to E mail error 1 4 50 4 Network Twain error codes lied 1 4 51 b Software trouble error codes oio ER ic 1 4 51 1 5 Assembly and Disassembly 1 5 2 1 5 3 1 5 4 1 5 5 1 5 6 1 5 7 1 5 8 Precautions for assembly and 1 5 1 1 Precautions eee e ea ee ee n Det e e e ee dee 1 5 1 2 DrUM HEN NECEM 1 5 1 DISC 1 5 1 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner 2 20224 1 1 5 2 Paper feed SOCtiOn iii
12. SERERE 1 A3 4 AD 20mm OATH b 4 AL ARO Pot CR 1 ESI e TEE 2 RARO BTS PRAY EY MELIA EBA v7 ONI Z 2 3 a RUTA RIE ABI HEB EOI E VAT Vet Ue D 4 RAR a a EH v TICE E03 UD 5 7e RXV DME ABS AAD B RES LUTERO CHS DP OBI TERR V dS CES CL ARMA AO Y EA Y FIAR I DR a HET e Checking image from the DP Be sure to adjust in the following order If not the adjustment cannot be performed correctly lt Reference value gt lt Reference value gt lt Reference value gt lt Reference value gt lt Reference value gt For checking the angle of leading edge see page 7 For checking the angle of trailing edge see page 10 For checking the magnification see page 14 For checking the leading edge timing see page 16 For checking the center line see page 18 When using the original for adjustment automatic adjustment of magnification Simplex copying within 3 0 mm Duplex copying within 4 0 mm Simplex copying within 3 0 mm Duplex copying within 4 0 mm Within 1 5 Within 2 0 mm Simplex copying within 2 0 mm Duplex copying within 3 0 mm leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a time For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment see page 20 V rification de l image sur le DP Veillez
13. 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to MM 24 V DC power output to DM 24 V DC power output to MM 24 V DC power output to DM Ground Ground Ground Ground MM lock signal DM lock signal MM On Off DM On Off MM rotation switch signal DM rotation switch signal MM clock signal DM clock signal 24 V DC power output to PFM 24 V DC power output to PFM Ground Ground PFM lock signal PFM On Off PFM rotation switch signal PFM clock signal 24 V DC power output to DH DH On Off Connected to the feed shift sole noid 24VSL DFSOLDR DFSOLRS 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FSSOL FSSOL activate On Off FSSOL return On Off 12 Connected to the high voltage PWB 2 3 8 AN DOA FR ON o E EDEN No 24VIL2 DHVSRUP DHVCLKC SHVDRN MHVDRN GND GND DHVADJC SHVISELN THVADJC THVDRN 5VSL 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Analog 0 5 V DC Analog 0 5 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC power output to HVTPWB Developing slowup signal Developing bias clock signal Separation high voltage On Off Main charging high voltage On Off Ground Ground Developing bias adjust signal
14. Transfer roller Separation system Curvature separation and separation electrode Cleaning system Cleaning blade and roller Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp Fusing Heat roller Heat source halogen heaters Abnormally high temperature protection devices thermostats Main Standard 2048 MB Maximum 2048 MB Hard disk sss 160 GB 1 1 1 2K5 Interface eer USB interface connector 1 USB Hi speed USB memory slot 2 Full speed USB Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Optional interface 2 KUIO W 600 x 600 dpi Operating Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 RH Altitude 2500 m 8 202 ft maximum Brightness 1500 lux maximum Dimensions 22 21 570 W x 630 D x 767 H mm main unit only 22 7 16 W x 24 13 16 x 30 3 16 main unit only Weight icti rien erdt epe 75 kg 165 lbs Space 725 W x 630 D mm using MP tray 28 9 16 W x 24 13 16 D using MP tray Power 120 V AC 60 Hz 11 8A 220 to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 6 5 A rein Document processo
15. A Stee LLL 1 BUT cc 1 MENE eee eee 1 Di Wao SEE 1 EHA aa APRESS 1 B PIAT RS IVAN So 1 C AF ST IVA 1 A 1 ZzrAc romn Zzr Acron ZZ Acron ZzrAXc ron ZzrAc ron E aee Toan Upper left cover Front eject cover Rear eject cover Finisher tray Staple cartridge Blindfold seal Large pin Small pin M3 2 2 21 3 Capot sup rieur Capot d jection avant Capot d jection arri re Plateau du module de finition Cartouche d agrafes Etiquette de masquage Grande goupille Petite goupille Vis M3 x 6 APAGAN Cubierta superior izquierda 1 Cubierta de expulsi n frontal Cubierta de expulsi n trasera Bandeja de finalizador Cartucho de grapas Sello ciego Pasador grande Pasador pequefio s Tornillo M3 x 3 Obere linke 1 Frontauswurfabdeckung R ckauswurfabdeckung Finisher Ablage Heftklammermagazin Blindaufkleber Gro er Stift Kleiner Stift M3 6 Schraube 3 Coperchio superiore sinistro
16. Procedure Releasing lift plate stopper 1 Pull each cassette out and then remove the lift plate stopper 1 from each cassette and attach it to the storage location 2 2 Gently close each cassette Proc dure Lib ration de la but e de plaque d l vation 1 Tirer chaque tiroir vers l ext rieur puis retirer la but e de plaque d l vation 1 de chaque tiroir et la fixer l emplacement de rangement 2 2 Refermer progressivement chaque tiroir Procedimiento Soltado del tope de placa de elevaci n 1 Abra la bandeja y quite el tope de la placa de elevaci n 1 de cada bandeja y col quela en su lugar de dep sito 2 2 Cierre suavemente cada bandeja Verfahren L sen des Hebeplattenanschlags 1 Die einzelnen Kassetten herausziehen dann den Hebeplattenanschlag 1 von jeder Kassette entfernen und an der Speicherposition 2 anbringen 2 Alle Kassetten sachte schlie en Procedura Rimozione del fermo della piastra di sollevamento 1 Estrarre ciascun cassetto e poi rimuovere il fermo della piastra di sollevamento 1 da ciascun cassetto e fissarlo nella posizione di immagazzinaggio 2 2 Chiudere delicatamente ciascun cassetto c Jt RRR REPEAT BEAR BY S XE 1 JR Pat 1 ARR 1 TADA AS AA 2 HL 2 AAA o iH REFIR 7 FARO 1 EDEYE ZHL YZ RZ RYN 1 amp 148 PE CARE Sa 2 ICO Do 2 ENE v Raro ALA do
17. Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys The greater the value the larger the deflection the smaller the value the smaller the deflection If an original non feed jam or oblique feed occurs increase the setting value If wrinkling of original occurs decrease the value 7 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 92 Checking of log Description Sends a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory Purpose To transfer a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory as a means of investigating malfunctions Method Insert USB memory in USB memory slot Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select Execute Press the start key Starts sending the log file saved on the HDD to the USB memory When normally completed Finished is displayed When an error occurs an error code is displayed Turn the main power switch off and on Error codes Display Description No Usb Storage USB memory is not inserted No File File is not found Mount Error USB memory mount error File Delete Error File deletion error Copy Error File copy error Unmount Error USB memory unmount error Other Error Other error
18. 4 Pi ces fournies A Retoucheur de document 1 B Pontet du loquet C El ment de r tention du rail D 5 E Vis de raccordement M4 6 4 Partes suministradas A Finalizador de documentos 1 B Gerrojo cec i1 C Ret n del carril d D Carril gu a 2 E Tornillo de sujeci n x 6 4 Gelieferte Teile A Dokument Finishers 22222 1 B RiegelschloBbausatz C Schienenhalterungseinheit D F hrungsschieneneinheit we E Verbundschraube x 6 4 Parti fornite A Finitrice di documenti 1 B Dispositivo di arresto m C Fermo della guida E D Guida della rotaia 2 1 Vite serraggio M4 x 6 4 itj erp xc AA aaa 1 41 C Jupe 21 D Sum uate 1 E M4 x 6 E RET Lesen 4 Ak PESAS RA SY Yee 1 ces toed Dawes ads ones 1 COLIMA eee 1 A VE 1 E 4 F Binding screw M4 x 14 G GUide Plate a eite 1 H Fixing plate F xil
19. Application Document Box Attach the FAX operation section label 10 Wipe the label surface shown in the figure with alcohol and adhere the FAX operation section label E of the corresponding language lt When installing in 42 52 ppm Monochrome machines gt Adhere the FAX operation section label E that A is shown lt When installing in 30 ppm Monochrome machines gt Adhere the FAX operation section label E that B is shown lt When installing in 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Full color machines gt Adhere the FAX operation section label E that A is shown Fixer l tiquette de la section de fonctionnement FAX 10 Essuyer avec de l alcool la surface de l tiquette montr e sur l illustration et apposer l tiquette de la section de fonctionnement FAX E de la langue correspondante Installation sur les mod les 42 52 ppm Machines monochromes gt Apposer l tiquette de la section de fonctionnement FAX E de mani re que A soit montr Installation sur les mod les 30 ppm Machines monochromes gt Apposer l tiquette de la section de fonctionnement FAX E de mani re que B soit montr Installation sur les mod les 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Machines entierement en couleurs Apposer l tiquette de la section de fonctionnement FAX E de mani re que A soit montr Coloque la etiqueta de la secci n de funcionamient
20. 1 Coperchio anteriore di espulsione carta 1 Coperchio posteriore di espulsione carta 1 ES 1 Cartuccia punti metallici Sigillo mascherina Perno grande Perno piccolo Mite MIX G 3 BEV A TAS THEA 1 EE ei ic a 1 O cece eee eee 1 1 1 1 dolls oe 1 AGRE MT MC 1 DA mV MB RUA eee FEED PSs ese d TELA ER ca ash perpi baa PEI TAR YY RUD ccoo REST IVES 33 A O i p MEET Lar D 5 M3 X 6 Precautions Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts Before installing the finisher be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Pr cautions Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Avant d installer le module de finition veillez mettre la machine hors tension et d brancher le c ble d alimentation de la prise murale Precauciones Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Antes de instalar el finalizador aseg rese de desconectar el interruptor principal de la maquina y desenchufar el
21. 1 5 3 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys 1 5 3 2 Detaching and refitting the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys 1 5 6 Optical SECO cea aie eet utn oh tg 1 5 15 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure enne nennen nnns 1 5 15 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner 1 5 19 2 1 Detaching the scanner Wires 4 iiec eerte tin nnne tite 1 5 19 2 2 Fitting the scanner wires 5 1 eoi e e Ug ede ce teo e Tee 1 5 21 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU 1 5 24 4 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner 1 5 26 5 Adjusting the position of the ISU 1 5 30 Ib LES eo REP 1 5 31 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit sssssssssssssseseseeeeeeee eene nnne 1 5 31 2 Detaching and refitting the main charger unit eem 1 5 33 3 Detaching and refitting the drum separation 1 5 34 Developing Section rada 1 5 35 1 Detaching and refitting the developing nnns 1 5 35 Transfer SOC A este oes 1 5 36 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit em
22. Operation panel mask version Total RAM size 2 Local time zone Y lt Report output date Day Month Year hour minute NTP server name co o a Presence or absence of the optional DP Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional paper feeder Cassette LCF Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional document finisher Inner Finisher Tray 3000 Finisher 1000 Finisher Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional job separator Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional data security kit Installed Not Installed Page of relation to the A4 Letter Average coverage for total Average coverage for copy Average coverage for printer Average coverage for fax Cleared date and output date Coverage on the final output page Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed Number of rings to 15 Number of rings before automatic switching 0 to 15 Number of rings before connecting to answering machine 0 to 15 Optional DIMM size FRPO setting Machine serial number Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U000 Description Supplement NV RAM version Bb 04B29 Bb 04B29 a b c a Consistency of the present software version and the database
23. 17 Select maintenance mode U402 and print the test pattern 17 S lectionner le mode maintenance U402 et imprimer la mire d essai 17 Seleccione el modo de mantenimiento U402 e imprima el patr n de prueba 17 Den Wartungsmodus U402 wahlen und das Testmuster ausdrucken 17 Selezionare la modalita manutenzione U402 e stampare il modello di prova 17 X PESE E EX U402 FT EVRA 17 FY AE 02 SIROTA 18 Check the center line of paper 14 and the center line of test pattern 15 If the gap of lines 14 and 15 exceeds the reference value proceed to step 19 Reference value 2 0 mm or less 18 V rifier la ligne m diane du papier 14 et la ligne m diane de la mire 15 Si l cart des lignes 14 et 15 est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence passer l tape 19 Valeur de r f rence 2 0 mm ou moins 18 Verifique la l nea central del papel 14 y la l nea central del patr n de prueba 15 Si la separaci n entre las l neas 14 y 15 supera el valor de referencia vaya al paso 19 Valor de referencia 2 0 mm o menos 18 Die Mittellinie des Papiers 14 mit der Mittellinie des Testmusters 15 vergleichen Falls die Abweichung zwischen den Linien 14 und 15 den Bezugswert berschreitet zu Schritt 19 bergehen Bezugswert maximal 2 0 mm 18 Controllare la linea centrale della carta 14 e la linea centrale del
24. 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U247 Setting the paper feed device Description Turns on motors and clutches of paper feeder Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device Method 1 Press the start key The value varies depending to the option furnished 2 Select the item to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Motor and clutches Operation DESK FEED PF drive motor PFDM In operation CLUTCH FEED PF paper conveying clutch PFCCL On for 1s CLUTCH U PF paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 On for 1s CLUTCH L PF paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 On for 1s 4 To turn each motor off press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the maintenance cycle Description Changes preset values for maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment Purpose Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and automatic gray scale adjustment is periodically displayed Setting 1 Press the start key The current pre set value is displayed Display Description Setting range Maintenance Count A Preset values for maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 COUNT GRAY Preset values for auto
25. Ad IRD AMI 7 VBI geh 20 Adjusting the DP open close angle To adjust the DP open close angle to 60 degrees 1 Insert the angle adjusting plate C and fit it using M4 x 14 screw E R glage de l angle d ouverture fermeture du DP Pour r gler l angle d ouverture fermeture du DP 60 degr s 1 Ins rez la plaque de r glage d angle C et fixez la l aide d une vis M4 x 14 E Ajuste del ngulo de apertura cierre del DP Para ajustar el ngulo de apertura cierre del DP a 60 grados 1 Inserte la placa de ajuste de ngulo C y fije con el tornillo M4 x 14 E Einstellen des DP Offnungs SchlieRungswinkels Einstellung des DP Offnungs SchlieRungswinkels auf 60 Grad 1 Den Winkeleinstellhalter C einsetzen und mit einer M4 x 14 Schraube E befestigen Regolazione dell angolo di apertura e chiusura del DP Per regolare l angolo di apertura e chiusura del DP a 60 gradi 1 Inserire la piastra di regolazione dell angolo C e fissarla con una vite M4 x 14 E i DP HF 2E f 9336 8 60 R 1 SN VE 1 RA M4 X 14 E DP BEER fS RE OO SE DP 60 CREST SEA 1 BEER C A RUN L EA M4 X 1A 1 AG HETS To adjust the DP open close angle to 30 degrees 1 Remove two stop rings 12
26. z KUIORDYO B29 B29 B29 N KUIORDY1 B30 B30 B30 B30 NC GND ND KUIODACKRN1 KUIODACKTNO KUIODACKTN1 KUIORSTNO KUIORSTN1 GND GND 3 3 CON CFOENO EXTBOEN FWENO EXTBDIR CFRSTO CFOCSNO CFWAITNO CFOCSN1 CFOCDET1 GND CFOCDET2 2K5 2 4 14 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOCUMENT PROCESSOR Output Connector for Interconnecting Cable is non LPS Output 357VA max Please use the item below Interconnecting Cable P N 303K546050 Supplied parts A Document processor DP B Original C Angle adjusting plate E D Pieces fournies A Chargeur de document DP B Tapis C Plaque de r glage d angle ES A eret Piezas suministradas A Procesador de documentos DP B Plancha de originales C Placa de ajuste de ngulo ES AA A Gelieferte Teile A Vorlageneinzug DP B Originalmatte C Winkeleinstellhalter ity D R ndelschraube Parti di fornitura A Alimentatore di originali DP B Coprioriginale C Piastra di regolazione dell angolo D Ce ME m A
27. Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 59 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U245 Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel Purpose To check the messages to be displayed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be displayed 3 Displays the message one by one using cursor up down keys Switches the language on the touch panel using the cursor keys When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the mes sage corresponding the specified number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 60 Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the built in finisher if furnished Purpose Adjusts the side registration cursor stop position if paper registration is poor or stapling is made outside the specified area Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the desired cursor position 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step FRONT Front side registration cursor stop 4 to 4 0 0 566 mm position REAR Rear side registration cursor stop 4 to 4 0 566 mm position END Trailing edge registration cursor stop 4 to 4 0 566 mm position
28. Installing the paper feeder 3 Pull out and remove cassette 2 3 from the machine Installation du bureau papier 3 Tirer le tiroir 2 3 hors de la machine Instalaci n del alimentador de papel 3 Quite y desmonte la bandeja 2 3 de la m quina Installieren des Papiereinzugs 3 Die Kassette 2 3 herausziehen und von der Maschine entfernen Installazione dell unita di alimentazione della carta 3 Estrarre e rimuovere il cassetto 2 3 dalla macchina ES 3 LAA 2 3 o AMD 4 3 MAREO DE y b 203 EII zm 4 Place the machine on the paper feeder A to fit the positioning pins 4 at the front left and right of the paper feeder to the holes 5 in the machine Placer la machine sur le bureau papier A pour engager les broches de positionnement 4 situ es des c t s avant gauche et droit du bureau papier dans les orifices 5 de la machine Coloque la m quina sobre el alimentador de papel A para que se introduzcan las clavijas de posicionamiento 4 en el lado delantero izquierdo y derecho del alimentador de papel en los orificios 5 en la m quina Die Maschine so auf den Papiereinzug A setzen dass die Passstifte 4 auf der linken und rechten Vorderseite des Papiereinzugs in den L chern 5 der Maschine sitzen Installare la macchina sopra l unit di alimentazione della carta A in modo da mantenere i perni di posizionamento 4
29. 2 3 25 2K5 Connector Description YC3 Connected to the main PWB 5 V DC power input USB data signal USB data signal Not used Ground Connected to the main PWB ON DAF OON ALO A Y N o SUPND POWER GND PH KEY GND AUDIO SUPND_ENTR 24V_DOWN SW_FOOTN HOLDPANEL PANEL_RESET S LED1 S LEDO PANEL STATU S 0 5 V DC Analog 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5 V DC power input from MPWB Ground Power key On Off Ground Audio output signal Energy save mode control signal 24 V DC down signal Not used Operation panel displaying enable signal MPWB reset signal Operation panel LED display signal Operation panel LED display signal Operation panel status signal Connected to the opera tion fan motor 5V2 FAN REMOTE 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to OFM OFM On Off YC6 Connected to the LCD inverter PWB GND 12V LCDBKLT ADJUST GND 12V DC 0 3 3 V DC Analog Ground 12 V DC power output to LINPWB LCD back light On Off LCD back light brightness adjustment signal Ground YC7 Connected to the right operation PWB 2 3 26 CONOR WBN Alo KEYO KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 SCANO SCAN1 SCAN2 SCAN3 SCAN6 LEDO LED1 PH KEY SUPND POWER GND 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3
30. Connect the MFP to the telephone line 4 Plug the modular connector cable 4 into the line terminal and then connect the other end to the telephone line For 100 V 120 V Australian or Chinese models use the supplied modular connector cable B 4 Brancher le c ble du connecteur modulaire 4 la borne de la ligne puis connecter l autre extr mit la ligne de t l phone Pour les mod les 100 V 120 V Australie ou Chine utilisez le c ble connecteur modulaire B fourni Conecte el MFP a la l nea telef nica 3 Limpie la superficie del terminal de tel fono con alcohol y pegue el sello de terminal C El terminal de tel fono de la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX instalado en el OPT2 no est disponible inv lido Selle firmemente el terminal para evitar que un usuario conecte un tel fono por separado Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse 3 Die Oberfl che der Telefonanschlussbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und die Verschlusskappe C anbringen Die Telefonanschlussbuchse der in OPT2 installierten FAX Leiterplatte ist nicht verf gbar ung ltig Die Anschlussbuchse vollkommen versiegeln um den Anschluss 4 Enchufe el cable del conector modular 4 en el terminal de l nea y a continuaci n conecte el otro extremo a la l nea telef nica Para los modelos de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Anschlie en des MFP an die Telefonleitung 4 Telefonmodu
31. 01 9 FOL ERAR TST 224 259 62 15 7 v 7RVF D 20 1 KCAT A 16 MERDOS E 21 77712 0 CX 20 1 De el 17 Extend the wires of connectors 22 of the finisher process table E straight 18 Insert the finisher process table E from the front side of the machine and hang the hooks 23 on the right and left of the table E onto the machine Pass the connectors of the finisher process table E through the opening at the rear side of the machine 17 Allongez tout droit les fils des connecteurs 22 de la table de processus du module de finition E 18 Ins rez la table de processus du module de finition E depuis l avant de la machine et suspendez sur la machine les crochets 23 se trouvant sur les c t s droit et gauche du plateau E Faire passer les connecteurs de la table de processus du module de finition E par l ouverture du c t arriere de la machine 17 Alargue los cables de los conectores 22 de la tabla de proceso de finalizador E para que queden extendidos 18 Inserte la tabla de proceso de finalizador E por el lado delantero de la m quina y cuelgue los ganchos 23 en los lados derecho e izquierdo de la tabla E de la m quina Pase los conectores de la tabla de proceso de finalizador E por la abertura en el lado trasero de la m quina 17 Die Kabel der Steckv
32. Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U969 Checking of toner area code Description Displays the toner area code Purpose To check the toner area code Method 1 Press the start key The toner area code is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Data capture mode Description Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory Purpose In case to occur the error at printing check the print data sent to the machine Method Insert USB memory in USB memory slot Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select Execute Press the start key Send the print data to the machine Once the print data is stored into USB memory Complete will be displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the developing unit number Description Displays the developing unit number Purpose To check the developing unit number Method 1 Press the start key The number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 93 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U985 Displaying the developing unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the developing counter Purpose To check the count value machine number and the
33. 4200 BD initialization problem System error Normal service call processing 8800 Document finisher communication error System error gt service call partial operation optional 3000 sheet document finisher 9000 Optional DP communication problem System error gt service call partial operation Table 1 4 1 In addition it is a system error if the following error code is displayed When an error has occurred clear the error by turning the main power switch off then on CF1XX CF2XX CF3XX CFAXX CF5XX CF6XX CF7XX CFAXX CFBXX OxFBXX Partial operation control If one of the following service codes is detected partial operation control will be activated Take actions to clear the cause of the trouble and perform maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control Code Contents C0840 Faults of RTC C1010 Lift motor 1 error C1020 Lift motor 2 error C1030 PF lift motor 1 error optional paper feeder C1040 PF lift motor 2 error optional paper feeder C2600 PF paper drive motor error optional paper feeder C8030 Tray upper limit detection problem optional document finisher C8040 Belt problem optional document finisher C8140 Tray elevation motor problem optional document finisher C8170 Finisher front side registration motor problem optional built in finisher C8180 Finisher rear side registration motor problem optional built in finisher C8190 Finisher trailing edge registration
34. 3 FA F7 M Omm FIL 4 BILE 5 ALE C F AF SHEA 1 E BONOS 4 EJIR 2 TALEE 22 ACH A F 2819 5 5 Fit the latch catch B to the eject cover 1 pne Close the eject cover 1 using two M4 x 10 binding screws F Fermer le couvercle d jection 1 Fixer le pontet du loquet B au couvercle d jection 1 l aide de deux vis de raccordement M4 x 10 F Cierre la cubierta de expulsi n 1 Coloque el cerrojo B en la cubierta de expulsi n 1 usando dos tornillos de sujeci n M4 x 10 F Schliessen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung 1 Bringen Sie den RiegelschloBbausatz B mittels der zwei M4 x 10 Verbundschrauben F an die Auswurfabdeckung 1 an Chiudere la copertura dell uscita carta 1 Inserire il dispositivo di arresto B nella copertura dell uscita carta 1 utilizzando due viti di serraggio M4 x 10 F Fk 1 X E HPA M4 x 10 5 7 EHE PK CAR B BAST Ka E S Et zx 23 0 AC FoF B ZER M X 1074 F F 2 1 CRYO AIT 5 Tip the rail retainer C over in the direction of the arrow so that the retainer fits into the groove in the guide rail D Ensure that the plate spring 4 fits into the groove and that the edge 5 of the guide rail D fits between the rollers behind the rail retainer C Retourner l l ment de r tention du rail C dans la
35. BECHET SOL MET 25 11 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR BUILT IN FINISHER Supplied parts A Paper conveying 1 Sub staple cover Staple cover Hook holder T Finisher process table 1 fournies A Unit de transport du 1 B Capot de l agrafeuse auxiliaire 244 Capot de l agrafeuse zd D Support de iss d E Table de processus du module de finition 1 Partes suministradas A Unidad de transporte de papel 1 B Cubierta secundaria de grapas s C Cubierta de grapas xl D Soporte de gancho zd E Tabla de proceso de finalizador 1 Deutsch Gelieferte Teile A 1 B Hefterhilfsabdeckung 21 C Hefterabdeckung P D Hakenhalter sell E Finisher Druckablage 1 Parti di fornitura A Unita di trasporto 1 Coperchio secondario della pinzatrice 2 1 Coperchio pinzatrice ar D Supporto gancio ssl E Tabella di elaborazione del finitore 1
36. Check procedures corrective measures Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if itis extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 33 Defective exposure lamp 9 Black dots appear on the image Copy example Causes Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly If not replace the exposure lamp see page 1 5 15 Check procedures corrective measures Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 31 Dirty platen Clean the platen Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 31 Dirty drum separation claws Clean the drum separation claws Dirty the heat roller separation claws Clean the heat roller separation claws 1 4 37 2K5 10 Image is blurred Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Scanner moves erratically Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails If any remove it Deformed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 41 Paper conveying section drive prob lem Check the gears and belts and if necessary grease them 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted leading edge registration
37. If S appears check the original If C appears execute again maintenance item 0410 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 75 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U411 1 3 76 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N SCANNER Automatic adjustment in the scanner section 302FZ56990 DP FACE UP Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 302AC68243 section first page Method SCANNER 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 302FZ56990 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 302FZ56990 on the platen 3 Select the item Display Description ALL Automatic adjustment using the platen for original size magnification leading edge timing center line input gamma chromatic aberration filter MTF filter and matrix INPUT Automatic adjustment using the platen for original size magnification leading edge timing center line Automatic adjustment using the platen for
38. 1 3 106 Checking Application Details 1 Press Next of Optional Function 2 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 3 Select the application you want to check the details of and press Detail You can now view detailed information on the selected application 14 User Login Administration Enabling Disabling User Login Administration 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 2 Press Next of User Login Setting and then Change of User Login 3 Select Local Authentication or Network Authenti cation Select Off to disable user login administra tion If you select Network Authentication enter the host name 62 characters or less and domain name 256 characters or less for the Authentica tion Server Select NTLM or Kerberos as the server type 4 Press OK Adding a User 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 2 Press Next of User Login Setting Register Edit of Local User List and then Add Press Change of User Name Enter the user name and press OK Enter the login user name and E mail address fol lowing 3 and 4 above 6 Press Change of Login Password and then P
39. 1 WR 13 W Fx 14 E 0352 11 us YTAB2445 REC gt M3 12 2 AIC vC Y A 1391 ARAL ANS 14 SHY H Remove the screw 15 from the rear side of the machine to remove the cover 16 Retirez la vis 15 du c t arri re de la machine pour d poser le capot 16 Saque el tornillo 15 del lado trasero de la m quina para desmontar la cubierta 16 Die Schraube 15 auf der R ckseite der Maschine herausdrehen um die Abdeckung 16 abzunehmen Togliete la vite 15 dal lato posteriore della macchina per rimuovere il coperchio 16 FALESA 1414822 15 W F at 16 IRANZO EA 15 1 KEIL DI 16 ZERO 45 Attaching the sub staple cover 9 Insert the hook 17 of the sub staple cover B and turn the cover B in the direction of arrow until it clicks to attach Fixation du capot de l agrafeuse auxiliaire 9 Ins rez le crochet 17 du capot de l agrafeuse auxiliaire B puis faites tourner le capot B dans le sens de la fl che jusqu ce qu il s encliqu te pour le fixer Colocaci n de la cubierta secundaria de grapas 9 Inserte el gancho 17 en la cubierta secundaria de grapas B y gire la cubierta B en el sentido de la flecha hasta que se produzca un chasquido para colocarlo Anbringen der Hefterhilfsabdeckung 9 Den Haken 17 der Hefterhilfsabdeckung B einsetzen und die Abdeckung B in
40. 18 19 20 21 Pass the 4 pin connector of the key counter signal cable through the aperture in the key counter cover retainer Insert the 4 pin connector of the key counter signal cable into the 4 pin connector of the key counter wire Hook the square hole on the key counter cover onto the key counter cover retainer Fit the key counter unit using the screw Seat the 2 pin and the 4 pin connectors between the right upper cover and the parti tion plate Refit the scanner right cover Be sure not that the 2 pin connector is not pinched between the scanner right cover and the upper right cover Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode Run maintenance item U204 and select KEY COUNTER Exit the maintenance mode Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key counter is pulled out Check that the counter counts up as prints are made 1 2 14 c Hook dd a E ay 2 a a Z Ak Za tt EA A 4 key counter wire 4 connector key counter cover retainer 4 pin key counter signal cable M4 x 6 screw B4A04060 key counter Square hole retainer Figure 1 2 19 ZA Partition plate Right upper cover 2 Key cou
41. 2 KERIT JA UTC AS PY Se B ERST 11 FHS RETA A y 350056 Y T f A B TRECE 12 RU DEAR KFL 13 YE 22 Je P VE RAT 14 HY rea Tess FART 14 AAA T CENE EP E UU Kira RE 2 0 df amp oxaA2 oBiEtCA 1024405 LASA BG mc ARAU AD LIZ 7 y 12 Di NATA YA ORK 13 DANCAS LIT FARIA NE VCH AR b 14 ZEL BRO gt AY OM SBME BX 725 MWR 14 AMERO E AY Sy A LSD UR la 205 nil n 3 10 Adjust the height of the front right caster in the same manner as in step 2 so that each center of the hooking portions 16 of the latch catch is aligned with the center of the two hooks 15 on the document finisher A when the document finisher A is joined to the MFP viewed from above R gler la hauteur de la roulette avant droite en proc dant comme l tape 2 de mani re que chacun des centres des parties d accrochage 16 du pontet du loquet soit align sur le centre des deux crochets 15 du retoucheur de document A lorsque le retoucheur de document A est fix au MFP vue partir du haut Ajuste
42. 212 EXTSWN 5 SEPSWN 4274 5VSL YC23 1 Upper primary paper 1 1 5VSL B13 1 1 11 HIPAPSW B12 B12 2 PSW1 1 24VSL GND 11 11 3 2 2 H 2 2 DFSOLDR connector connector l FSSOL 3 3 1 5 DFSOLRS 35VSL ces AREA AR MEA MI ai j HILIFTSW B9 i GND B8 i YC10 HILIFTMREM B7 1 8 1 1 3 24 1 2 GND B6 7 2 2 2 247102 HILIFTSWT B5 6 3 3 24VIL2 GND Bj EEEE m 1 24 2 HILIETSWZ By 9 MM 415 5 GND HILENGSW B24 2 Relay 3 6 6 ND GND B1 9 1 2777 7 GND a 118 878 ND i 9 MMOTLOCK o 1 10 DMOTLOCK 5VSL j 1 11 MMOTON LOPAPSW 1 12 DMOTON GND Ad 1 Relay Relay 13 MMOTCWCCW connector 4 connector DRM 14 DMOTCWCCW 5VSL A3 15 MMOTCLK LOLIFTSW 2 LSW2 GND AT 16 DMOTCLK LOLIFTMREM 11 1 l GND 10 2 LOLIFTSWi A9 LM2 GND AB 8 4 LOLIFTSW2 5 8171 17 77 324VIL2 GND A13 A13 1 Relay 2 7 2 18 18 24VIL2 LOLENGSW A12 A12 2 connector 1 8 3 E 19 ND 5 4 20 GND PFM 4 5 H 21 MOTLOCK YC22 3 6 22 SMOTON NC 24 24 2 7 23 SMOTCWCCW 5VSL 23 23 Fal 1138 24 SMOTCLK BYPFEEDSW 22 22 68 21 Li H 25 25 24VSL GND 21 connector 7 1 26 26 DHEATERREM PFFEED 20 8 gt e V PFREADY 19 f 1 PFSDO 18 g 2 PFSDI 17 h PFSCLK 16 5VSL 14 k RE E 14 GND 13 1 gt 1 COMDA HIDIG2 12 1 1 2 COMDNB GND 10 2 EM COMDNA HIDIGO 8 3 Rel Rel Cassette 1 4
43. KYOCERA TASKalfa 3001 SERVICE MAN VAL Published in February 201 2 55 061 Rev 1 CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal ATTENTION IL Y A UN RISQUE D EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUC TIONS DONNEES Il peut tre illegal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d gout municipales V rifiez avec les fonc tionnaires municipaux de votre r gion pour les d tails concernant des d chets solides et une mise au rebut appropri e Revision history Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks 1 February 4 2010 CONTENTS 1 2 12 1 3 4 1 3 53 1 3 63 1 3 74 1 3 82 1 3 83 1 4 6 to 1 4 8 1 4 14 1 5 32 1 6 1 2 4 3 to 2 4 6 This page is intentionally left blank Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities Safety warnings and
44. ON DAF WN ALON DOO ee Cee E N gt o MPFSIZEO MPFSIZE1 MPFSIZE2 GND 5VSL MPFPAPS GND 24VSL MPFPAPCL 24VSL MPFFECL 5VSL MPFLENGTH GND 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 5 V DC 0 5 V DC MPPWSW On Off MPPWSW On Off MPPWSW On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to MPPSW MPPSW On Off Ground 24 V DC power output to MPPFCL MPPFCL On Off 24 V DC power output to MPFCL MPFCL On Off 5 V DC power output to MPPLSW MPPLSW On Off Ground Connector Signal Voltage 2K5 Description YC8 Connected to the feed switch 1 2 3 feed clutch 1 2 83 left cover 2 Switch paper feed clutch 1 2 toner feed clutch regis tration Switch reg istration clutch duplex feed clutch duplex paper con veying switch and paper con veying fan motor 1 2 GND LFEED SW3 5VSL 24VSL FEED3CL GND LFEED_SW2 5VSL GND FECOSW 24VSL FEED2CL UPFECL 24VDUP LOFECL 24VDL TONERCLREM TONERCL 24V NC GND RESISTSW 5VSL GND UFEED_SW 5VSL 24VSL FEED1CL DUPCL 24VSL GND DUPSW 5VSL 24VSL RESFECL FAN4REM 24VSL FANSREM 24VSL 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24
45. Rimontare le parti rimosse nelle loro posizioni originali 2 EUH IST BE a DU PI RARE AEST A EHL 17 17b EAL A BF ZA RE ENE E o Peary 7 ayy 2 REDDE 0 BEL RIC AVbAA HY 2 AROMA 17 7b BEL 4 7225 X FPE AF 2 VMORS AZ 759 IROL fe 0 CO AIS After completing the installation return to pages 7 to 8 of the installation procedure and loosen the four M4 x 6 binding screws E in steps 11 to 12 Then loosen the two screws 8 in step 13 and adjust the guide rail installation Une fois l installation termin e revenir aux pages 7 et 8 du processus d installation et desserrer les quatre vis de fixation M4 x 6 binding screws E aux tapes 11 et 12 Desserrer ensuite les deux vis 8 l tape 13 et r gler l installation de la glissi re Despu s de finalizada la instalaci n vuelva alas p ginas 7 a 8 del procedimiento de instalaci n y afloje los cuatro tornillos de sujeci n M4 x 6 E de los pasos 11 y 12 Despu s afloje los dos tornillos 8 del paso 13 y ajuste la instalaci n del carril gu a Nach Abschluss der Installation noch einmal zu den Seiten 7 bis 8 der Installationsprozedur zur ckkehren und die vier M4 x 6 Verbundschrauben E gem Schritt 11 bis 12 l sen Dann die beiden Schrauben 8 in
46. 1 3 53 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U201 Initializing the touch panel Description Automatically correct the positions of the X and Y axes of the touch panel Purpose To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the INITIALIZE or CHECK Display Description INITIALIZE Adjusts the display on the panel automatically CHECK Checks the display on the touch panel Method INITIALIZE 1 Press the start key 2 Press the center of the keys Be sure to press three keys displayed in order The touch panel is adjusted automatically 3 Press the indicated three keys and then check the display 4 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Method CHECK 1 Press the start key 2 Press the indicated three keys and then check the display When adjusting the display press INITIALIZE to execute the adjustment automatically 3 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 54 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary Main
47. 2 3 13 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC1 1 GND Ground Connected 2 TXP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data hard O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data 4 GND l Ground 5 RXN l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data 6 RXP l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data 7 GND l Ground YC3 1 EG_SCLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EPWB clock signal Connected 2 HLD_ENG O 0 3 3V DC EPWB hold signal main 3 EG_SI O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EPWB serial communication data signal 4 SLEEPG O 0 3 3V DC Sleep signal On Off 5 GND l Ground 6 GND l Ground 7 GND Ground 8 VMRED_P 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 9 GND l Ground 10 VMRED_N 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 11 VCLK P 0 3 3 V DC pulse MPWB clock signal 12 VD DO P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 13 VCLK N O 0 3 3 V DC pulse MPWB clock signal 14 VD DO N O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 15 GND l Ground 16 VD_D1_P 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 17 GND l Ground 18 VD_D1_N 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 19 GND l Ground 20 VD_D2_P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 21 GND l Ground 22 VD_D2_N O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 23 GND 4 7 Ground 24 VD_D3_P O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 25 GND l Ground 26 VD_D3_N 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 27 HSYNC DP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Im
48. 838835037 5 2mm 3mm 2mm 3mm 2 Change the setting value For copy example I Increase the setting value For copy example m Decrease the setting value Amount of change per step 0 08 mm 2 Changez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie 1 Augmentez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie m Diminuez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 08 mm 2 Cambie el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra l Aumente el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra m Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 08 mm 2 Den Einstellwert ndern F r Kopienmuster 1 Den Einstellwert erh hen F r Kopienmuster m Den Einstellwert erniedrigen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 08 mm 2 Cambiare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia I Aumentare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia m Diminuire il valore dell impostazione Variazione graduale 0 08 mm 2 MEE f EIFE 1 IN Rr OE AL SORA m IN PARE 1 RE 210 08mm 2 REPEZIT 24 VA HN 1 AUF aw m DAR DRA BUEZ p O 12 3 Make proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 3 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 2 0 mm For d
49. Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection a Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock 222 00 0 o Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking laser light may ter o y fielen Q Handle the charger sections with care They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled 0 AACAUTION Wear safe clothing If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine Keep away from chains belts A Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot Check that the fixing unit thermistor heat and press rollers are clean Dirt on them can cause abnormally high o Do not remove the ozone filter if any from the copier except for routine replacement O Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high voltage components when removing them always h
50. Bei Verwendung des Originals f r die Einstellung k nnen die automatischen Einstellungen f r Vergr erung Vorderkanten Timing und Mittellinie gleichzeitig durchgef hrt werden Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 20 Controllo di immagine dal DP Verificare che la regolazione avvenga nel seguente ordine Altrimenti la regolazione non potr essere seguita correttamente Per controllare l angolo del bordo principale vedere pagina 7 Valore di riferimento Copia simplex entro 3 0 mm Copia duplex entro 4 0 mm Per controllare l angolo del bordo di uscita vedere pagina 10 Valore di riferimento Copia simplex entro 3 0 mm Copia duplex entro 4 0 mm Per controllare l ingrandimento vedere pagina 14 Valore di riferimento Entro 1 5 Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale vedere pagina 16 Valore di riferimento Entro 2 0 mm Per controllare la linea centrale vedere pagina 18 Valore di riferimento Copia simplex entro 2 0 mm Copia duplex entro 3 0 mm Quando si utilizza l originale per la regolazione la regolazione automatica dell ingrandimento della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l originale vedere pagina 20
51. Contact the Service Administrative Division Defective PWB Replace the main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Machine number mismatch error Machine number of main PWB and engine PWB does not match Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Power CPU communication problem The engine PWB and the power CPU are unable to communicate with each other Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Optional paper feeder communication problem The engine PWB and the paper feeder are unable to communicate with each other 1 4 20 Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC22 on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB or paper feeder main PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2K5 Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures FAX image DIMM problem DIMM is not installed correctly DIMM cannot be accessed DIMM installed incorrectly Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation DMA problem DMA transmission of image data does not complete within the specified period of time
52. Dehumidifies the image formation section Dehumidi Outputs buzzer monitoring and speaker sounds Removes residual charge from the drum surface Heats the heat roller Prevents overheating in the fuser section Prevents overheating in the fuser section Heats the heat roller Figure 2 2 5 Other electrical components Exposes originals 1 i 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 L 1 1 7 7 PEE SENE D DA PME E tft re nO OLULSgSIIL QPQor nBHTAD Ee a5 520 5009 Oct 0 5650 06 4 5 55998 acce c i osco x 5525250 c0ad3 ouro KNOY dg M 2 2 8 2K5 2 3 1 Power source PWB Figure 2 3 1 Power source PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 1 2K5 Connector Signal Voltage Description TB Connected to the AC inlet and main power switch LIVE NEUTRAL LIVE LIVE 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power input AC power input AC power output to MSW AC power input from MSW Connected to the cas sette heater LIVE N C N C NEUTRAL 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power output Not used Not used AC power output Connected to the cas sette heater LIVE N C N C NEUTRAL 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220
53. Error E Mail Size limit The size of E mail exceeds its limit Change the E mail Size Limit in Advanced SMTP General E mail Set ting in COMMAND CENTER Error Server response The server is error status Check if the server is working properly Server setting is not authenti cated normally Check the settings for client server authenti cation Error Not Found Authenti cation Mechanism Unsupported SMTP Authenti cation Mechanism is found Check the settings for client server Authenti cation Mechanism 1 4 50 Error Page max count over The number of pages of a send file exceeded 999 pages Set the number of pages as 999 or less 2K5 4 Network Twain error codes Remarks Displa pray Causes Check procedures corrective measures Error Network transfer with Response is not returned Check the network connection cable net timeout from the server above speci work condition within LAN etc fied time Error Page max count over The number of pages of a Set the number of pages as 999 or less send file exceeded 999 pages 5 Software trouble error codes Remarks Displa Causes Check procedures corrective measures Error Not yet connected Operation handle error Turn the main power switch off and on Error for stored status in the operation handle Error Already connected Operation handle error T
54. For New Zealand model TELEPERMIT X0000000000000 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX PTC 211 XX XXX Install the Dual FAX Refer to page 1 for the supplied parts When installing the optional Dual FAX the approval label H is not required Bring back and discard it Fixer l tiquette d approbation mod le pour l Australie Nouvelle Z lande seulement 12 Effectuer cette proc dure pour le mod le pour l Australie Nouvelle Z lande seulement Lorsqu on installe le FAX double en option lorsqu on ajoute la carte circuits FAX l OPT2 effectuer les proc dures suivantes Si on ne l installe pas passer la page 14 Installer le FAX double Pour plus de d tails concernant les pi ces fournies se reporter la page 1 Coloque la etiqueta de aprobaci n s lo para los modelos Australiano Nuevo Zeland s 12 Realice este procedimiento s lo para los modelos Australiano Nuevo Zeland s Den Genehmigungsaufkleber anbringen nur f r Australien Neuseeland Modell 12 Dieses Verfahren nur f r das Australien Neuseeland Modell anwenden Cuando instale el FAX dual opcional cuando agrega la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX a OPT2 vaya a los siguientes procedimientos Cuando no lo instala vaya a la p gina 14 Wenn das optionale Dual FAX installiert wird Hinzuf gen der FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 mit den folgenden Verfahren fortfahren Erfolg
55. Operation fan motor 2 O Rating label downside Rating label inside Fuser fan motor Rating label outside Power source fan motor Rating label downside Figure 1 5 99 Developing fan motor ject fan motor ng label inside Paper conveying fan motor 2 Rating label outsid gt Rating label outside A x Z MC 2 Paper conveying fan motor 1 Rating label outside A 1 5 55 2K5 This page is intentionally left blank 1 5 56 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware 2K5 1 Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB engine PWB and MMI Firmware upgrading requires the following tools USB memory Procedure 1 Perform maintenance item U000 mainte nance report output and check U019 ROM version Press the power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Insert the USB memory in the USB memory slot Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on Upgrading firmware starts Caution Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading 100 Completed is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete Turn the main power switch off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Remove the
56. Procedure Removing the covers 1 Open the front cover 1 and left cover 1 2 2 Remove the clip holder 3 3 Remove two screws 4 and release three latches 5 to remove the cover 6 Proc dure Retrait des capots 1 Ouvrez le capot avant 1 et le capot gauche 1 2 2 Retirez le support pince 3 3 Retirez deux vis 4 et lib rez trois verrous 5 pour retirer le capot 6 Procedimiento Desmontaje de las cubiertas 1 Abra la cubierta frontal 1 y la cubierta izquierda 1 2 2 Desmonte el soporte de clip 3 3 Saque los dos tornillos 4 y suelte los tres pestillos 5 para desmontar la cubierta 6 Verfahren Entfernen der Abdeckungen 1 Die Frontabdeckung 1 und die linke Abdeckung 1 2 ffnen 2 Den B roklammerhalter 3 entfernen 3 Die zwei Schrauben 4 herausdrehen und die drei Rasten 5 l sen um die Abdeckung 6 abzunehmen Procedura Rimozione dei coperchi 1 Aprite il coperchio anteriore 1 e il coperchio sinistro 1 2 2 Rimuovete il contenitore delle graffette 3 3 Togliete due viti 4 e rilasciate i tre fermi 5 per rimuovere il coperchio 6 1 1 AA 1 2 2 PRL 9 3 2 244622 4 5 tite 6 EFIE 24 HORU HL LAI 01 BLUE 2 Zp 2 2U vy 3 ZBIT 3 EX IDAZ 5 3 BRL TA A 6 20039 Release the la
57. o ON DAF ON o 10VSL 10VSL 081 BO GND 092 GND 093 GO GND 084 GE GND OS5_RO GND OS6_RE 10 V DC power output to CCDPWB 10 V DC power output to CCDPWB CCD output signal Ground CCD output signal Ground CCD output signal Ground CCD output signal Ground CCD output signal Ground CCD output signal 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC26 14 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to CCDPWB Connected 15 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to CCDPWB CCD 16 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to CCDPWB 17 CCDSH O 0 3 3V DC CCD control signal 18 GND l Ground 19 CCDRS O 0 3 3V DC CCD control signal 20 GND 47 Ground 21 CCDCP O 0 3 3V DC CCD control signal 22 GND l Ground 23 CCDCLK1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse CCD clock signal 24 3 3VSL O 3 3V DC 3 3 V DC power output to CCDPWB YC27 1 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to SPWB Connected 2 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to SPWB to the scan Ground ner PWB 4 GND l Ground 5 GND Ground 6 GND l Ground 7 SLEEP O 0 3 3V DC Sleep signal 8 GA_SO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 9 GA_SRDY O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Ready signal 10 GA_OVM O 0 3 3 VDC Control signal 11 GA_SI 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 12 GA_SEL 0 3 3 V DC Select signal 13 GA_SCLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 14 PAGESTART 0 3 3 V DC SPWB control signal 15 GND
58. 0 5 V DC Scan signal 4 Scan signal 5 Operation panel LED display drive signal 5 Operation panel LED display drive signal 6 Operation panel LED display drive signal 7 Operation panel LED display drive signal 0 Operation panel LED display drive signal 1 Ground Connected to the front operation PWB 0000 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC Scan signal 5 Operation panel LED display drive signal 5 Operation panel LED display drive signal 6 Operation panel LED display drive signal 1 Ground YC11 Connected to the speaker N gt lo AlAOaN OO AUN oo Analog Analog Speaker sound signal Speaker sound signal 15 Connected to the power source PWB Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 12 V DC power input from PSPWB 2 3 27 2K5 This page is intentionally left blank 2 3 28 2K5 Maintenance parts list Maintenance part name Alternative part No Part No Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pulley MP forwarding pulley MP feed roller 1 MP feed roller 2 MP feed pulley Left registration roller Right registration roller Feed pulley Feed roller 1 Feed roller 2 Feed roller 3 Registration cleaner PULLEY PAPER FEED PULLEY SEPARATION PUL
59. 1 i a TOP Y 1 312 LEFT XF 1 2 3 BOT Y 1 4 RIGHT X I I L 1 1 1 I YC5 1 2 FAN REMOTE 1 2 1 5V2 A 1 I 1 i YC5 1 CT F TD 2 TD 3 RD 4 RD 5 6 PHY 7 Sor Ethernet 9 ANO MAC 10 LockPin1 G1 LockPin2 G2 LockPin3 G3 LockPin4 G4 YC5 2 VBUS U1 DATA U2 DATA U3 CN 02 USB PC LockPin1 GU1 LockPin2 GU2 YC20 VBUS 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 GND 3 TypeA LockPin1 1 1 LockPin2 LP2 YC23 5V 5V GND 2 2 GND CTL 1 3 CTL CONFM 2K5 2 4 13 Wiring diagram No 6 MPWB YC8 GND AUDIO 2 SELAUDIOO 3 3 SELAUDIO1 4 f 4 REGS 8 6 6 A15 7 7 8 14 9 10 10 A13 11 A5 12 12 A12 13 4 14 14 11 15 16 16 A10 17 A2 18 18 A9 19 1 20 20 GND 21 GND 22 22 D8 23 DO 24 a D9 25 25 Di 26 D10 27 D2 28 Pa 011 29 29 D3 30 GND 31 GND 32 D12 33 33 D4 34 D13 35 D5 36 Ez D14 37 D6 38 38 D15 39 D7 40 GND 1 41 GND 42 KUIODREQTO 43 43 KUIODREQT1 44 44 KUIODREQRO 45 KUIODREQR1 46 46 KUIOIORNO 47 KUIOIORN1 48 48 KUIOIOWNO 49 KUIOIOWN1 50 YC9 KUIOCSNO 1 1 KUIOCSN1 2 KUIOACKNO 3 f 3 KUIOACKN1 4 KUIOIRNO 5 5 KUIOIRN1 6 KUIORDYO 7 7 KUIORDY1 8 GND of 9 GND 10 KUIODACKRNO 11 11 KUIODACKRN1 12 KUIOD
60. 2 4 x 10 4 2 02200 2 Cartes de format de papier 6 Supports errr 4 Vis M4 X 20 cnet en dives 2 Vis Diarra 2 Tarjeta de tama o de papel 6 4 Tornillo M4 x 20 2 Tornillo M4 x 10 2 Papierformatkarte M4 20 Schraube 4 x 10 Schraube Scheda formato carta 6 06 2 deniers dcir 4 Vite 20 222 222 2 Vite x 10 2 6 4 WEY MA 20 2 WEE MAX 10 2 100V UZgV 2 Use the paper size card E which is the same specification paper size used in the machine Utiliser la carte de format de papier E poss dant le m me format de papier que celui sp cifi pour la machine Utilice la tarjeta de tama o de papel E que sea del mismo tama o de papel especificado utilizado en la m quina Benutzen Sie die Papierformatkarte E deren Format mit demjenigen des f r die Maschine vorgeschriebenen Papiers bereinstimmt Utilizzare la scheda formato carta E corrispondente al f
61. Adjusting the scanner automatically Setting the target Setting the JPEG compression ratio System Copy Send 90 90 90 90 90 90 30 40 51 70 90 30 40 51 70 90 30 40 51 70 90 30 40 51 70 90 15 25 60 15 25 60 Adjusting laser power output 0 Setting the image processing mode 1 0 Network scanner Setting the enterprise mode Factory initial setting 1 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 4 Section Content of maintenance item 2K5 Initial setting Others Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Checking clearing the paper jam counts Checking clearing the service call counts Checking clearing counts by optional devices Resetting partial operation control Checking the total counter value Clearing the black ratio data Checking copy counts by paper sizes Setting backup data reading writing Checking the copy counts Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Checking machine life counts Setting the automatic toner install OFF Relay board maintenance MODEO Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0 0 Checking of log Checking of toner area code Data capture mode Checking the developing unit number Displaying the developing unit history HDD scandisk Checking the scanner count Factory initial setti
62. BSB EES Y RBD TY CW 9S 0 525 ARE AA MAIKO E A y FE OFF ICL BRT FT RK TA 38 785 T Procedure Installing the DP 1 Install two pins D Proc dure Installation du DP 1 Installez deux goupilles D Procedimiento Instalaci n del DP 1 Instale dos pasadores D Verfahren Installieren des DP 1 Zwei R ndelschrauben D eindrehen Procedura Installazione del DP 1 Inserire due perni D 1 BE 2644 D REFIR DP DRY 417 1 E O 2AERY US DP DE v 1 LES D 1 Insert the pins D into the hinge holes 1 of DP A and slide the DP A toward the front side to install it Ins rez les goupilles D dans les orifices de charni re 1 du DP A puis faites glisser le DP A vers l avant pour l installer Inserte los pasadores D en los orificios de bisagra 1 del DP A y deslice el DP A hacia el lado frontal para instalar Die R ndelschrauben D in die Scharnierl cher 1 des DP A einf hren und den DP A zum Installieren nach vorn schieben Inserire i perni D nei fori della cerniera 1 del DP A e fare scorrere il DP A verso il lato anteriore per installarlo BRA D HA DP CA f EEBEBETU 1 TER Tir RUT DP ZO EU S 3 Fix the DP using four M4 x 14 screws E Right One Left Three Fixez le DP l aide de quatre vis M4 x 14 E C t droi
63. Before installing the document processor be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Pr cautions Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Avant d installer le chargeur de document veillez mettre la machine hors tension et d brancher le c ble d alimentation de la prise murale Precauciones Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Antes de instalar el procesador de documentos aseg rese de desconectar el interruptor principal de la m quina y desenchufar el cable el ctrico del tomacorriente de la pared VorsichtsmaRnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Schalten Sie unbedingt den Betriebsschalter der Maschine aus und trennen Sie das Netzkabel von der Netzsteckdose bevor Sie den Vorlageneinzug installieren Precauzioni Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite Prima di installare l alimentatore di originali assicurarsi di spegnere l interruttore principale di alimentazione della macchina e scollegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a muro della rete elettrica A P IN ELO E DRT Fa HUT eR ZD x 3t
64. Figure 1 5 29 Screw Scanner rear cover Figure 1 5 30 9 Remove the connector of the inverter PWB 10 Release the clamp and remove the wire 11 Pull the connector out from the opening on Connector the rear of the scanner unit Inverter PWB ON a T ue Z So 12 Remove two films Film 13 Remove the wire guide lid 14 Move the mirror 1 frame to notch position lt gt j of 5 NOP eS SCX gt Notch position 0 5 AZ ASS Figure 1 5 32 1 5 17 2K5 15 Remove the screw 16 Open the lamp wire guide lid Figure 1 5 33 17 Unhook the hook and remove the exposure KR lamp SS 18 Replace the exposure lamp and install the SK lamp Su 19 Refit all the removed parts VE Exposure lamp Z 27 22 Exposure lamp EL Figure 1 5 34 1 5 18 2K5 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced 2 1 Detaching the scanner wires Procedure Slit glass 1 Remove the scanner unit see page 1 5 19 2 Remove the exposure lamp see page 1 5 P Scanner unit 15 Y 3 Remove the screw and remove the slit Slit holder holder plate 4 Remove the slit glass 5 Remove each screw and remove front and rear wire holder plates 6 Remove the mirror 1 frame from the scanner unit
65. Figure 2 1 4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram 2 1 3 2K5 2 1 2 Main charging section The main charging section consists of the main charger assembly drum and so on The drum is electrically charged uni formly by means of a grid to form a latent image on the surface The main charger unit charges the drum so that a latent image is formed on the surface the shield grid ensuring the charge is applied uniformly Tungsten wire AA Y Drum Main charger unit Shield grid Figure 2 1 5 Main charging section Main charging high voltage CN1 8 HVPWB ZENER PWB 777 MHVDRN Figure 2 1 6 Main charging section block diagram 2 1 4 12 5 EPWB 2 1 3 Optical section 2K5 The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for printing 1 Image scanner section The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp EL and scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB in the image scan ning unit via the three mirrors the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner When the DP is used the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DP original scanning position t
66. J Ground Connected A2 LOLIFTSW 05 VDC LICSW2 On Off to the lift 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to LICSW2 switch 1 2 paper switch 4 GND J Ground 1 2 lift A5 LOPAPSW 05 VDC PSW2 On Off Brain A6 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to PSW2 size length AT LOLIFTSW2 0 5 V DC LM2 paper gauge signal switch 1 2 A8 GND J Ground A9 LOLIFTSW1 0 5 V DC LM2 paper gauge signal A10 GND J Ground A11 LOLIFTREM O 0 24V DC LM2 On Off A12 LOLENGSW 0 5V DC PLSW2 On Off A13 GND J Ground B1 GND J Ground B2 HILENGSW 0 5V DC PLSW1 On Off B3 HILIFTSW2 0 5 VDC LM1 paper gauge signal B4 GND J Ground B5 HILIFTSW1 0 5 V DC LM1 paper gauge signal B6 GND J Ground B7 HILIFTREM O 0 24V DC LM1 On Off B8 GND J Ground B9 HILIFTSW 0 5V DC LICSW1 On Off B10 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to LICSW1 B11 GND Ground B12 HIPAPSW 0 5V DC PSW1 On Off B13 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to PSW1 YC25 1 NC Not used Connected 2 NC J Not used tothepower Nc Not used source PWB 4 24VIL3 24V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB YC32 1 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to TEMS Connected 2 HUMIDA Analog TEMS detection voltage signal teme Ground perature sensor 4 TEMPA Analog TEMS detection voltage signal 5 NC J Not used 2 3 10 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC35 1 EG_SCLK 0 3 3 V DC puls
67. Method HOME POSITION 1 Select HOME POSITION 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position Method DUST CHECK 1 Select DUST CHECK 2 Press the start key The exposure lamp lights 3 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop key Method DP READING 1 Select DP READING 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position Completion Press the stop key when scanning stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 37 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Sets the luminosity correction for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original is scanned from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting INPUT DATA DP input light luminosity correction 0to3 0 Settings 0 No correction 1 Slight correction 2 Medium correction 3 Strong correction 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is d
68. effectuer le r glage en proc dant dans l ordre suivant Sinon il sera impossible d obtenir un r glage correct Pour v rifier l angle du bord avant reportez vous la page 7 Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max copie recto verso Pour v rifier l angle du bord arri re reportez vous la page 10 Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max copie recto verso Pour v rifier l agrandissement reportez vous la page 14 Valeur de r f rence 1 5 max Pour v rifier la synchronisation du bord avant reportez vous la page 16 lt Valeur de r f rence 2 0 mm max Pour v rifier la ligne m diane reportez vous la page 18 Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 2 0 mm max copie recto verso 3 0 mm max Lorsque vous utilisez l original pour effectuer le r glage vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le r glage de l agrandissement de la synchronisation du bord avant et de la ligne m diane en une seule fois Pour le r glage automatique en utilisant l original pour effectuer le r glage reportez vous la page 20 34 0 mm max 34 0 mm max Verificaci n de la imagen del DP Aseg rese de ajustar en el siguiente orden De lo contrario el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente Para verificar el ngulo del borde superior vea la p gina 7 Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 3 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 4 0 mm Para verificar el ngulo del borde inferior vea la p gi
69. l Ground 16 SC_RESN 0 3 3 V DC SPWB reset signal 17 SC_SCLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse SPWB clock signal 18 SC SI O 0 3 3 V DC pulse SPWB serial communication data signal 19 SC SO 0 3 3 V DC pulse SPWB serial communication data signal 20 SC_SBSY 0 3 3 V DC SPWB busy signal 21 SC_SDIR 0 3 3 V DC SPWB communication direction signal 22 SC IRN 0 3 3 V DC SPWB interrupt signal 23 HLD ScnN O 0 3 3V DC SPWB scanner hold signal 24 CON10V 0 3 3 V DC SPWB control signal 25 3 3VSL O 33VDC 3 3 V DC power output to SPWB 26 GND l Ground YC28 1 12VSL O 12VDC 12 V DC power output to HDD Connected 2 GND 47 Ground a hard 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to HDD 4 GND l Ground 2 3 19 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal y o Voltage Description YC29 1 12VSL O 12VDC 12 V DC power output to OPWB M Connected 2 5V O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to OPWB M to the main O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to OPWB M operation unit PWB 4 GND Ground 5 GND dl Ground 6 GND dl Ground 2 3 20 2K5 2 3 4 Scanner PWB Figure 2 3 4 Scanner PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 21 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC3 1 SMOTA O 10 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal A Connected 2 SMOTB O 10 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal nuin 3 SMOTA_ O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive control signal _A 4 SMOTB_ O 0 24 V DC pulse SM drive
70. 0 11 540 2600 KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 U S A Phone 973 808 8444 KYOCERA MITA AUSTRALIA PTY LTD Level 3 6 10 Talavera Road North Ryde N S W 2113 Australia Phone 02 9888 9999 KYOCERA MITA NEW ZEALAND LTD 1 3 Parkhead Place Albany P O Box 302 125 NHPC Auckland New Zealand Phone 09 415 4517 KYOCERA MITA THAILAND CORP LTD 9 209 Ratchada Prachachem Road Bang Sue Bangkok 10800 Thailand Phone 02 586 0320 KYOCERA MITA SINGAPORE PTE LTD 121 Genting Lane 3rd Level Singapore 349572 Phone 67418733 KYOCERA MITA HONG KONG LIMITED 11 F Mita Centre 552 566 Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan New Territories Hong Kong Phone 24297422 KYOCERA MITA TAIWAN Corporation 7F 1 2 No 41 Lane 221 Gangchi Rd Neihu District Taipei Taiwan 114 R O C Phone 02 87511560 KYOCERA MITA Corporation 2 28 1 chome Tamatsukuri Chuo ku Osaka 540 8585 Japan Phone 06 6764 3555 http www kyoceramita com Printed in Holland KYOCERA MITA AMERICA INC Headquarters 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 8444 FAX 973 882 6000 New York Branch 1410 Broadway 23rd floor New York NY 10018 TEL 917 286 5400 FAX 917 286 5402 Northeastern Region 225 Sand Road Fairfield New Jersey 07004 0008 TEL 973 808 8444 FAX 973 882 4401 Midwestern Region 201 Hansen Co
71. 0034 LSUOUT TOP MPT U034 test pattern P 1 3 22 To make an adjustment for duplex copying select tion of the MP tray printing adjust ondary paper feed start timing LSUOUT TOP DUP 5 ment ii Adjusting the leading edge registra Registration motor turning on timing sec 0034 LSUOUT TOP CAS U034 test pattern P 1 3 22 tion of the cassette printing adjust ondary paper feed start timing 6 ment Adjusting the leading edge margin IT LSU illumination start timing U402 LESD U402 test pattern P 1 3 71 printing adjustment 7 Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing 0402 TRAIL U402 test pattern P 1 3 71 To make an adjustment for duplex copying select printing adjustment TRAIL DUP 8 ii To make an adjustment of the MP tray select TRAIL MPT Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start end timing 0402 A C U402 test pattern P 1 3 71 printing adjustment E Adjusting magnification of the Data processing 0065 Y SCAN ZOOM Test chart P 1 3 29 No adjustment for copying using the DP scanner in the main scanning direc 10 tion scanning adjustment AAA 2 4 7 2K5 Adjusting os Maintenance mode Original Pade Remarks order Item No Mode Adj
72. 1 1 VD 00 12 12 VD 00 1 1 VCLK N 13 13 VCLK N 1 1 VD DO N 14 14 VD DO N 1 1 GND 15 15 GND 1 VD Di P 16 16 VD Di P 1 H GND 17 17 GND I i VD DIN 18 18 VD_DTN 1 i GND 19 19 GND 5 i VD D2 P 20 20 VD D2 P i GND 21 21 GND D i i VD_D2_N 22 22 VD_D2_N i 1 GND 23 23 GND 1 VD D3 P 24 24 VD D3 P YC25 GND 25 25 GND 24VIL3 1 1 1 VD D3 N 26 26 VD D3 N C 312 E 1 1 HSYNC DP 27 27 HSYNC DP TCONTN 2 3 5 1 VSYNC DP 28 28 VSYNC DP 24VSL 1714 1 1 HSYNC DN 29 28 HSYNC DN o 1 1 VSYNC DN 30 30 VSYNC DN a 1 1 31 31 5 1 YC37 VSYNC_CP 32 32 VSYNC CP DET i 8 1 1 1 12 Relay 1 2 1 FANSPOW HSYNC CN 33 33 HSYNC CN DFSDO 212 T 1 i 1 connector 2 112 FANSDRN VSYNC CN 34 34 VSYNC CN DFSDI 373 6 1 i HSYNC_BP 35 35 HSYNC_BP DFSCLK 474 5 1 1 VSYNC BP 36 36 VSYNC BP DFSEL 5 5 4 H i HSYNC_BN 37 37 HSYNC_BN SISEL 6 6 3 l i VSYNC_BN 38 38 VSYNC_BN DFRDY 7 7 2 i 1 HSYNC AP 39 38 HSYNC AP SIRDY 8 5 1 1 VSYNC_AP 40 40 VSYNC_AP i 1 HSYNC AN 41 21 HSYNC_AN 1 1 VSYNC AN 42 42 VSYNC AN 1 1 GND 43 43 GND 1 1 GND 44 24 GND 8 3 3 GND 1 GND 45 45 GND 7 1414 5VSL 1 EG IRN 46 46 EG IRN gt 6 5 5 PF SEL 1 EG SO 47 47 EG SO 5 17 7 PFSCLK 1 EG SDIR 48 48 EG SDIR 4 HH 8 8 PFSDI 1 EG SBSY 49 49 EG SBSY gt 3 919 PFSDO 1 24V_OFF 24V_OFF gt 2 70 10 PF RDY l 1 IM PF FEED 2 4 11 2K5 Wiring diagram No 4
73. 1103 12 03 08 01 01 1103 12 03 08 01 01 9 Maintenance Log 1027 12 03 08 01 01 Count Item 1027 12 03 0A 01 01 9045571 01 00 1027 12 03 08 01 01 704511 02 00 1027 12 03 08 01 02 7045 01 00 550 12 03 0A 01 01 3454 02 00 28 12 03 08 01 01 3454 01 00 3454 02 00 417 01 00 35 02 00 2N 0400 00 10 Unknown toner Log Count Item 3454 01 00 3454 01 00 3454 01 00 417 01 00 35 01 00 11 Counter Log f J04 000 J30 000 J70 000 J91 002 g C0030 001 C2101 001 C7000 001 J05 000 J31 000 J71 000 J92 000 C0070 001 C2102 001 C7100 001 J10 000 J40 000 J72 000 J93 000 C0100 001 C2201 001 C7101 001 J11 002 J41 000 J73 000 J94 000 C0110 001 C2202 001 C7102 001 J42 002 J74 002 J95 000 0150 001 22 001 42002 J75 002 176 000 6 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Figure 1 3 1 1 3 7 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U000 Detail of event log Items Description System version System date Engine soft version Engine boot version Operation panel mask version Machine serial number Paper Jam Log Count Event Remembers 1 to 16 of occurrence lf the occur rence of the previous paper jam is less than 16 all of the paper jams are logged When the The total page count at the time of the paper jam Log code 2 digit hexa decimal 5 categories a Cause of a paper jam b Paper source occ
74. 2K5 U032 Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch on Purpose To check the operation of each clutch Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the clutch to be operated 3 Press the start key The clutch turns on for 1 s Display Clutches PF1 Paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 PF2 Paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 PF MP TRAY MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL FEED1 Feed clutch 1 FCL1 FEED2 Feed clutch 2 FCL2 LIFT MP TRAY MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL FEED MP TRAY MP feed clutch MPFCL REGIST Registration clutch RCL DUPLEX Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL MOTOR ON The main motor MM and the paper feed motor PFM are turned on 4 To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking solenoid operation Description Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the solenoid to be operated 3 Press the start key The solenoid turns on for 1 s Display Solenoids BRANCH1 Feedshift solenoid FSSOL BRANCH2 Job feedshift solenoid JFSSOL MOTOR ON The main motor MM and the paper feed motor PFM are turned on Optional 4 stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is d
75. 2K5 Description YC6 Connected to the home position switch origi nal detec tion switch and original size sensor 5VSL HPSWN GND 5VSL OPSWN GND 5VSL ORGLSWN GND 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to HPSW HPSW On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to ODSW ODSW On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to OSS OSS On Off Ground Connected to the optional DP 24VSL GND 5VSL GND 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DP Ground 5 V DC power output to DP Ground YC8 Connected to the optional DP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o GND GND GND GND ORGVSYNC DP_RDY DP_SEL SCLK SDO SDI 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse Ground Ground Ground Ground Original scanning interval signal DP ready signal DP select signal DP clock signal DP serial communication data signal DP serial communication data signal Connected to the power source PWB N a 24VSL GND 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB Ground 2 3 23 2K5 2 3 5 Main operation PWB 2 3 24 U5 U7 U8 U6 VY 7 VY 7 NORMAL Figure 2 3 5 Main operation PWB silk screen diagram 2K5 Connector Signal Description YC1 Connected to the touch panel TOP Y Touch panel Y position signal LEFT X Touch
76. 30 30 40 40 50 40 ppm gt au niveau inf rieur FLS 55 50 ppm gt L installer avec le c t IC en bas L ins rer dans la direction de la fl che jusqu au clic 3 Reposer le couvercle arri re sup rieur 2 2 l aide des 9 vis 1 puis le couvercle du filtre 2 1 Passer l tape 4 de la page 5 2 Instale la memoria DIMM 1 o la memoria DIMM opcional J en la ranura para la memoria 3 en el nivel medio FLS 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 ppm el nivel inferior FLS 55 50 ppm Inst lelo con el lado IC hacia abajo Ins rtela en la direcci n que indica la flecha hasta que escuche un clic 3 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 2 2 utilizando los 9 tornillos 1 y luego reinstale la cubierta del filtro 2 1 Vaya al paso 4 de la p gina 5 2 Setzen Sie die DIMM Speichermodule 1 oder das optionale DIMM Speichermodul J in die mittlere Position FLS 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 ppm die untere Position FLS 55 50 ppm der Speicherbank 3 ein Mit der IC Seite nach unten weisend installieren Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung bis es h rbar einrastet 3 Bringen Sie die obere hintere Abdeckung 2 2 wieder mit den 9 Schrauben 1 an und bringen Sie die Filterabdeckung 2 1 an Gehen Sie zum Schritt 4 auf Seite 5 weiter 2 Installare la memoria DIMM 1 o la memoria DIMM opzionale J nello slot della memoria 3 al livello centrale FLS 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 ppm livel
77. Check if the server is operating properly timeout municate 2201 Error Network transfer Error occurs on the network Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc 2202 Error Network transfer with Error occurs on the network Check the network connection cable net timeout work condition within LAN etc 2203 Error Response wait with Response is not returned Check the network connection cable net timeout from the server above speci work condition within LAN etc fied time 3101 Error Server response The server is error status Check if the server is working properly 9181 Error Page max count over The number of pages of a Set the number of pages as 999 or less send file exceeded 999 pages 1 4 49 2K5 3 Scan to E mail error codes Display Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Error Host name SMTP sever name is not set Error SMTP server name Register SMTP Server Name in Advanced SMTP General in COMMAND CENTER Error User Password User ID for the authentication is not entered or entered wrongly Wrong authentication pass word is entered Enter the correct user ID password for authentication at Advance in COMMAND CENTER Enter the password of Login User Name of the POP3 page or the SMTP page cor rectly Error No Recipient address The destination address is not specified Specify the dest
78. Coloque la etiqueta JATE s lo para el modelo de 100 V 11 Realice el procedimiento s lo para el modelo de 100 V Den JATE Aufkleber anbringen nur f r 100 V Modell 11 Dieses Verfahren nur f r das 100 V Modell anwenden Applicare l etichetta JATE solo per il modello da 100 V 11 Eseguire questa procedura solo per il modello da 100 V JATE 2 WEAF 100 215 AF 100V HS S RE JATE 2 Y 1117 100V ERROA 11 7v a JATE AV ALVARO lt 42 52 7 7 OB IET SAA gt 305JP34010 2 Fg SAV TVS JATE 7 v ZREU TU 5 lt 30 HK E 7 OK CREST gt 305JP34040 2 JATE FV HHO lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 77V H 7 KE CRET SGA gt 305JP34070 2 SAV TVS JATE FV zB o HITS 10 Sot ele IES 3001 305JP34040 lt 42 52 ppm gt lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm gt Attach the approval label for Australian New Zealand model only 12 Attach the approval label H after wiping with alcohol Perform this procedure for Australian New Zealand model only 30 ppm 7 9 When installing the optional Dual FAX when adding the FAX circuit board to OPT2 proceed to the following procedures When not installing proceed to page 14 For Australian model
79. Eine Probekopie anfertigen um zu pr fen ob eine Kopie in das Job Separator Fach ausgeworfen wird Effettuare una copia di prova per verificare che essa venga espulsa sul vassoio del separatore lavori PN MARIKE fH HECE TENE A a ARRAS Za bUAICHEH SNAPE 5 5 5 o INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FAX System To install the FAX circuit board see page 1 To install the FAX circuit board as Dual FAX see page 11 Pour installer la carte circuits FAX se reporter la page 1 Pour installer la carte circuits FAX comme FAX double se reporter la page 11 Para instalar la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX vea la p gina 1 Para instalar la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX en el FAX dual vea la p gina 11 Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiterplatte finden Sie auf Seite 1 Angaben zur Installation der FAX Leiterplatte als Dual FAX finden Sie auf Seite 11 Per installare la scheda a circuiti FAX vedere pagina 1 Per installare la scheda a circuiti FAX come Dual FAX vedere pagina 11 TB AA SL OP RA RIE HE DV BE A 11 772 HERES DE AI DIDS INFRA OBA AIDA Supplied parts A FAX circuit board 1 B Modular connector cable 120 V Australian model only PJJWC0016Z UL Listed HUAN HSIN TL 120 V 1 C Terminal seal me D 1
80. Fixing plate R 1 J Cover AT Es K S Tite screw M4 x 10 9 L Shoulder screw 2 M eliminator eene 1 F Vis de raccordement x 14 2 G Plaque guide cete 1 H Plaque de fixation avant m Plaque de fixation arri re 21 J Couvercle al K Vis S Tite M4 x 10 29 L Vis 21 M El ment d limination des boucles 1 Tornillo de sujeci n x 14 2 3 Placa guia siiicar 1 H Placa de fijaci n F 21 Placa de fijaci n R a J Cubierta AT 1 K Tornillo S Tite M4 x 10 9 L Tornillo de hombro al M Eliminador de enrollado 1 Verbundschraube 14 2 Gi FUhrUngsplatta 5 eee 1 Fixierplatte F m Fixierplatte R al J Abdeckung AT al K S Tite Schraube M4 x 10 9 L Bundschraube 2d M Gl ttungseinrichtung 1 F Vite di serraggio x 14 2 G Piastra della guida H Piastra di fissaggio F Piastra di fissaggio R J Coperchio AT K Vite S Tite M4 x 10 L Vite a colletto E M Eliminatore di pieghe F G H I J K L M G XM
81. HUMS clock signal A15 TNMOT24V O 24VDC 24 V DC power output to TFM A16 O 0 24V DC TFM On Off B1 IUID1DETN 0 5 VDC Developing unit detection signal B2 GND J Ground B3 IUID1SDA 0 5 V DC pulse Developing unit EEPROM data signal B4 IUID1SCL O 0 5V DC pulse Developing unit EEPROM clock signal B5 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to developing unit B6 IUID2DETN 0 5 V DC Drum unit detection signal B7 GND J Ground B8 IUID2SDA 0 5 V DC pulse Drum unit EEPROM data signal B9 IUID2SCL O 0 5 VDC pulse Drum unit EEPROM clock signal B10 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to drum unit B11 THEAMA_GND Ground B12 THEAMA Analog FTH1 detection voltage signal B13 FUFMLTN 0 5 VDC Fuse cut signal B14 FIXTHCEN Analog FTH2 detection voltage signal B15 NC l Not used B16 3 3V O 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power output to FUPWB YC2 1 24VSL O 24V DC 24 V DC power output to PM Connected 2 GND J Ground to the poly PLGDRN O 0 24 V DC PM On Off gon motor developing 4 PLGRDYN 0 5V DC PM ready signal fan motor 5 PLGCLKN O 0 5V DC pulse PM clock signal loner eo 6 FAN1DRN 0 24 V DC DEVFM On Off tainer sen sor and 7 FAN1POW O 24VDC 24 V DC power output to DEVFM toner con 8 GND J Ground tainer detec o vDC TCS On Off tion switch 10 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to TCS 15 CONTSW 0 5 VDC TCDSW On Off 16 GND l Ground 2
82. Nettoyer la surface au dessus des touches num riques droite du panneau de commande et y coller les tiquettes de l alphabet D En Asie et Oc anie utiliser l tiquette PARS TUV WXYZ et pas les tiquettes PRS TUV WXY et OPER Fije las etiquetas de alfabeto 9 Limpie la zona situada encima de las teclas num ricas en el lado derecho del panel de trabajo y pegue aqu las etiquetas de alfabeto D En Asia y Ocean a utilice la etiqueta PQRS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las OPER Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber 9 Den Bereich ber den Zifferntasten auf der rechten Seite des Bedienfeldes abwischen und die Alphabetaufkleber D hier anbringen In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PQRS TUV WXYZ verwenden nicht die Aufkleber PRS TUV WXY und OPER verwenden Applicazione delle etichette alfabetiche 9 Pulire l area sopra i tasti numerici sul lato destro del pannello operativo e attaccare qui le etichette alfabetiche D In Asia ed Oceania utilizzare l etichetta PARS TUV WXYZ e non utilizzare le etichette PRS TUV WXY e OPER 9 AIR SR D AG EDL A PARS TUV WXYZ xs PRS TUV WXY OPER tx 27 RY KINILOAEY 4117 1000 5 9 FECT System Menu Counter Help amp Print f Send o O 0 Status lob Cancel Copy IM Ce Program Send FAX
83. Omm LIP Adjusting the DP 1 Open the DP and loosen two adjusting screws 4 of right hinge 2 Adjust the position of the DP For copy example d Move the DP down For copy example e Move the DP up Amount of change per scale Approx 0 5 mm R glage du DP 1 Ouvrez le DP et desserrez les deux vis de r glage 4 de la charni re droite 2 R glez la position du DP Pour l exemple de copie d D placez le DP vers le bas Pour l exemple de copie e D placez le DP vers le haut gt gt Quantit de changement par pas Environ 0 5 mm Ajuste del DP 1 Abra el DP y afloje los dos tornillos de ajuste 4 de la bisagra derecha 2 Ajuste la posici n del DP Para la copia de muestra d Mueva el DP abajo Para la copia de muestra e Mueva el DP arriba gt Cantidad de cambio de escala Aprox 0 5 mm Einstellen des DP 1 Den DP ffnen und die zwei Einstellschrauben 4 des rechten Scharniers l sen 2 Die Position des DP einstellen F r Kopienmuster d Den DP absenken F r Kopienmuster Den DP anheben Anderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich Ca 0 5 mm Regolazione del DP 1 Aprire il DP e allentare le due viti di regolazione 4 della cerniera destra 2 Regolare la posizione del DP Per un esempio di copia d Muovere il DP verso il basso Per un esempio di copia e Muovere il
84. Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection the signal cable and the main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Hard disk drive problem The hard disk cannot be accessed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC49 on the main PWB and the connector on the hard disk Repair or replace if necessary Defective hard disk Run U024 HDD formatting without turning the power off to initialize the hard disk Replace the hard disk drive and check for correct operation if the problem is still detected after initialization Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation FAX image DIMM check problem Improper DIMM is installed DIMM installed incorrectly Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly DIMM of another machine is installed Perform maintenance mode U671 RECOV ERY FAX DIMM Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Image processing problem JAMOS is detected twice Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Fax control PWB flash program area checksum error A checksum error occurred with the pro gram of the fax control PWB Defective fax soft w
85. Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge registration see page 1 3 22 Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner lead ing edge registration see page 1 3 30 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Feed clutch paper feed clutch MP paper feed clutch or registration clutch installed or operating incor rectly 13 Paper creases Copy example Causes Check the installation position and operation of each clutch If any of them operates incorrectly replace it Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 38 Paper curled Check the paper storage conditions Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Defective separation Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws 14 Offset occurs Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures 2K5 4 Defective cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 31 Defective fuser unit Check the heat roller and press roller Wrong types of paper 15 Image is partly missing Copy example Causes Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Check procedures corr
86. Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions Select the item to be set Display Description Setting range L A B 0 0 to 100 0 200 0 to 200 0 200 0 to 200 0 Setting the L value Setting the A value Setting the B value 3 Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the or numeric keys 4 Press the start key The value is set Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U425 Setting ADJUST ORIGINAL 1 Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt a of the original at A B and C Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt a of the original at A 35 mm from the leading edge B 110 mm from the leading edge and C 185 mm from the leading edge respectively 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained A C 2 B 2 Enter the values solved using the keys in MAIN ADJ Press the start key The value is set Measure the distance
87. Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature Purpose Normally no change is necessary However can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper or solve a fuser problem on thick paper Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting DRIVE START TEMP Driving start temperature when to 255 C 110 warm up starts READY CONTROL T Fuser center control temperature for O to 255 C 165 displaying Ready for copying READY CONTROL T2 Fuser edge control temperature for 0 to 255 C 155 displaying Ready for copying PRINT CONTROL T Fuser center control temperature to 255 C 165 during printing READY DISP TIME Time of period from driving until 0 to 255 s Ready is displayed 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Resetting the fuser problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The fuser problem data is initialized 4 Turn the main power switch off and on 1 3 51 2K5 Mai
88. To check the operation of each motor Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the motor to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Operation MAIN Main motor MM is turned ON FEED Paper feed motor PFM is turned ON EJECT FW Eject motor EM is turned on clockwise EJECT REV Eject motor EM is turned on counterclockwise DRUM Drum motor DRM is turned ON 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 20 Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches FEED1 Feed switch 1 FSW1 FEED2 Feed switch 2 FSW2 FEED3 Feed switch 3 FSW3 MP TRAY MP feed switch MPFSW REGIST Registration switch RSW EJECT Eject switch ESW BRANCH Feedshift switch FSSW DUPLEX Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW JOB SEPARATOR Job separator eject switch JESW Optional Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No Description
89. Zero cross signal error Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine While fuser heater ON OFF control is PWB and check for correct operation performed the zero cross signal is not input within 3 s C6420 Fuser unit fuse cut problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC1 on The fuse cannot be cut When replacing the fuser unit the fuse cannot be cut in 3 s after the fuse cut signal is turned on connector termi nals the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Fuser unit connec tor inserted incor rectly Reinsert the fuser unit connector if neces sary 1 4 27 2K5 Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Toner motor problem A motor over current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC1 on the engine PWB and the connector on the toner feed motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken the gear Check visually and replace the gear if nec essary Defective toner feed motor Run maintenance item U135 and check if the toner feed motor operates If not replace the toner feed motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Broken inner thermistor wire An abnormal value is de
90. _ underscore OK Asterisk NG b Database version c The oldest time stamp of database version d Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmware version _ underscore OK Asterisk NG e ME firmware version f The oldest time stamp of the ME database version Normal if a and d are underscored and b and e are identical with c and f Scanner firmware version Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed Mac address Send date Send address Destination information Area informa tion Margin settings Top margin Left margin Margin Page length Page width settings Top margin integer part Top margin decimal part Left margin integer part Left margin decimal part Page length integer part Page length decimal part Page width integer part Page width decimal part Life counter The first line Machine life counter MP tray counter Cassette 1 counter Cassette 2 counter Cassette 3 counter Cassette 4 counter Duplex counter Life counter The second line Drum unit counter Developing unit counter Maintenance kit counter Panel lock information 0 OFF 1 Partial lock 2 Full lock USB information 0 Not installed 1 Full speed 2 Hi speed Paper handling information 0 Paper source unit select 1 Paper source unit Black and white printing double count mode 0 All single counts 1 A3 Sing
91. and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 or Standard Sizes 2 for Paper Size 3 Press OK The previous screen reappears 4 Press Change of Media Type to select media type and press OK 1 3 96 Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings Next of MP Tray Setting and then Change of Paper Size 2 To detect paper size automatically press Auto and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size To select paper size press Standard Sizes 1 Standard Sizes 2 Others or Size Entry for Paper Size If you select Size Entry press to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press keys to enter the paper size using the numeric keys Press OK The previous screen reappears Press Change of Media Type to select the media type and press OK Paper Weight 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Media Type Setting Press Next for the media type whose weight you want to change Press Change of Paper Weight Select the weight and press OK Press Close The previous screen reappears To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8 and then Change of Duplex Select Prohibit or Permit and press OK The previous screen reappears Press Close 8 To change the name for Custom 1 8 press Next of Custom 1 8
92. aprox 0 5 mm 11 Vuelva a apretar la tuerca 8 Die H he des DP einstellen L sen Sie die Mutter 8 F r Kopienmuster f L sen Sie die Einstellschraube 9 F r Kopienmuster g Die Einstellschraube 9 festziehen gt Anderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich ca 1 mm 10 ca 0 5 mm 11 Ziehen Sie die Mutter 8 wieder fest Regolazione dell altezza del DP Allentare il dado 8 Per un esempio di copia f Allentare la vite di regolazione 9 Per un esempio di copia g Stringere la vite di regolazione 9 Variazione graduale circa 1 mm 10 circa 0 5 mm 11 Stringere di nuovo il dado 8 WEE DP jS RE FIRE 8 C TTE VE REIR ZZ 9 FEPER IF KER 9 5 2 Imm 10 7 0 5mm 11 KREE 8 FUERA Y P DRS 2 0999 2 Fy bh 8 MSHS ATM OG HEC A 9 4090 ESHTI OBA HIRE emo 1 AREY 4720 OBE 1mm 10 0 5mm 11 Fy b 8 7080 00955 1 ma Refit the cover 7 removed in step 2 Remove the original mat B and refit it see steps 4 and 5 on page 3 Remettez en place le capot 7 retir auparavant a l tape 2 Retirez le tapis d original B et remettez le en place Reportez vous aux tapes 4 et 5 la page 3 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta 7 desmontada en el paso 2 Desmonte la plancha de origi
93. n F H y R I Cuando utilice una m quina a todo color Vaya al paso 7 de la p gina 5 5 Die RiegelschloBbausatz B mit zwei S Tite Schrauben M4 x 10 K an der Fixierplatte F H und die Fixierplatte R I anbringen Mit den oberen Schraubl chern unter den Fixierplatten F H und R 1 anbringen Bei Verwendung eines Vollfarbenkopierers Gehen Sie zum Schritt 7 auf Seite 5 weiter 5 Montare il dispositivo di arresto B sulla piastra di fissaggio F H e sulla piastra di fissaggio R I usando due vite S Tite M4 x 10 K Collegare con i fori per le viti superiori sotto le piastre di fissaggio F H e R 1 IN caso si utilizzi un macchinario a colori Procedere con il punto 7 a pagina 5 5 HEHA B H 2 1122 MA 105 EEA S EF 0 F CD RCD ERL ERNUS BETA 5 LEA 7 2b 72251090 GEA MA X 105 ZA F K 2 ACER FH RC CAE 3 EXER PCH RD O EMO EAR CE 5 2 BOGA 5 lt VFIE Edo Lj Ss tHE PS PUMA PLAZAS CLL C EL LOS y 25900 e pl 22 A LANE Je 22 Steps 1 to 6 below are only for monochrome machines 1 Open the eject cover 1 of the MFP or the printer 2 Remove the two screws 2 securing the feedshift guide assembly 3 and then the assembly Les tapes 1 a 6 ci desso
94. of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of IPv6 Press Change of DHCP Press On or Off of DHCP Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again NetWare Setup 1 Press Next of Network and then Change of Net Ware Press On Press the key for the frame type you want to use Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again AppleTalk Setup 1 CoN Press Next of Network and then Change of AppleTalk Press On or Off Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again WSD Scan Setup 1 2 3 4 After changing the setting restart the system or Press Next of Network and then Change of WSD Scan Press On or Off Press OK turn the machine OFF and then ON again WSD Print Setup 1 m Press Next of Network and then Change of WSD Print Press On or Off Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again 2K5 SSL Setup 1 69 79 Press Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Next of SSL Press On or Off Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again IPP Security Setup 1 2 3 4 Press Next of Network Next o
95. optional The paper entry Reinsert the connector Also check for conti document finisher sensor connector nuity within the connector cable If none The sensor cannot be adjusted within makes poor con remedy or replace the cable the specified range tact Defective paper Replace the paper entry sensor and check entry sensor for correct operation The optical path of Remove the foreign matter the paper entry sensor is blocked by foreign matter Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check main PWB for correct operation C8460 EEPROM problem optional document Defective Replace the finisher main PWB and check finisher EEPROM or fin for correct operation Reading from or writing to EEPROM isher main PWB cannot be performed C8800 Document finisher communication Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the 1 4 32 error optional 3000 sheet document finisher A communication error from document finisher is detected 10 times in succes sion connector termi nals engine PWB and the connector on the fin isher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the finisher main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation 2K5 Remarks rede Contents Causes Check procedures corrective measures C9000 Optional DP communication problem Poor conta
96. optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper entry sensor stay jam Jam code 94 1 4 16 Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper entry sen sor With 5 V DC present at CN14 1and 14 3 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 2 and CN14 4 on the main PCB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper entry sensor Check if the paper entry guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Problem Causes check procedures 2K5 Corrective measures 82 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper conveying sensor jam Jam code 95 Defective paper conveying sensor With 5 V DC present at CN4 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN4 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying sensor Check if the paper convey ing motor malfunctions Check Check if the paper convey ing roller and paper convey ing pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the paper convey ing guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 33 A paper jam in optional built in fin ishe
97. suivre reportez vous aux pages suivantes Avant de v rifier l image sur le DP v rifier et r gler l image sur la machine Pour plus de d tails se reporter au manuel de service de la machine Verificaci n del funcionamiento 1 Para verificar el funcionamiento de la m quina prepare un origina de tama o A3 a donde se dibujan cuatro l neas b a 20 mm de los bordes y una l nea c dibujada en el centro 2 Conecte el enchufe el ctrico de la m quina en un tomacorriente de la pared y conecte el interruptor principal 3 Coloque el original a en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y una copia de muestra 4 Si la separaci n entre el original a y la copia de muestra supera el valor de referencia haga los ajustes Para el procedimiento vea las siguientes p ginas Antes de verificar la imagen del DP verifique y ajuste la imagen desde la m quina Para detalles vea el manual de servicio de la m quina Uberpr fen des Betriebs 1 Um den Betrieb der Maschine zu pr fen ein A3 Original a vorbereiten das vier Linien b im Abstand von 20 mm von den Kanten und eine Linie c in der Mitte aufweist 2 Den Netzstecker der Maschine in die Steckdose stecken und den Betriebsschalter einschalten 3 Das Original a in den DP einlegen und eine Probekopie anfertigen um den Betrieb und das Kopienmuster zu pr fen 4 Falls die Abweichung zwischen dem Original a und dem Kopienmuster den Bezugswert berschr
98. the time of the replace ment of the toner con tainer Code of maintenance replacing item 1 byte 2 categories First byte Replacing item 01 Toner container 02 Maintenance kit Second byte Type of replacing item 00 Fixed Unknown Toner Log Count Item Remembers 1 to 5 of occurrence of unknown toner detection If the occurrence of the previ ous unknown toner detection is less than 5 all of the unknown toner detection are logged The total page count at the time of the Toner Empty error with using an unknown toner con tainer Unknown toner log code 1 byte 2 catego ries First byte 01 Fixed Toner con tainer Second byte 00 Fixed Black Maintenance item No Description 2K5 U000 Items Description Counter Log Comprised of three log counters includ ing paper jams self diagnostics errors and replacement of the toner container f Paper jam g Self diagnostic error h Maintenance item replacing Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location Refer to Paper Jam Log All instances including those are not occurred are displayed Indicates the log counter of self diagnos tics errors depending on cause See page 1 4 20 Example C6000 4 Self diagnostics error 6000 has happened four times Indicates the log counter depending on the maintenance item for mai
99. 1 1 Specifications Machine MP ee edens Desktop Printing Electrophotography by semiconductor laser Supported original types Sheets books and three dimensional objects Maximum original size A3 Ledger Original feed system Fixed Paper Cassette 60 to 120 g m MP tray 45 to 200 g m Paper type Cassette Plain Rough Vellum Recycled Preprinted Bond Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Duplex Same as Simplex MP tray Plain Transparency OHP film Rough Vellum Labels Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Hagaki Color Colour Prepunched Letterhead Thick Envelope High Quality Custom 1 to 8 Paper 51 Cassette A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R Ledger Legal Letter LetterR Statement Oficio Il 8 5 x 13 5 Folio 8K 16K 16KR MP tray B4 4 A4R B5 B5R B6R A6R Ledger Legal Letter LetterR ExecutiveR Statement Oficio II 8 5 x 13 5 Folio 8K 16K 16 Postcards 100 x 148 mm Return postcard 148 x 200 mm Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope C4 Envelope 10 Commercial 10 Envelope 9 Commercial 9 Envelope 6 Commercial 6 3 4 Monarch ISO B5 Youkei 2 Youkei 4 Zoom Manual mode 25 t
100. 1 5 36 laici pL miata 1 5 37 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser 1 5 37 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation 1 5 40 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller sese emm eene 1 5 41 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser 1 5 43 5 Detaching and refitting the 1 5 45 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor 1 em 1 5 46 7 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor 2 2 2 22 1 5 47 8 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermostats 1 and 2 1 5 48 9 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral 1 5 50 A ee Ae eed cte le av ee vec 1 5 51 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone 1 1 5 51 2 Detaching and refitting the ozone 2 1 5 52 3 Detaching and refitting the hard 1 5 53 4 Direction of installing the principal 1 5 55 1 6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware eite eto eme cele e e epe e ena See Redde ebd deed eet 1 6 1 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors enne
101. 2 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte nur in OPT1 oder sowohl in OPT1 als auch in OPT2 installiert worden ist um alle FAX Leiterplatten zu initialisieren Wartungsmodus U600 ausf hren um die Faxsteuerbaugruppe zu initialisieren Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX 1 Collegare MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l interruttore principale su On 2 Se la scheda a circuiti FAX stata installata solo nell OPT1 o in entrambi l OPT1 e l OPT2 per inizializzare tutte le schede di circuito FAX Eseguire il modo di manutenzione U600 per inizializzare il gruppo di controllo fax FARRER 1 MFP di A 014 FT FE 2 LIEFHE E OPTI All OPT2 tantas sefi ARNEE uU 0600 IA o P ECT ZR FAX 24RO 8 8R4E 1 sp LA HA YF ON 2 OPTI 02253 7 13 OPTI amp OPT2 12 FAX EJ ze D n LEBA FRTD FAX 05 22 A EC LAE F 0600 2357 L FAX AE zs 5 E 14 If the FAX circuit board has been added to 2 to initialize the FAX circuit board in OPT2 Initialize OPT2 by pressing PORT2 and the Start key in this order in the maintenance mode U698 and executing the maintenance mode U600 Si la carte circuits FAX a t ajout e l OPT2 pour initialiser la carte circuits FAX dans l OPT2 Initialiser OPT2 e
102. 240 V AC AC power output Not used Not used AC power output Connected to the fuser heater 1 2 and relay PWB MH SH 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC FH1 On Off FH2 On Off AC power output to RYPWB YC4 Connected to the main PWB AN O C1 ON o 5V 5V 5VSL 12VSL 24VSL GND GND GND GND GND 5V DC 5 V DC 5 VDC 12V DC 24V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB 5 V DC power output to MPWB 5 V DC power output to MPWB 12 V DC power output to MPWB 24 V DC power output to MPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Connected to the power source fan motor N a FAN7DRN 24VSL 0 24 V DC 24V DC PSFM On Off 24 V DC power output to PSFM YC7 Connected to the engine PWB 2 3 2 MHEATN SHEATN FAN7DRN GND ZCROSSC SLEEPN 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC FH M On Off FH S On Off PSFM On Off Ground Zero cross signal Sleep signal On Off Connector Signal Voltage 2K5 Description YC8 Connected to the engine PWB 5VSL GND GND 24VSL 24VSL 5VDC 5 V DC power output to EPWB Ground Ground 24 V DC power output to EPWB 24 V DC power output to EPWB Connected to the optional document finisher GND GND GND GND GND GND Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground YC10 Connected to the optional
103. 2K5 4 Clutches and solenoids Machine front Machine inside 22 Machine rear T PATAS 1 11 Figure 2 2 4 Clutches and solenoids Primary paper feed from the cassette 1 Paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 1 Primary paper feed from the cassette 2 Controls the drive of feed roller 2 Paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 3 Feed clutch 1 1 Controls the drive of feed roller Controls the drive of feed roller 4 Feed clutch 2 2 5 Primary paper feed from the MP tray Controls the drive of MP feed roller Secondary paper feed MP feed clutch Feed clutch 3 6 MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL 7 Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller Replenishes toner Feedshift solenoid FSSOL 9 Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL 8 Registration clutch RCL 10 Toner feed clutch TFCL 11 Operates the feedshift guide 2 2 7 5 Other electrical components 2K5 Machine inside Machine front ZA ine insi C Machine rear fies the cassette section 1 Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode
104. 3 Motors Drives developing section and fuser section Drives the drum Main motor 1 2 Drum motor 4422 40200 3 Drives paper feed section Drives cassette 1 lift Paper feed motor Lift motor 1 1 1 0 0 0 4 Drives cassette 2 lift Liftmotor 2 LM ociosas 5 Drives the optical system Drives the eject section 6 Scanner motor 7 Eject motor EM aine c 2 zo SEE a o0 me 55 9579 o 222 9 20 Q oto too P iz s fu i gt gt iW si Lg Ess 5 2 egs 9 SEE oc Qa 259 9 5 5 o s the fuser section Coo Coo Coo Coo Coo Fuser fan motor FUFM 11 s the power source PWB 12 Power source fan motor PSFM s the machine interior around the paper conveying s the machine interior around the paper conveying s the controller box 13 Paper conveying fan motor 1 PCFM1 14 Paper conveying fan motor 2 PCFM2 15 Controller fan motor CONFM 2 2 5 2K5 16 Operation fan motor OFM Cools the operation section 17 Eject fan motor Cools the eject section 2 2 6
105. 4 HIDIG1 6515 4 connector connector 24712 4277 5 4 24VIL2PF1 212 6 3 A LODIG2 E 1 1 8 1 GND 9 M a 7 2 LODIGO 7 d 3 m Rel 6 H 3 PWSW2 Cassette 2 LODIG1 5 4 A 5 4 connector connector U 5 5 324VIL2 313 5 4 24VIL2PF2 1 1 i 6 341 1 12 1 2 31 FANZPOW FUFM A 2 1 FAN2DRN 2 4 9 2K5 Wiring diagram No 2 o gt 3 3V 5VSL FIXTHCEN FUFMLTN B13 THERMA B12 En xl 12 11 YC32 ee em Relay 3 2 2 HUMIDA TEMS connector 47 SN 4 1 1 1 4 4 TEMPA 5 5 Relay 3 L Ll F T s IPEGDEN o A A a PM connector Relay Drum unit connector B10 1 z 2 E Relay connector Connector holder 3 4 DEVPWB B2 alejo NJ op aw o FAA A16 1 A15 2 ssw 1 11 11 12 A13 A14 Relay connector A10 8 2 4 10 2K5 Wiring diagram No 3
106. 7 gt 1 DIA EFL WA 2 RU 9 7 lt 42 52 ppm gt 2 Install the memory DIMM 1 or the optional memory DIMM J into the memory slot 3 on the lower level FLS Install it with the IC side facing down Insert it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks 3 Replace the cover 2 using 1 screw 1 Proceed to step 4 on page 5 2 Installer la m moire DIMM 1 ou la m moire DIMM en option J dans la fente m moire 3 se trouvant au niveau inf rieur FLS L installer avec le c t IC en bas L ins rer dans la direction de la fl che jusqu au clic 3 Reposer le couvercle 2 l aide de 1 vis 1 Passer l tape 4 de la page 5 2 Instale la memoria DIMM 1 o la memoria DIMM opcional J en la ranura para la memoria 3 en el nivel inferior FLS Inst lelo con el lado IC hacia abajo Ins rtela en la direcci n que indica la flecha hasta que escuche un clic 3 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta 2 utilizando 1 tornillo 1 Vaya al paso 4 de la p gina 5 2 Setzen Sie die DIMM Speichermodule 1 oder das optionale DIMM Speichermodul J in die untere Position FLS der Speicherbank 3 ein Mit der IC Seite nach unten weisend installieren Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung bis es h rbar einrastet 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 2 wieder mit 1 Schraube 1 an Gehen Sie zum Schritt 4 auf Seite 5 weiter 2 Installare la memoria DIMM I o
107. AA FAX E48 OO ERY 117 5 OPTI O C FAX Efi c EA LL IIA CAE UTE CA 002 ATHETA FAX BEAK A OEIC BERRA ROS E PAX A Las Ao Ee FAX SER A REED S dv Cv 5 7 v 6 BRICHTAAICRS EU AFI Connect the MFP to the telephone line 6 Plug the modular connector cable 7 into the line terminal and then connect the other end to the telephone line Connecter le MFP a la ligne de t l phone 6 Brancher le c ble du connecteur modulaire 7 la borne de la ligne puis connecter l autre extr mit a la ligne de t l phone Conecte el MFP a la l nea telef nica 6 Enchufe el cable del conector modular 7 en el terminal de l nea y a continuaci n conecte el otro extremo a la l nea telef nica Anschlie en des MFP an die Telefonleitung 6 Telefonmodulkabel 7 in die Ger tebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschlieRen Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 6 Inserire il cavo connettore modulare 7 nel terminale della linea e quindi collegare l altro terminale alla linea del telefono 1 MFP XETESU RETE 6 RENA 1A ER E OF 6 EV272V 7 BAA vim LIA ERIHHOS 7 EROS Do For 100 V 120 V Australian or Chinese models use the supplie
108. AIC AL v 7v O X ELA 0 OIC AD WC Ee 4 DEO PICA YD eB AK BIO 2 8 JI D Dim 5 BASE 51735 8 Orient the guide rail D such that its pulley 6 is positioned toward the MFP 8 Orienter la glissi re D de mani re que sa poulie 6 soit orient e vers le MFP 8 Oriente el carril gu a D de modo que su polea 6 se encuentre ubicada hacia el MFP 8 Richten Sie die F hrungsschiene D so aus daB die Riemenscheibe 6 zum MFP ausgerichtet ist 8 Orientare la guida della rotaia D in modo da posizionare la puleggia 6 in direzione dell MFP 8 D FRAC RB 6 EHL 8 JA ELA D OAH 6 AMAIA 5 Secure the rail retainer C to the MFP using two M4 x 10 binding screws F such that the front and the rear gaps between the floor and the rail retainer C are approximately 8 0 mm a When the paper feeder of 3000 sheets is used b When the paper feeder of 500 sheets x 2 is used Fixer l l ment de r tention du rail C au MFP l aide de deux vis de raccordement M4 x 10 F de mani re que les carts avant et arri re entre le sol et l l ment de r tention du rail C soient d environ 8 0 mm a Lors de l utilisation de l alimenteur de papier de 3000 feuilles b Lors de l utilisation de l alimenteur de papier de 500 feuilles x 2 Asegure el ret n del carril C a el MFP usando dos tor
109. AS 4 S Hook AER x x A S Cf Holder amp Figure 1 5 67 1 5 36 2K5 1 5 7 Fuser section 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fuser unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover Clip holder 2 Remove the clip holder 3 Remove two screws and remove front left cover Figure 1 5 68 4 Open the left cover 1 5 Remove two screws and remove the left cover hook Left cover 1 eU S ar SN Left cover hook Figure 1 5 69 1 5 37 2K5 2 E 23 AYE es 6 Remove the screw of the front left middle cover F L fA PARE f Figure 1 5 70 7 Remove the front left middle cover Figure 1 5 71 1 5 38 2K5 Figure 1 5 72 8 Remove three connectors ae 2 x 9 Remove the screw and remove the fuser unit 10 Check or replace the fuser unit and install the unit 11 Refit all the removed parts Fuser unit Figure 1 5 73 1 5 39 2K5 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws Procedure 1 Remove the fuser heater see page 1 5 43 2 Remove four screws 3 Unhook four hooks and remove the rear fuser guide Screw Figure 1 5 74 4 Remove the spring and remove the hea
110. An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original conveying section 1 Jam code 71 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 21 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original conveying section 2 Jam code 72 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the original con veying motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary 22 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original switchback section Jam code 73 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the original switch back motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original switchback motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if n
111. Caution If the CCD first side is adjusted check the CCD second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode 0071 0404 1 3 73 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 35 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0072 1 3 36 Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step FRONT DP center line first side 40 to 40 0 0 08 mm BACK DP center line second side 40 to 40 0 0 08 mm Display Description Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 15 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the CCD first side is adjusted check the CCD second side and if adjustment is r
112. Check Clean Replace Clean with alcohol Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets MP feed roller 1 Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol MP feed roller 2 Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol MP feed pulley Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol Left registration roller Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol Right registration roller Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol Feed pulley Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol Feed roller 1 Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol Feed roller 2 Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol Feed roller 3 Check Clean Clean Clean with alcohol Registration cleaner Check Clean Clean Vacuum 2 4 3 2K5 1 Section Maintenance part location User call Points and cautions Optical section Section Contact glass Clean Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth Slit glass Clean Clean with a dry cloth do not clean with a wet cloth or alcohol Mirror 1 Clean Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth only if black lines appear on the copy image Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth only if black lines appear on the copy image Lens Clean Clean with a dry cloth only if black lines appear on the copy image Reflector Clean Clean with a dry cloth onl
113. Cierre lentamente el DP para colocar la plancha de originales B con el gancho y fijadores de bucle Anbringen der Originalmatte 4 Die Originalmatte B mit den Klettverschl ssen nach oben auf das Vorlagenglas legen Die Ecke der Originalmatte B die einen 90 Grad Winkel aufweist mit der linken 2 inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrichten 5 Den DP langsam schlie en so dass die Originalmatte B mit den Klettverschl ssen an ihm haftet Montaggio del coprioriginale 4 Collocare il copioriginali B sulla lastra di esposizione con il lato provvisto di nastro velcro autoadesivo rivolto verso l alto Allineare l angolo di 90 gradi del coprioriginale B con l angolo interno sinistro 2 del pannello di controllo originale 5 Chiudere lentamente il DP in modo che il coprioriginale B vi si possa fissare mediante il nastro velcro 4 YE ISI CARERE CREER GR E RARE EO AY 00 E fo DE BUSH AAA 2 5 Mite DP REV KORY T 4 gt RM eV YY IT TDR CW SMe LIC UC JRF A lt Ifa 12 90 KO CWS RABE RROAR 2 CLAMS CE 5 DPATK A OCDE FAL y DP 214125 Connecting the signal cable 6 Connect the connector 3 of the signal cable to the machine Connexion du c ble de signal 6 Branchez le connecteur 3 du c ble de signal sur la machine Conexi n del cable de se al 6 Co
114. DP verso l alto gt Variazione graduale Circa 0 5 mm 783 DP 1 1 DP fri Bis 2 EIA 4 o 2 HAE DP HIME 9 IN E DP HF 2 Y DP pg E 9 a 81 2 0 5mm DP 1 DP amp BAX EV BIOS A 1244095050 2 DP OME x HET 5 ary AW 4 OYA DP AME TF Aa AHI TW EO SDT 1 AREY 3577 0 0 5mm q COM E co gt Wu Y E Tighten two adjusting screws 4 Remove the original mat B and refit it see steps 4 and 5 on page 3 Resserrez les deux vis de r glage 4 Retirez le tapis d original B et remettez le en place Reportez vous aux tapes 4 et 5 la page 3 Apriete los tornillos de ajuste 4 Desmonte la plancha de original B y vuelva a colocar vea los pasos 4 y 5 en la p gina 3 Die zwei Einstellschrauben 4 wieder festziehen Die Originalmatte B abnehmen und wieder anbringen siehe Schritte 4 und 5 auf Seite 3 Stringere le due viti di regolazione 4 Rimuovere il coprioriginale e reinserirlo vedere i passi 4 e 5 a pagina 3 KE 2 ijl RAE 4 3 WRR 445 HIRE 2 AZ RIAL 3 20 FIR 4 5 AAA fb 2 43mm 4mm y3mm Amm 5 Make a proof copy again 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 unt
115. Defective adjust ment sensor 1 Replace the adjustment sensor 1 Defective adjust ment motor 1 Replace the adjustment motor 1 Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 31 2K5 Remarks ede content Causes Check procedures corrective measures C8350 Roller motor problem optional docu The roller sensor Reinsert the connector Also check for conti ment finisher roller motor con nuity within the connector cable If none The roller sensor does not turn on off nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable within specified time of the roller motor contact Bring en Defective roller Replace the roller sensor sensor Defective roller Replace the roller motor motor Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check main PWB for correct operation C8360 Slide motor problem optional docu The slide sensor Reinsert the connector Also check for conti ment finisher slide motor con nuity within the connector cable If none The slide sensor does not turn on off nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable within specified time of the slide motor contact turning on Defective slide Replace the slide sensor sensor Defective slide Replace the slide motor motor Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check main PWB for correct operation C8440 Sensor adjusting problem
116. Defective switch Run maintenance item 0031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Eject switch feedshift switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 42 14 A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copying jam in eject section Jam code 50 1 4 12 Broken eject switch or reg istration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Registration switch eject switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 42 Problem Causes check procedures 2K5 Corrective measures 15 A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copying jam in optional job separator eject sec tion Jam code 51 Bro
117. Display Description Setting range Initial setting MPT Paper feed from MP tray 50 to 127 0 CASSETTE1 Paper feed from cassette 1 50 to 127 50 CASSETTE2 Paper feed from cassette 2 50 to 127 50 DUPLEX Duplex mode second 50 to 127 40 MPT THICK Paper feed from MP tray thick paper 50 to 127 10 Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value The greater the value the larger the deflection the smaller the value the smaller the deflection Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 6 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 1 3 25 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors Purpose To adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting range Initial setting ALL Main motor MM speed adjustment 40 to 40 0 MAIN MOTOR Main motor MM speed adjustment 40 to 40 1 DRUM MOTOR Drum motor DRM speed adjustment 40 to 40 0 FEED MOTOR Pap
118. Einstellung durchzuf hren Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 0 mm Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione Valore di riferimento Entro 2 0 mm HATA BITS XE RTE D a 5 1 2 GRE p RECTE fri lt REE gt 2 Omm LIA Kine 4 3 UTR a Om 1 ERE US VOR 2 OTN UR VERE OI A lt gt 2 Omm VIN So TE 16 Adjusting the DP leading edge timing 1 Enter the maintenance mode and run the maintenance item U071 to adjust Select FRONT HEAD to adjust both the simplex and duplex copying at once Use BACK HEAD only if you need to adjust the second side of duplex copying individually R glage de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP 1 Passez en mode de maintenance et ex cutez l l ment de maintenance 0071 pour effectuer le r glage S lectionnez FRONT HEAD pour r gler en une seule fois la copie recto seul et la copie recto verso Utilisez BACK HEAD uniquement si vous voulez r gler individuellement le verso de la copie recto verso Ajuste de la sincronizaci n de borde superior del DP 1 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el item de mantenimiento 0071 para ajustar Seleccione FRONT HEAD para ajustar ambas copias simple y duplex al m
119. Figure 1 5 63 Drum separation claw Inserted part Lower cleaning seal separation claw Drum separation claw Drum separation gt claw gt ME Figure 1 5 64 1 5 5 Developing section 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 34 2 Remove two connectors 3 Remove the developing unit 4 Replace the developing unit and install the unit 5 Refit all the removed parts 6 When the developing unit is replaced with a new one carry out the following procedure 7 Perform maintenance mode U130 Initial setting for the developing unit see page 1 3 47 8 Perform maintenance mode U410 Adjust ing the halftone automatically see page 1 3 75 Figure 1 5 65 Developing unit Figure 1 5 66 2K5 1 5 35 2K5 1 5 6 Transfer section 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller unit Procedure 1 Open the left cover 1 Rear transfer bush 2 Unhook the hooks of the front and rear transfer bushes and remove the transfer roller unit Transfer roller unit 3 Replace the transfer roller unit and install the unit The front and rear transfer springs must be firmly mounted on the holder Front transfer bush Front transfer spring Rear transfer spring Y A K
120. OPWB M reset signal 5 HLD PANEL O 0 3 3V DC Operation panel displaying enable signal 6 SW FOOTN Not used 7 24V DOWN O 0 3 3V DC 24 V DC down signal 8 SUPND ENTER O 0 3 3V DC Energy save mode control signal 9 AUDIO Analog Audio output signal 10 SGND l Ground 11 PH KEY 0 3 3 V DC Power key On Off 12 SGND Ground 13 SUPNDPOWER O 5VDC 5 V DC power to OPWB M 2 3 17 2K5 Connector Signal Description YC17 Connected to the main operation PWB VBUS DATA DATA NC GND 5 V DC power input USB data signal USB data signal Not used Ground 20 Connected to the USB VBUS DATA DATA GND 5 V DC power output USB data signal USB data signal Ground Connected to the USB VBUS DATA DATA NC GND 5 V DC power output USB data signal USB data signal Not used Ground Connected to the con troller fan motor w N Blo BR WOOD CTL FAN GND 5V 0 5 V DC 5 VDC CONFM On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to CONFM YC24 Connected to the power source PWB 5V 5V 5VSL 12VSL GND GND GND GND 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 5 V DC power input from PSPWB 5 V DC power input from PSPWB Ground Ground Ground Ground Connected to the inter face PWB N gt OO 5V GND 5 V DC power output to IFPWB Ground YC26 Connected to the CCD PWB 2 3 18
121. P 2 BUR 1 P OPT2 nbi 2 DIN OBRY HL FAX DE 7 amp FAX 1 EX D2 1 DHS 2 EX DIT ZEA ERIR 2 E OPT2 BRITTA RH HHE LADS 1 EE FAX HARO ER Y 117 m 2 OPT2 DREIZ C FAX HAR A ERA LS WA CAH L 02 AK CHES O IE UR A HEN o 1 3 UAT A 89 Ze wy PRT HE o BR A OFF E PASI BROT o FAX FEAR EO HO DANTO 77v 3 EDIT AAT SIE 12 Seal the terminal 3 Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal C The telephone terminal on the FAX circuit board installed to OPT2 is unavailable invalid Seal the terminal securely to prevent a user from connecting a separate phone Connecter le MFP a la ligne de t l phone Fermer herm tiquement la borne 3 Nettoyer la surface de la borne de t l phone avec de l alcool et apposer le joint de borne C La borne de t l phone de la carte circuits FAX install e sur l OPT2 n est pas utilisable invalide Fermer herm tiquement la borne pour emp cher tout utilisateur de connecter un t l phone s par Selle el terminal
122. PWB check if YC2 7 on the PF main PWB remains low when the PF feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the PF feed switch Check if PF paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with PF paper feed clutch 2 Check see service manual of paper feeder 6 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from MP tray Jam code 14 1 4 10 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the MP paper feed pulley MP forwarding pulley and MP separation pulley are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective MP feed switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn MP feed switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the MP paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select MP paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the MP paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 42 Problem Causes check procedures 2K5 Corrective measures 7 A paper jam in the paper feed sect
123. Per l installazione della finitrice di documenti su un MFP a colori sono necessarie le parti G 1 J e L fornite in dotazione con il Separatore dei lavori Per le macchine in bianco e nero separatamente necessaria la parte M Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite DRE A A ERMUA Os 0 A 1 AU PRR ETA A EH Ser im o 7 9 RIC A NA RO 5 6 CD CD 0 D 2352238 E72 5 E Z ORECIL IF in CAES Y EMI O CODA 7I Procedure Before installing the document finisher first attach the job separator Be sure to turn the MFP main power switch off and disconnect the MFP power plug from the wall outlet before starting to install the document finisher Proc dure Avant d installer le retoucheur de document fixer d abord le s parateur de travaux Veiller bien mettre l interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et d brancher la fiche d alimentation du MFP de la prise murale avant de commencer l installation du retoucheur de document Procedimiento Antes de instalar el finalizador de documentos coloque primero el separador de trabajos Aseg rese de apagar el interruptor principal del MFP y de desconectar la clavija de alimentaci n del MFP de la toma de corrient
124. Pfeilrichtung drehen bis sie mit einem Klicken einrastet Montaggio del coperchio secondario della pinzatrice 9 Inserite il gancio 17 del coperchio secondario della pinzatrice B e fate ruotare il coperchio B nella direzione della freccia fino a quando non si mette in posizione con un clic SCR BIA S zs 9 B BAIE 17 MAJA 0 MATRIZ EEIEIEE PIRAF TFILAN ORY tlt 9 4 7 AF TFWVARN B 0797 17 HAL WF y EGO SE dz LI O NOD Installing the paper conveying unit 10 Insert the paper conveying unit A from the machine front and slide it to the left 11 Fix the paper conveying unit A using two pins Front Use the large pin L Rear Use the small pin M Installation de l unit de transport du papier 10 Ins rez l unit de transport du papier A depuis l avant de la machine et faites le glisser vers la gauche 11 Fixez l unit de transport du papier A l aide de deux goupilles Avant Utilisez la grande goupille L Arri re Utilisez la petite goupille M Instalaci n de la unidad de transporte de papel 10 Inserte la unidad de transporte de papel A desde el frente de la m quina y deslice hacia la izquierda 11 Fije la unidad de transporte de papel A utilizando dos pasadores Frente Utilice el pasador grande L Atr s Utilice el pasador pequefio M Instal
125. Press Change of Default Screen 2 Press Destination or Address Book 3 Press OK 5 Document Box Settings Quick Setup Registration 1 Press Next of Quick Setup Registration 2 Press Next of Store File or Send 3 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 4 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 5 Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirma tion screen appears Press Yes 1 3 99 2K5 6 Printer Settings Emulation 1 Press Change of Emulation 2 Select the desired emulation 3 Press OK Setting of Alternative Emulation 1 Press Change of Emulation KPDL Auto and then Alt Emulation 2 Select the desired alternative emulation and then press OK 3 Press OK Setting of KPDL error report 1 Press Change of Emulation KPDL or KPDL Auto and then KPDL Error Report 2 Press On or Off and then press OK 3 Press OK EcoPrint 1 Press Change of EcoPrint 2 Press Off or On 3 Press OK Override A4 Letter 1 Press Change of Override A4 Letter 2 Press Off or On 3 Press OK Duplex 1 Press Change of Duplex 2 Press 1 sided 2 sided Bind LongEdge or 2 sided Bind ShortEdge 3 Press OK Copies 1 Press Change of Copies 2 Press or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies 3 Press OK Orientation 1 P
126. Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a switch is detected that switch is displayed in reverse Display Switches and sensors DEVELOPER SENSOR Toner sensor TNS CONTAINER SET Toner container detection switch TCDSW CONTAINER SENSOR Toner container sensor TCS DISPOSAL TANK SENSOR Overflow sensor OFS MOTOR The toner feed clutch TFCL and the paper feed motor PFM are turned on 3 To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking which is used as a reference when correcting the toner con trol Purpose To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit Method 1 Press the start key The developing drive time is displayed in minutes Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 50 Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count for checking Purpose To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit Method 1 Press the start key The developing counter count is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0161
127. Separation high voltage switch signal Transfer high voltage adjust signal Transfer high voltage On Off 5 V DC power output to HVTPWB Connector Signal Voltage 2K5 Description YC13 Connected to the fuser fan motor FAN2POW FAN2DRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FUFM FUFM On Off YC14 Connected to the eject motor COMDA COMDNB COMDNA COMDB 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse EM drive control signal A EM drive control signal B EM drive control signal A EM drive control signal B YC18 Connected to the power source PWB and safety switch 1 2 5VSL 24VSL GND 24VIL1 IN 24VIL1 OUT GND 24VIL2 5 VDC 24V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC input from PSPWB 24 V DC power input from PSPWB Ground 24 V DC power input from SSW1 24 V DC power output to SSW2 Ground 24 V DC power input from SSW2 Connected to the power source PWB and relay PWB SLEEPN ZCROSSC GND FAN3DRN SHEATN MHEATN 24VSL HRELAY NC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC Sleep signal On Off Zero cross signal Ground CFM3 On Off FH S On Off FH M On Off 24 V DC power input from PSPWB RELAY signal Not used Connected to the key counter 24VSL KEYCN SGND KEYENBN 5VSL 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC power output to key counter Key co
128. The MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn on within the 993 ms No paper feed from MP specified time of the MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL tray turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 18 Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within specified 1314 ms Misfeed in vertical time of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on paper feed from paper conveying sec cassette 2 Hen Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within specified 1314 ms time of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on paper feed from cassette 2 Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within specified 1386 ms time of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on paper feed from optional cassette 3 4 Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within specified 1386 ms time of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on paper feed from optional cassette 3 4 Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within specified 1686 ms time of feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on paper feed from optional cassette 3 4 Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within specified 1686 ms time of feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on paper feed from optional cassette 3 4 1 4 3 2K5 Section Description Conditions Specified time Paper 19 The feed switch FSW3 does not turn off within speci 1429 ms Paper feed Misfeed in paper feeder fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional cas length section vertical
129. The drive chain is disengaged when toner installation is completed Run maintenance mode U130 if Add Toner remains displayed even after the drive chain is disengaged Setting the delivery date maintenance item U278 Press the status job cancel key Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the start key Select TODAY and press the start key The delivery date is set Press the stop key Output an own status report maintenance item 0000 Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items Press the stop key Exit maintenance mode 1 Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key The machine exits the maintenance mode Print out the user setting list Select Report Print to output the user various setting reports Make test copies 1 Place an original and make test copies Attaching the language label 230 V specifications only According to need attach the correspond language label Completion of the machine installation 1 2 10 2 Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows Maintenance item No Contents 2K5 Factory setting U253 U26
130. USB memory from the USB memory slot Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on E Figure 1 6 1 1 6 1 2K5 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field High voltage PWB VR101 VR201 VR302 VR303 Power source PWB VR351 APC PWB VR1 Inverter PWB VR31 1 6 3 Remarks on main and engine PWB replacement When replacing the main or engine PWB remove the EEPROM from the PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new PWB Main PWB EN Engine PWB A A SML N S RW Te nc amp 4 D 24 Figure 1 6 2 1 6 2 2 1 1 Paper feed section 1 Cassette paper feed section 2K5 The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections Primary feed conveys paper from the cassettes 1 2 or MP tray to the left and right registration rollers at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing Each cassette consists of a lift driven by the lift motor and other components Each cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper Paper is fed from the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time via the torque limiter
131. VOZ A5 o y 1 1 5 k VO 2 2 o 9 2 2 peaker YC6 g c 1 GND 9 8 9 217 12V ott YC4 olal 1 YC12 494 ADJUST POWER i 1 13 13 SUPND POWER 515 GND GND 242 2 H 12 12 SGND PH KEY O n PH KEY GND 414 B10 7 10 10 SGND AUDIO 5 5 B9 B2 9 9 AUDI SUPND ENTR 6 6 B8 B3 8 8 SUPND ENTR 24V DOWN 77 B7 B4 7 7 24V DOWN SW FOOIN 8 8 B6 B5 8 6 SWFOOTN TL KEYO HLDPANEL 9 5 B5 B6 5 5 HLD PANEL 212 KEYT PANEL_RESET 10 10 B4 B 4 4 PANEL RESETn KEY2 5 B3 B8 H 3 SLEDI aja KEY3 S LEDO 12172 B2 B9 ps 242 S LEDO 5 5 KEY4 PANEL STATUS 13 13 BOH Y FPSTAT 616 SCANO 777 SCANT 88 SCAN2 i 99 SCANS 1 10 f 10 SCANG LEN LEDO 1 12 12 LEDI 1 13 13 PH KEY 1 14 14 SUPND POWER YC3 1 YC17 515 GND VBUS 1 1 VBUS DN 242 2 12 242 DATA DP 3 313 3 DATA TD 444 4 4 I 4 4 1D GND 5 5 5 5 1 5 5 GND LockPin 1 LP 1 1 LP 1 LockPin 1 LockPin 2 LP 2 1 LP 2 TockPin 2 LockPin 3 LP 3 1 LP 3 LockPin 3 YC8 i 1 SCANG 1 222 5 1 315 KEYG 1 YC21 al KEY7 VBUS 1 VBUS 515 SCANO DATA 2 2 24 2 DATA 616 SCANT USB host DATA 3 3 3 DATA 77 SCAN2 4_ 4 1D 2 SCAN3 GND 4 i 5 5 GND 9 9 LED2 1 LockPini 10 10 LED3 1 LP2 LockPin2 LED4 1 LP3 LockPin3 121 GND 1 1
132. Wiring is broken shorted or makes poor contact Check for continuity If none repair 1 4 45 2K5 1 4 5 Mechanical problems Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 1 No primary paper feed Check ifthe surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder forward ing pulleys paper feed pulleys separation pulleys feed rollers registration rollers MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pulley Clean with isopropyl alcohol Check if the upper lower forwarding pulleys paper feed pulleys or upper lower separation pulleys is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 3 Check if the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or MP separation pulley is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 6 Electrical problem with the following clutches paper feed clutches 1 2 feed clutches 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch See page 1 4 42 2 No secondary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the right and left reg istration rollers are dirty with paper powder Clean with isopropyl alcohol Electrical problem with the registration clutch See page 1 4 42 3 Skewed paper feed Width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary Deformed width guide in a cassette Check visually a
133. YC10 on the engine PWB and the connector on the drum motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective drum motor Replace the drum motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Paper feed motor error Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu ously after paper feed motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feed motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective paper feed motor Replace the paper feed motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 24 PF paper drive motor error optional paper feeder The lock signal of the motor is detected above 500 ms Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC22 on the engine PWB and the connector on the PF main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals R
134. a maintenance item No is displayed 0118 Displaying the drum history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter Method 1 Press the start key Past record of 5 cases is displayed Display Description MACHINE No 1 to 5 Past record of machine number COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of drum counter Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 0130 Initial setting for the developing unit Description Replenishes toner to the developing unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press the start key Toner installation is started and the output value of the sensor and execution time are displayed Display Description TONER SENSOR Output value of the sensor TIME SEC Execution time Completion Press the stop key after initial setting is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played 1 3 47 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0135 Checking toner motor operation Description Turns the toner feed motor and toner feed clutch on Purpose To check the operation of the toner feed motor or toner feed clutch Settings may als
135. a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 20 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 74 Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Description Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform automatic adjustment of the halftone Purpose Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select EXECUTE 3 Press the start key A test pattern is outputted 4 Place the output test pattern as the original Align the corner inside the circle with the left inside corner of the original marker HE Test pattern Figure 1 3 21 5 Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern and set them 6 Press the start key Adjustment is made 7 When normally completed ALL COMP is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment error code is displayed Error codes Codes Description S01 Patch not detected S02 Original deviation in the main scanning direction S03 Original deviation in the auxiliary scanning direction S04 Original inclination error
136. and then Change of Name Enter the name and press OK N DIRA m Default Paper Source 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Default Paper Source 2 Select a paper cassette for the default setting 3 Press OK Automatic Detection of Originals Available for met ric models only 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Original Auto Detect 2 Select A6 or Hagaki of A6 Hagaki Select Off to disable automatic detection or On to enable auto matic detection of Folio and 11x15 respectively 3 Press OK Media for Auto Selection 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings and then Change of Media for Auto B amp W 2 Select All Media Types or any media type for paper selection 3 Press OK Paper Source for Cover Paper 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings cursor down key and then Change of Paper Source for Cover Select the paper source to load cover paper 3 Press OK N Special Paper Action 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings cursor down key and then Change of Special Paper Action Select Adjust Print Direction or Speed Priority 3 Press OK N Switching Unit of Measurement 1 Press Change of Measurement 2 Select mm for metric or inch for inch 3 Press OK Error Handling 1 Press Next of Error Handling 2 Press Change at the error you wish to change the handling 3 Select the error ha
137. as step 2 so that the gaps 17a and 17b between the document finisher A and the MFP are the same when the document finisher A is detached from the MFP Reattach the removed parts to their original positions R gler la hauteur des deux roulettes gauches en proc dant comme a l tape 2 de mani re que les carts 17a et 17b entre le retoucheur de documents A et la MFP soient identiques lorsque le retoucheur de documents A est d tach de MFP Remettez les pi ces enlev es leur position d origine Ajuste la altura de las dos ruedas izquierdas de la misma forma que en el paso 2 para que las separaciones 17a y 17b entre el finalizador de documentos A y la MFP sean las mismas cuando el finalizador de documentos A est soltado de la MFP Vuelva a instalar las piezas desmontadas en sus posiciones originales Die H he der beiden linken Laufrollen auf die in Schritt 2 beschriebene Weise einstellen so dass die Abst nde 17a und 17b zwischen dem Dokument Finisher A und dem MFP gleich gro sind wenn der Dokument Finisher A vom MFP abgenommen wird Die entfernten Teile wieder an ihren urspr nglichen Positionen anbringen Regolare l altezza delle due ruote orientabili sinistre allo stesso modo descritto al passo 2 in modo che le distanze 17a e 17b tra la finitrice di documenti siano le stesse una volta che la finitrice di documenti A viene separata dall MFP
138. bordo di uscita Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione lt Valore di riferimento gt Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm Ha AE im RE HA a R 1 MEERE 2 REEERE DARA gt 3 LIA AUS 4 Omm DA AJ fim a OD MESE fia a of 1 EAL HY TI MOR DOTNET 6 FIBA OE S SEE 5 7 5 EE gt KEDA gt 3 LAK MOBS 4 0mm 10 Adjusting the DP 1 Open the DP and release two latches 5 using a flat head screwdriver R glage du DP 1 Ouvrez le DP et lib rez les deux verrous 5 l aide d un tournevis a t te plate Ajuste del DP 1 Abra el DP y suelte los dos pestillos 5 utilizando un destornillador de punta plana Einstellen des DP 1 Den DP ffnen und die zwei Rasten 5 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen Regolazione del DP 1 Aprire il DP e rilasciare i due fermi 5 utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta 783 DP 1 DP UT 7 2 ABRE 5 DP 1 DP amp BAX 1550352 5 2 SATA FAIRE 75 6 7 Release three latches 6 at the rear of the DP using a flat head screwdriver to remove the cover 7 Lib
139. by users mainly by the administrator In this management mode settings such as default settings can be changed 1 Using the management mode Start Y Press the System Menu key H Press Common Settings t Execute Common Settings page 1 3 96 Press Copy Execute Copy Settings page 1 3 99 m gt Press Send m Execute Sending Settings page 1 3 99 Press Document Box Removable Execute Document Box Settings Memory page 1 3 99 m Press Printer Execute Printer Settings page 1 3 100 m Press Report F Execute Printing Reports Sending Notice page 1 3 100 m Press Adjustment Maintenance Execute Adjustment Maintenance N page 1 3 101 m Press Date Timer Execute Date Timer page 1 3 101 m Press Edit Destination m Execute Editing Destination page 1 3 102 m Press Internet F Execute Internet Browser Setup page 1 3 103 m Press Application m Execute Applications page 1 3 104 m Press System m Execute System Settings page 1 3 104 Press User Login Job Accounting Execute User Login Administration page 1 3 106 Execute Job Accounting page 1 3 107 End 1 3 95 2K5 2 Common Settings Switching the Language for Display Language 1 Press Change of Language 2 Press the key fo
140. change the setting if the fuser offset or carrier leaking occurs Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting MODE Separation charger mode 0 to 8 to 3 3 Entering a value other than 0 to 3 will engage the MODE3 value 3 separation mode Details on the modes Display Description MODEO Value 0 Full page separation for both first and second pages MODE1 Value 1 First page Separation on leading and trailing edges Second page Full page separation MODE2 Value 2 Full page separation is activated for both first and second pages provided the ambient temperature is less than 19 C 66 2 F First page Separation is activated for both leading and trailing edges sec ond page Full page separation provided the ambient temperature is more than 20 C 68 F MODES Value 3 Separation is activated on both leading and trailing edges for both first and second pages 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U117 Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number Purpose To check the drum number Method 1 Press the start key The drum number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting
141. check that it is adequate for the rated current Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock Never connect the ground cable to any of the following gas pipes lightning rods ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities tt et t t up tee qat Ee e LB pe Ere tet peat Eger dd AACAUTION Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface the copier may tip over causing injury Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock Do not install the near radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may Cao E Allow sufficient space around the to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it Q Always use anti toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple leading to 2 Q Avoid inhaling toner or
142. control signal _B YC4 1 5VSL 5VDC 5 V DC power input from MPWB Connected 2 5VSL 5V DC 5 V DC power input from MPWB to the main GND ae Ground PWB 4 GND J Ground 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 SLEEP 0 3 3 V DC Sleep signal 8 GA SO 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 9 GA_SRDY 0 3 3 V DC pulse Ready signal 10 GA_OVM 0 3 3 V DC Control signal 11 GA_SI O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Serial communication data signal 12 GA_SEL O 0 3 3 V DC Select signal 13 GA_SCLK O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Clock signal 14 PAGESTART 0 3 3V DC SPWB control signal 15 GND J Ground 16 SC_RESN 0 3 3V DC SPWB reset signal 17 SC SCLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse SPWB clock signal 18 SC SI 0 3 3 V DC pulse SPWB serial communication data signal 19 SC_SO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse SPWB serial communication data signal 20 SC_SBSY 0 3 3V DC SPWB busy signal 21 SC_SDIR O 0 3 3V DC SPWB communication direction signal 22 SC_IRN O 0 3 3V DC SPWB interrupt signal 23 HLD_ScnN 0 3 3 V DC SPWB scanner hold signal 24 CON10V O 0 3 3 VDC SPWB control signal 25 3 3VSL 3 3 V DC 3 3 V DC power input from MPWB 26 GND J Ground YC5 1 LAMPN O 0 24V DC EL On Off Connected 2 PGND J Ground ae 3 24VSL O 24V DC 24 V DC power output to INPWB PWB 4 24VSL O 24VDC 24 V DC power output to INPWB 5 PGND J Ground 6 LAMPN O 0 24V DC EL On Off 2 3 22 Connector Signal Voltage
143. das 42 52 ppm Modell dar Precauzioni Assicurarsi di aver spento l interruttore dell MFP e di aver sfilato la spina dell MFP dalla presa prima di installare il sistema fax L illustrazione del corpo MFP nella Guida all installazione del modello da 42 52 ppm SM WS RA RITA HR TH o REA AAA 42 52 HALE TEFA 77 ARES 330 0 MFP ARO ERAT y F OFF ICL Y KV 5 Mie FISCAL CVS gt h 13 42 52 RECT Procedure Installing the memory DIMM lt 42 52 ppm Monochrome machines gt 1 Remove 1 screw 1 and then remove the cover 2 Proc dure Installation de la m moire DIMM lt 42 52 ppm Machines monochromes gt 1 D poser 1 vis 1 puis enlever le couvercle 2 Procedimiento Instalaci n de la memoria DIMM lt 42 52 ppm Maquinas monocromaticas gt 1 Quite 1 tornillo 1 y despu s desmonte la cubierta 2 Verfahren Installation der DIMM Speichermodule lt 42 52 ppm Monochrommaschinen gt 1 Entfernen Sie 1 Schraube 1 und nehmen Sie dann die Abdeckung 2 ab Procedura Installazione della memoria DIMM lt 42 52 ppm solo per le macchine gt 1 Rimuovere 1 vite 1 e quindi rimuovere il coperchio 2 RRR DIMM lt 42 52 IHLA CALA gt JE F 1 1 AE Fas 2 Et FIR AE DIMM ORY fF UT lt 42 52 BE EJ
144. density is set dark 0 to 3 0 MIXED LIGHTER _ Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 41 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U093 1 3 42 Setting OTHER 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting OTHER DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 OTHER LIGTER Change in density when manual density is set light O to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting FAX TEXT 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting FAX TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0 dark FAX TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 light Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting FAX PHOTO 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial ran
145. detected by the paper feeder 4300 ms The feed switch 2 FSW2 does nat turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional cas sette 3 1686 ms The PF feed switch PFFSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on paper feed from optional cassette 4 4300 ms The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of the paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 turning on 1864 ms The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci fied time of the paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 turning on 2121 ms The feed switch FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of the PF paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on 2036 ms 23 Multiple sheets in MP tray conveying section The MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 1429 ms Paper length Section Description Conditions 2K5 Specified time Paper conveying section 30 Misfeed in registration transfer section The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 1 FSW1 turning off 1314 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on 1100 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn on within specified time of the feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on 1100 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn off wi
146. direction de la fl che de sorte que l l ment de r tention s ins re dans la rainure de la glissi re D S assurer que le ressort de plaque 4 s ins re dans la rainure et que le bord 5 de la glissi re D s ins re entre les rouleaux se trouvant derri re l l ment de r tention du rail C Incline el ret n del carril en la direcci n de la flecha de forma tal que el ret n encaje en la acanaladura del carril gu a D Aseg rese de que el resorte de la placa 4 encaje en la acanaladura y de que el borde 5 del carril gu a D encaje entre los rodillos detr s del ret n del carril C Die Schienenhalterungseinheit C so weit in Pfeilrichtung neigen dass die Halterung in die Rille der F hrungsschieneneinheit D greift Darauf achten dass die Tellerfeder 4 in die Rille passt und dass die Kante 5 der F hrungsschieneneinheit D zwischen den Rollen auf der R ckseite der Schienenhalterungseinheit C sitzt Capovolgere il fermo della guida C nella direzione della freccia in modo che il fermo si inserisca nella scanalatura della guida della rotaia D Assicurarsi che la molla della piastra 4 si inserisca nella scanalatura e che il bordo 5 della guida della rotaia D si inserisca tra i rulli dietro il fermo della guida C IPEA VEIA MOB VC S LATUR Dy ff Pri EAR O A ILS JE FL SE Lg pi CD 00 RA BRE T TB iR AE ANG IAL VERA ERAN
147. doc ument finisher within specified time of the paper convey ing switch PCSW turning on 81 Paper entry sensor nonarrival jam Document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 2000 ms Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is con veyed to the process table from the paper conveying unit 1429 ms Paper length 82 Jam in stapler Document finisher The staple home position sensor STSPS is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor STM Built in finisher The staple home position sensor STHPS is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor STM 83 Exit sensor stay jam Document finisher In the straight mode the exit sensor EPS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on Document finisher In the bundle discharge mode or the staple mode bundle discharge operation does not turn off within specified time since the operation starts Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is ejected to t
148. down key Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Color Selection 2 Select the default color mode 3 Press OK File Format 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Format 2 Select the default file format 3 Press OK File Separation 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults and then Change of File Separation 2 Select the default for Off or Each Page 3 Press OK Density 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of Density 2 Select the default density 3 Press OK Zoom 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of Zoom 2 Select the default zoom setting 3 Press OK 1 3 97 2K5 File Name Entry 1 5 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of File Name Entry Press File Name to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters Press OK Press Date and Time to add the date time to the job or press Job No to add the job number to the job The added information will be displayed in Additional Info Press OK E mail Subject Body 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of E mail Sub ject Body Press Subject to enter an E mail subject not more than 60 characters Press OK Press Body to enter an E mail Body no
149. engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation F090 Fax control PWB communication Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor error PWB rect operation F278 Power supply in drive system error Main power switch Turn on power was turned off with out using the power key or a power failure has occurred To switch off power first press the power key until the main power indicator goes off then turn the main power switch off 1 4 33 2K5 1 4 3 1 No image appears entirely white See page 1 4 35 6 A black line appears longitudi nally See page 1 4 37 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently mis aligned with the original See page 1 4 38 16 Fusing is poor See page 1 4 39 1 4 34 Image formation problems 2 No image appears entirely black See page 1 4 35 7 A black line appears laterally See page 1 4 36 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other See page 1 4 37 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically mis aligned with the original See page 1 4 37 13 Paper creases 1 See page 1 4 38 See page 1 4 38 17 is out of focus 18 lmage center See page 1 4 39 See page 1 4 40 3 lmage is too light does not align with
150. er rere Dior E gt gt gt EN E E F G H 14 screw eene nein Caution label Face Up Label A Operation procedure 1 Label B Operation procedure 1 For the 110 V specification label G is not bundled E ViS MA MA icono iei petita 5 F tiquette de pr cautions Face vers le Haut reet eret en tet 1 G Etiquette A Proc dure d utilisation 1 H Etiquette B Proc dure d utilisation 1 E Tornillo 4 14 5 Etiqueta de precauci n Cara Arriba 1 G Etiqueta A Procedimiento de funcionamiento 1 H Etiqueta B Procedimiento de funcionamiento 1 E M4 x 14 Schraube F Warnaufkleber Vorderseite Oben G Aufkleber A Bedienungsverfahren 1 Aufkleber B Bedienungsverfahren 1 E Vite M4 x 14 5 Etichetta di avvertenza Faccia Insu 1 G Etichetta A Procedure di funzionamento 1 H Etichetta B Procedure di funzionamento 1 E F AEAEE 5 6 Ah o E ERAM X TE 5 Hc SEA Precautions Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts
151. est s lectionn dans 0698 l OPT1 et l OPT2 sont tous deux initialis s Pour plus de d tails se reporter au manuel d entretien Se reporter au manuel d utilisation pour cr er une Boite de FAX Si se selecciona ALL en U698 se inicializan ambos OPT1 y OPT2 Para m s detalles lea el manual de servicio Consulte la gu a de uso para crear un Buz n de FAX Wenn ALL in U698 gew hlt wird werden OPT1 und OPT2 initialisiert Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung Schlagen Sie zur Erzeugung einer FAX Box in der Einfuhrung nach Se viene selezionato ALL nel modo U698 entrambi OPT1 e OPT2 sono inizializzati Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d istruzioni Leggere la guida alle funzioni per creare una Casella FAX U698 Jl ALL I fili OPTI OPT2 OIGA AKAMA HE LAME AH enfer 0698 CIALL RESTS c T amp MHI SO CERT SER En gt 7 2 2 A Fo KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B V Hoeksteen 40 2132 MS Hoofddorp The Netherlands Phone 31 20 654 0000 Home page http www kyoceramita europe com Email info kyoceramita europe com KYOCERA MITA NEDERLAND B V Beechavenue 25 1119RA Schiphol Rijk The Netherlands Phone 31 20 58 77 200 KYOCERA MITA UK LTD 8 Beacontree Plaza Gillette Way Reading Berks RG2 OBS U K Phone 44 1189 311 500 KYOCERA MIT
152. ex cutez l l ment de maintenance U072 pour effectuer le r glage S lectionnez FRONT pour r gler en une seule fois la copie recto seul et la copie recto verso Utilisez BACK uniquement si vous voulez r gler individuellement le verso de la copie recto verso Ajuste de la l nea central del DP 1 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el tem de mantenimiento U072 para ajustar Seleccione FRONT para ajustar ambas copias simple y duplex al mismo tiempo Utilice BACK s lo si necesita ajustar individualmente el segundo lado de la copia duplex Einstellen der DP Mittellinie 1 Den Wartungsmodus aktivieren und den Wartungsposten U072 zur Einstellung ausf hren W hlen Sie FRONT um Simplex und Duplexkopie auf einmal einzustellen Verwenden Sie BACK nur wenn die zweite Seite der Duplexkopie individuell eingestellt werden muss Regolazione della linea centrale del DP 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione e avviare la voce di manutenzione U072 per la regolazione Selezionare FRONT per regolare simultaneamente entrambe le copie simplex e duplex Usare BACK solo se necessario regolare il secondo lato della copia duplex singolarmente 79 DP hibik LEERSE 0072 ETT IH SEE JEFE FRONT BY s AT o C Bote ya Soo RE INE DIA S TT 6 BACK o 629 5 1 3 1 FU SEY PLA RIRS FRONT 23885 3 25 Orr rfi pd ifi e D ECC gt Cri re E OA HET LAA
153. feedshift switch or duplex paper conveying switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch duplex paper conveying switch 18 A paper jam in the duplex section is indi cated during copying jam in duplex paper conveying section 2 Jam code 61 Broken duplex paper con veying switch or registration Switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item 0031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Duplex paper conveying switch registration switch 1 4 13 2K5 1 Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 19 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying no original feed Jam code 70 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the original feed motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary 20
154. frame can be fixed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press MODE1 ALL on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport 4 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error Refer to the table of the error codes on P 1 3 19 When ERROR 09 occurred turn main power switch off then on format the hard disk using maintenance item U024 and execute initialization using maintenance item U002 For other errors occurred turn main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item 0002 Maintenance item No Description 2K5 U003 Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine Method Press the start key The currently set telephone number is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel 2 Enter a telephone number up to 15 digits 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Displaying the machine number Description Sets or displays the machine number Purpose To check or set the machine number Method 1 Press the start key If the machine serial number o
155. heater ds cover D 9 Pull out the fuser heater 10 Replace the fuser heater and install the Rear fuser heater heater cover 11 Refit all the removed parts Screw Front fuser heater cover Fuser heater Figure 1 5 82 1 5 44 5 Detaching and refitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller Procedure 1 2 3 Remove the fuser heater see page 1 5 43 Remove the heat roller separation claws see page 1 5 40 Remove the front and rear heat bushes from right fuser frame Remove the fuser gear 746 front and rear heat bushes from heat roller Replace the heat roller and install the roller Refit all the removed parts Front heat bush I M d Fuser 246 P d n d Rear heat bush Right fuser frame Figure 1 5 83 2K5 1 5 45 2K5 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor 1 Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermistor 1 Procedure 1 Remove the heat roller see page 1 5 45 2 Remove the screw and remove the fuser thermistor 1 3 Replace the fuser thermistor 1 and install the thermistor 4 Refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 84 1 5 46 2K5 7 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermistor 2 Procedure 1 2 3 4 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 37 Unhook four hooks and remove the fuser unit cove
156. hooks of the finisher tray 1 into the front eject cover and the rear eject cover H respectively and then attach the finisher tray 1 29 Ins rez les crochets avant et arri re du plateau du module de finition 1 dans le capot d jection avant G et dans le capot d jection arri re H respectivement puis fixez le plateau du module de finition 1 29 Inserte los ganchos delantero y trasero de la bandeja de finalizador 1 en la cubierta de expulsi n frontal G y la cubierta de expulsi n trasera H respectivamente y coloque la bandeja de finalizador 1 29 Die vorderen und hinteren Haken der Finisher Ablage 1 jeweils in die Frontauswurfabdeckung G und die Ruckauswurfabdeckung H einf hren und dann die Finisher Ablage 1 anbringen 29 Inserite i ganci anteriori e posteriori del vassoio del finitore 1 rispettivamente nel coperchio anteriore di espulsione carta G e nel coperchio posteriore di espulsione carta e poi montate il vassoio del finitore 1 29 TR VI AE AIRETA HER Bi RUE WER ALA Do DoF 392 HAL Z 5 29 7 00 SHIT G 5 amp H lc yy EBRO 10 Attaching the staple cartridge 30 Open the cover 31 and insert the staple cartridge J 31 Close the cover 31 Fixation de la cartouche d agrafes 30 Ouvrez le capot 31 et ins rez la cartouche d agrafes J 3
157. i Se gt o e fo Front wire holder plate Figure 1 5 36 1 5 19 2K5 7 Remove the round terminals from the scan ner wire springs 8 Remove the scanner wires 1 5 20 ad Round terminal ANI Round terminal POS Scanner wire spring Scanner wire spring Figure 1 5 37 2K5 2 2 Fitting the scanner wires NOTE When fitting the wires be sure to use those specified below Machine front P N 2C912360 gray Machine rear P N 2C912350 black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools P N 302C968310 Two scanner wire stoppers P N 35968110 Procedure 1 Remove the screw and remove the scanner wire drum gear Scanner wire drum gear Figure 1 5 38 2 Remove the stop ring and bush from the Bush front of the scanner wire drum shaft Scanner unit 3 Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the scanner unit Stop ring Figure 1 5 39 1 5 21 2K5 4 Insert the locating ball on each of the scan ner wires into the hole in the respective scanner wire drum and wind the scanner wire three turns inward and four turns out ward With the locating ball as the reference point wind the shorter end of each of the wires outward 5 Secure the scanner wires using the scanner wire stoppers Scanner wire stoppers Three turns Three turns inward inward AL Locating Four turns ball Four turns outward outward Scanner wire dr
158. is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group Authorization Set and then Change of Group Authorization 3 Press On 4 Press OK Group List 1 12 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of User Login Setting Next of Group Authorization Set Register Edit of Group List and then Add Press Change of Group ID Enter the group ID and press OK Press Change of Group Name Enter the group name and press OK Press Change of Access Level Select the user access privilege and press OK Press Change of Print Restriction Select Reject Usage or Off and press OK Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set Copy Restric tion Send Restriction FAX TX Restriction Storing Restr in Box and Storing Restr in Memory Press Register to add a new group on the group list 2K5 Obtain Network User Property 1 BO 10 11 12 13 14 15 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of User Login Setting Change of Obtain NW User Property Press On Press Server Name Enter the LDAP serv
159. item No Description 2K5 U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors or solenoids in the DP on Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Motor and solenoid Operation DP FEED MOT Original feed motor OFM In operation DP CON MOT Original conveying motor OCM In operation DP REV MOT Original switchback motor OSBM In operation DP RP SOL Switchback pressure solenoid SBPSOL On for 0 5 s DP RJ SOL Switchback feedshift solenoid SBFSSOL On for 0 5 s 4 To turn each motor off press the stop key Completion Press the stop key when operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the DP Purpose To check if respective switches in the DP operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status If the on status of a switch is detected the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse Display Switches TMG SW DP timing switch DPTSW REV SW Original switchback switch OSBSW SET SW Original set switch OSSW SZSWA Original size length switch OSLSW COV OP SW DP interlock switch DPILSW DP OP SW DP open close switch DPOCSW
160. la altura de la rueda delantera derecha de la misma forma que en el paso 2 para que cada centro de las partes de enganche 16 de cada pestillo est alineado con el centro de los dos ganchos 15 en el finalizador de documentos A cuando el finalizador de documentos A est nido a el MFP vista de arriba Die H he der vorderen rechten Laufrolle auf die in Schritt 2 beschriebene Weise einstellen so dass die Mitte der Rasten 16 der Verriegelungsklaue auf die Mitte der zwei Haken 15 am Dokument Finisher A ausgerichtet ist wenn der Dokument Finisher A an den MFP angesetzt ist von oben gesehen Regolare l altezza della ruota orientabile anteriore destra allo stesso modo descritto al passo 2 in modo che ciascun centro delle parti di aggancio 16 del dispositivo di arresto sia allineato al centro dei due ganci 15 della finitrice di documenti A una volta che la finitrice di documenti A viene unita all MFP vista dall alto REET dS A E EPLER MEAR REST FP FEE 15 SCR 16 FORA 2 0 Jg DUREE RO E o L E25 v2 15 27 Pe 7 y FERRO 2 amp ERIC LITA MO 2 4 07 8loz 16 5 ES 4 5 Adjust the height of the left two casters the same manner
161. la cubierta delantera izquierda 19 Suelte los dos pestillos 26 de la cubierta 6 desmontada en el paso 3 utilizando el destornillador de punta plana para desmontar el soporte de clip inferior 27 20 Coloque el soporte de clip inferior 27 en la cubierta delantera izquierda E Installieren der linken Frontabdeckun 19 Die zwei Rasten 26 der in Schritt 3 entfernten Abdeckung 6 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen um den unteren B roklammerhalter 27 abzunehmen 20 Den unteren B roklammerhalter 27 an der linken Frontabdeckung E anbringen Installazione del coperchio frontale sinistro 19 Rilasciate due fermi 26 del coperchio 6 rimosso nel passo utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta per rimuovere il contenitore inferiore delle graffette 27 20 Montare il contenitore inferiore delle graffette 27 al coperchio frontale sinistro E 19 H 3 P B 6 HU 2 ARA 26 FFI Per 27 20 MATER 27 Bete Ze Wat E Zr BI 73 S OO BR Y ft It 19 FIR 3 CHRO 9E L 7530 73 6 OILDIAA 26 2 ipie v FARTS A 7TRE CHER LZ Y yF NTF 27 FRONT 20 7 Y y TANF 27 EEN E 2505125 21 Replace the cover 8 removed in step 4 22 Install the left front cover E using the two screws 4 removed in step 3 23 Replace the clip holder 3 removed in step 2 24 Close left cover 1 2 and the front cover 1 21 Remettez en place le ca
162. la machine branchez le connecteur 24 de la table de processus du module de finition au connecteur 25 de l unit de transport du papier 20 Branchez le connecteur 26 de la table de processus du module de finition YC4 27 sur le PWB du moteur 21 Remettez le capot 16 en place en utilisant la vis 15 retir e auparavant lors de l tape 8 19 En el lado trasero de la m quina conecte el conector 24 de la tabla de proceso de finalizador en el conector 25 de la unidad de transporte de papel 20 Conecte el conector 26 de la tabla de proceso de finalizador en YC4 27 en el PWB del motor 21 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta 16 utilizando el tornillo 15 sacado en el paso 8 19 Den Steckverbinder 24 der Finisher Druckablage auf der R ckseite der Maschine mit dem Steckverbinder 25 der Papierf rdereinheit verbinden 20 Den Steckverbinder 26 der Finisher Druckablage an YC4 27 der Motorplatine anschlie en 21 Die Abdeckung 16 wieder mit der in Schritt 8 entfernten Schraube 15 anbringen 19 Sul lato posteriore della macchina collegate il connettore 24 della tabella di elaborazione del finitore al connettore 25 dell unit di trasporto della carta 20 Collegate il connettore 26 della tabella di elaborazione del finitore al YC4 27 sul motore PWB Rimettete a posto il coperchio 16 utilizzando la vite 15 rimossa nel passo 8 19 231085 RE TT AP DIRA FEK 24 VERE T
163. la plaque de r glage d angle C et fixez la a l aide d une vis M4 x 14 E 3 Inserte la placa de ajuste de ngulo C y fije con el tornillo M4 x 14 E 3 Den Winkeleinstellhalter C einsetzen und mit einer M4 x 14 Schraube E befestigen 3 Inserire la piastra di regolazione dell angolo C e fissarla con una vite M4 x 14 E H 14384 M4 X 14 E 3 AREA C EA M4 X 14 E 1 AG ETS 21 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR PAPER FEEDER Supplied parts A Paper feeder DM ooo ii C Joint plate D x 6 screw Pieces fournies A Bureau iBrOCHGS ast cse nete dee bare C Plaque de raccord i D Vis M3 x 6 Partes suministradas A Alimentador de papel 1 A ne eee C Placa de uni n D Tornillo x 6 Gelieferte Teile C Verbindungsplatte D x 6 Schraube Parti di fornitura C Piastra di giunzione D Vite M3 x 6 sss aa Ge ri c 1 a 2 I eR 1 D HERZ M3 6 1 EHA aa Be APS SDF HF erra 1 B E 2 o 1 D EAM 6 1 ronm zT Paper size 6 cacao 4 20
164. mm or more in width of paper Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value Leading edge registration t 20 1 0 mm Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 4 6 Press the start key The value is set Remark When changing the setting value of Large each item is modified equal to amount of the value which is changed adds also the value of Small each item and is pulled 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0034 Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode 0066 0071 1 3 30 1 3 34 Adjustment Center line adjustment 1 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from MP tray 10 0 to 0 0 1 mm MPT 10 0 LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from cassette 1 10 0 to 0 1 mm CAS 1 10 0 LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from cassette 2 10 0 to 0 1 mm CAS 2 10 0 LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from optional cassette 3 10 0 to 0 1 mm CAS 3 10 0 LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from o
165. number of pages as 999 or less 2 Scan to FTP error codes 2K5 Remarks Code Display Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1101 Error Host name Enter the disable host name Enter the correct host name or IP address IP address 1102 Error User Password Domain name is not entered Enter the user name with the form of either Domain User or Domain User Assign disable user pass Enter the correct user name password word 1103 Error Pathname or File Connect to the folder which is Enter correct user name password Name not permitted for reference Check the access limit of destination folder writing Assign disable folder path Enter correct folder path 1105 Error Not support protocol FTP Protocol is set to OFF Check ON in the Scanner FTP screen in COMMAND CENTER 2101 Error Can not connect Enter the disable host name Enter the correct host name or IP address IP address Assign the wrong port num Enter the correct port number ber Network is not connected Check if the server is operating properly Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc 2102 Error Can not connect with The server is unable to com Check if the server is operating properly timeout municate Send the server which does Enter the correct host name or IP address not support FTP server 2103 Error Response wait with The server is unable to com
166. paper convey sette 3 1 4 4 ing section Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within specified time of the PF feed switch PFFSW turning on paper feed from optional cassette 4 1064 ms The feed switch FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional cas sette 4 1064 ms Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within specified time of the PF feed switch PFFSW turning on paper feed from optional cassette 4 2000 ms 20 Misfeed in MP tray paper conveying sec tion The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning on 1686 ms The registration switch RSW does not turn on within specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning on 1686 ms 21 Multiple sheets in paper feed section The feed switch 1 FSW1 does nat turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from cassette 1 1429 ms Paper length The feed switch 2 FSW2 does nat turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from cassette 2 1429 ms Paper length The feed switch FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional cas sette 3 4 detected by the machine 1429 ms Paper length The feed switch FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional cas sette 3 4
167. paperfeeder and optional document finisher Bb ALD a A gt BR 5VSL 24VSL 24VSL GND GND NC 5 V DC power output to document finisher 24 V DC power output to document finisher 24 V DC power output to paper feeder Ground Ground Not used 12 Connected to the engine PWB N C 24VIL3 Not used 24 V DC power output to EPWB 2 3 3 2K5 2 3 2 Engine PWB A18 ga 1 1 4 41 YC14 13YC111 12 2 1 YC28 7 1 vc30 5 2 1 rZ 10 2 1 12 2 A13 B1 1 B1 i B12 YC23 EE YC22 24 SO 2232 2 e N 8 e lt 2 2 1 o 2 Figure 2 3 2 Engine PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 4 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC1 A1 GND J Ground Connected A2 TONEFUL 05 VDC OFS On Off to the over 5V O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to OFS flow sensor cleaning A4 24VIL2 O 24VDC 24 V DC power output to CL lamp toner A5 ERASE3N O 0 24V DC CL On Off Sensen A6 ERASE2N 0 24VDC CL On Off humidity sensor A7 ERASE1N O 0 24V DC CL On Off toner feed 8 GND ES ls Ground 2 9 DEVDETN 0 5V DC TNS On Off developing PWB drum A10 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to TNS Ree A11 5VSL 5VDC 5 V DC power output to HUMS user uni A12 HUMID_SDA Analog HUMS detection voltage signal A13 GND l Ground A14 HUMID SCL O 0 5V DC pulse
168. performed When toner comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve Development is complete Magnetic toner blade South pole North pole Drum Developing sleeve Figure 2 1 13 Single component developing system 2 1 11 2K5 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller separation electrode and drum separation claws A high voltage generated by the high voltage PWB HVPWB is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation charging that is output from the high voltage PWB HVPWB to the separation electrode Drum separation claws Separation electrode Drum Transfer roller Figure 2 1 14 Transfer and separation sections EPWB HVPWB Separation high voltager electrode vc124 SHVDRN CN1 9 Bice EN SHVISELN ont Transfe THVADJC high voltager 12 10 CN1 3 THVDRN YC12 11 CN1 2 Transfer roller Figure 2 1 15 Transfer and separation sections block diagram 2 1 12 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections 2K5 The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process and the cleaning spiral that ca
169. pes 4 RD 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data 5 RD 0 3 3 V DC pulse Received data 6 CT O 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power output 7 CAT PHY O 0 3 3 VDC Control signal 8 ANO PHY O 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power output 9 CAT MAC Ground 10 ANO MAC O 0 3 3V DC Control signal YC5 2 U1 VBUS 5VDC 5 V DC power input Connected U2 DATA VO l USB data signal to the USB U3 DATA vo l USB data signal U4 GND Ground YC8 1 GND l Ground Connected 2 AUDIO Analog AUDIO signal 27 3 SEL AUDIOO O 0 3 3V DC SEL AUDIOO signal 4 SEL AUDIO1 O 0 3 3 VDC SEL AUDIO1 signal 5 _REG 0 3 3 V DC REG signal 6 A8 0 3 3 DC pulse Address bus signal 7 A15 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 8 AT O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 9 A14 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 10 A6 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 11 A13 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 12 A5 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 13 A12 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 14 4 O 0 3 3 DC pulse Address bus signal 15 11 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 2 3 15 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC8 16 A3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal Connected 17 A10 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal dig 18 A2 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 19 A9 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 20 A1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Address bus signal 21 GND l
170. placa de metal 10 La placa de metal desmontada 10 ya no es necesaria Die Schraube 9 herausdrehen um die Metallplatte 10 abzunehmen Die abgenommene Metallplatte 10 wird nicht mehr ben tigt Rimuovere la vite 9 per togliere la piastra di metallo 10 La piastra di metallo 10 rimossa non pi necessaria EF LAMB 9 ra 10 TRAE 10 10 EX VIT GR 10 BOO 19720 6 o N N Release the latch 11 using a flat head screwdriver and slide the cover 12 to the front to remove Remove the screw 13 to remove the cover 14 Lib rez le verrou 11 l aide d un tournevis t te plate puis faites glisser le capot 12 vers l avant pour le d poser Retirez la vis 13 pour d poser le capot 14 Suelte el pestillo 11 utilizando un destornillador de cabeza plana y deslice la cubierta 12 hacia delante para desmontarla Saque el tornillo 13 para desmontar la cubierta 14 Die Raste 11 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen und die Abdeckung 12 nach vorn schieben um sie abzunehmen Die Schraube 13 herausdrehen um die Abdeckung 14 abzunehmen Rilasciate il fermo 11 utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta e fate scivolare il coperchio 12 verso il lato anteriore per rimuoverlo Togliete la vite 13 per rimuovere il coperchio 14 5 JE M TIERRA 11 12 PRAT AIEEE o
171. placed correctly Place the original correctly 1 4 4 Electric problems 2K5 Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on The power cord is not plugged in properly Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet No electricity at the power outlet Measure the input voltage Broken power cord Check for continuity If none replace the cord Defective main power switch Check for continuity across the contacts If none replace the main power switch Defective power source PWB With AC present check for 24 V DC at YC8 4 on the power source PWB and 5 V DC at YC8 1 If none replace the power source PWB 2 The eject motor does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective drive transmis sion system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective eject motor Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates If not replace the eject motor Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U030 and check if th
172. retainer in the direction of the arrow and remove the retainer from the primary paper feed unit Forwarding pulley retainer Stopper Figure 1 5 4 2K5 5 Remove the stop ring from the forwarding pulley retainer 6 Pull the paper forwarding pulley shaft and remove the forwarding pulley Removing the paper feed pulley 7 Remove two stop rings from the primary paper feed unit 8 Pull the paper feed pulley shaft in the direc tion of the arrow and remove the paper feed pulley Removing the separation pulley 9 Remove the stop ring from the primary paper feed unit 10 Pull the separation pulley shaft in the direc tion of the arrow and remove the separation pulley Forwarding pulley shaft Paper feed pulley shaft Stop ring Forwarding pulley Figure 1 5 5 Stop ring Stop ring Paper feed pulley Figure 1 5 6 Separation pulley shaft Separation pulley Figure 1 5 7 2K5 11 Replace the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys 12 Refit all the removed parts When refitting the forwarding pulley orient it correctly as shown in Figure 1 5 6 13 When the forwarding pulley paper feed pul ley separation pulley or the primary paper feed unit is replaced perform maintenance mode 0901 to clear the counter value see Forwarding pulley page 1 3 84 Machine front Machine rear Figure 1 5 8 1 5 5 2K5 2 Detaching and refittin
173. rez les trois verrous 6 situ s l arri re du DP en utilisant un tournevis t te plate pour retirer le capot 7 Suelte los tres pestillos 6 en el lado trasero del DP utilizando un destornillador de punta plana para desmontar la cubierta 7 Die drei Rasten 6 auf der R ckseite des DP mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen um die Abdeckung 7 zu entfernen Rilasciare i tre fermi 6 sul retro del DP utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta per rimuovere il coperchio 7 EMI 7 AERATE DP Je I 3 DP RAMO IDA 6 3 MP TRATA RT A ATE LN 7 11 12 Adjust the height of DP Loosen the nut 8 For copy example f Loosen the adjusting screw 9 For copy example g Tighten the adjusting screw 9 gt Amount of change per scale Approx 1 mm 10 Approx 0 5 mm 11 Retighten the nut 8 R glez la hauteur du DP Desserrez l crou 8 Pour l exemple de copie f Desserrez la vis de r glage 9 Pour l exemple de copie g Serrez la vis de r glage 9 gt Quantit de changement par pas environ 1 mm 10 environ 0 5 mm 11 Resserrez l crou 8 Ajuste la altura del DP Afloje la tuerca 8 Para la copia de muestra f Afloje el tornillo de ajuste 9 Para la copia de muestra g Apriete el tornillo de ajuste 9 gt Cantidad de cambio de escala Aprox 1 mm 10
174. sections 1 Feedshift guide 5 Switchback pulley 2 Eject roller 6 Feedshift guide 3 Eject pulley 7 Eject switch ESW 4 Switchback roller 8 Feedshift switch FSSW EPWB Fssw SEPSWN__ yco 2 E ie d COMDA i C141 i 14 2 i E COMDNA f 4 jt 110143 14 4 ME trees 4 DFSOLDR e YC11 2 e FSSOL EN DESOERS 11 3 Figure 2 1 21 Eject and switchback sections block diagram 2 1 16 2 1 9 Duplex section 2K5 The duplex section consists of the components shown in figure In duplex mode after copying on to the reverse face of the paper the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex section The paper is then conveyed to the paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers E eo e e T 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 n JL TS Figure 2 1 22 Duplex section Feedshift guide Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley Duplex feed pulley Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW 2 1 17 2K5 A EPWB E DFSOLDR 3 FSSOL DFSOLRS 13 DUPCL Vea ng DUPSW c8
175. signal Connected 2 KUIOCSN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIOCSN1 signal dig 3 KUIOACKNO 0 3 3 DC pulse KUIOACKNO signal 4 KUIOACKN1 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIOACKN 1 signal 5 KUIOIRNO 0 33VDC KUIOIRNO signal 6 KUIOIRN1 0 3 3 V DC KUIOIRN1 signal 7 KUIORDYO O 0 3 3V DC KUIORDYO signal 8 KUIORDY1 O 0 3 3V DC KUIORDY1 signal 9 GND l Ground 10 GND l Ground 11 KUIODACKRNO 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIODACKRNO signal 12 KUIODACKRN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIODACKRN1 signal 13 KUIODACKTNO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIODACKTNO signal 14 KUIODACKTN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIODACKTN1 signal 15 KUIORSTNO O 0 3 3V DC KUIORSTNO signal 16 KUIORSTN1 O 0 3 3V DC KUIORSTN1 signal 17 GND l Ground 18 GND l Ground 19 SLEEP O 0 3 3 VDC SLEEP signal 20 CFOENO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse CFOENO signal 21 EXTBOEN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EXTBOEN signal 22 CFWENO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse CFWENO signal 23 EXTBDIR O 0 3 3 V DC pulse EXTBDIR signal 24 CFRSTO O 0 3 3VDC CFRSTO signal 25 CFOCSNO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse CFOCSNO signal 26 CFWAITNO 0 3 3 V DC CFWAITNO signal 27 CFOCSN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse CFOCSN1 signal 28 CFOCDET1 0 3 3 V DC CFOCDET1 signal 29 GND l Ground 30 CFOCDET2 0 3 3 V DC CFOCDET2 signal YC12 1 FPSTAT l 0 3 3 V DC Operation panel status signal Connected 2 S LEDO O 0 3 3V DC Operation panel LED display signal Ried 3 SLED1 0 3 3 V DC Operation panel LED display signal PWB 4 PANEL RESET O 0 3 3V DC
176. takes place when CN1 2 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item 0101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB 1 4 43 2K5 Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 13 The original size is not detected cor rectly Original is not placed cor rectly Check the original and correct if necessary Poor contact in the origi nal detection switch or original size sensor con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective original detec tion switch If the level of YC17 5 on the engine PWB does not go low when the original detection switch is turned on and off replace the origi nal detection switch Defective original size sensor Check if sensor operates correctly If not replace it 14 The touch panel keys do not work Poor contact in the touch panel connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective touch panel or main operation PWB If any keys do not work after running the maintenance item U201 to initialize the touch panel replace the touch panel or main oper ation unit PWB 15 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cas sette 1 2 or MP tray Poor contact in t
177. ter Refit all the removed parts Filter cover Ozone filter 2 Figure 1 5 94 6 Ozone filter 2 Y 2 Ozone filter 2 3 Detaching and refitting the hard disk Follow the procedure below to replace the hard disk Procedure 1 Remove eleven screws and remove the rear cover 2 Pressing the lock lever and remove two con nectors Lock ES y Hard disk lt lt N 2K5 SS Screws eleven LE p 59 6 A m 2 f 2 SE 15 SESI SSS BZ 5 Z lt ie Le A e Rear cover Figure 1 5 95 IP c a HB REL p lever Figure 1 5 96 1 5 53 2K5 3 Remove three screws and remove the HDD mount Hard disk Figure 1 5 97 4 Remove four screws and remove the HDD mount 5 Replace the hard disk and Install the hard disk 6 Refit all the removed parts 7 When the hard disk is replaced perform maintenance mode U024 to initialize the hard disk see page 1 3 19 HDD mount Figure 1 5 98 1 5 54 4 Direction of installing the principal fan motors 2K5 When detaching or refitting the fan motors be careful of the airflow direction intake or exhaust Controller fan motor Rating label upside RE NY O ES O
178. termi nals Check the connection of connector YC22 on the engine PWB and the connector on the PF main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of PF lift motor 2 Replace PF lift motor 2 Defective PF lift motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace PF lift motor 2 Defective PF lift switch 2 Check if YC1 7 on the PF main PWB goes low when PF lift switch 2 is turned off If not replace PF lift switch 2 Main motor problem Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu ously after main motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the engine PWB and the connector on the main motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective main motor Replace the main motor Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 23 2K5 Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Drum motor problem Stable OFF is detected for 1 continu ously after drum motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector
179. to 255 125 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting Initialization of original reading position 1 Select CLEAR 2 Press the start key The setting is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 39 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U089 1 3 40 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP PG pattern created in the machine Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing using MIP PG pattern output with out scanning Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the MIP PG pattern to be output and press the start key Display PG pattern to be output Purpose GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit engine output characteristics MONO1 To check the drum quality Output density 0 MONO4 To check the drum quality Output density 70 256 LEVEL To check resolution reproducibility in printing 3 Press the system menu key 4 Press the start key A MIP PG pattern is output Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0093 Setting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode depending on respectiv
180. tornillo 15 sacado en el paso 8 11 Den Steckverbinder 17 auf der R ckseite des Job Separators an YC4 18 der Motorplatine anschlie en 12 Die Schraube 19 l sen um die Antriebseinheit des Job Separators f r den Antriebsstart bereit zu machen 13 Die Schraube 19 festziehen 14 Die Abdeckung 16 wieder mit der in Schritt 8 entfernten Schraube 15 anbringen 11 Collegare il connettore 17 sul lato posteriore del separatore lavori al YC4 18 del motore PWB 12 Allentare la vite 19 per preparare l unit guida del separatore lavori al funzionamento 13 Stringere la vite 19 14 Rimettete a posto il coperchio 16 utilizzando la vite 15 rimossa nel passo 8 ART 17 dite PERA YCA 18 Eo 12 1 43222 19 fS ZEE Ab T 13 REIS 1 322 19 o 14 AED 8 d FI 16 FH 1 10822 15 11 Ya TESTI BO 17 BEV DIA 104 18 29 5 12 Ex 19144050 Hb gt hM RETA 13 EX 1911 14 FE 8 THV ILH 16 1501 ACY ROIS Attaching the LED PWB unit 15 Connect the connector 20 of the job separator to the connector 21 of the LED PWB unit B 16 Pass the wires through the space 22 and fix the LED PWB unit using the M3 x 6 screw 1 Fixation de l unit LED PWB Ins
181. valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 08 mm Cambio del valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra j Reduzca el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra k Aumente el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 08 mm Den Einstellwert ndern Fur Kopienmuster j Den Einstellwert erniedrigen Fur Kopienmuster k Den Einstellwert erh hen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 08 mm Cambio del valore d impostazione Per un esempio di copia j Diminuire il valore d impostazione Per esempio di copia Aumentare il valore d impostazione Variazione graduale 0 08 mm Wig f G ABE k HT KARKE E 1 RE 210 08mm HET 2 7 j OWE APY IW k DRA BEIE Z LIF LAF y 7OZ21LE 0 08mm co Make proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 3 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values Reference value Within 2 0 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 3 jusqu a ce que la ligne 2 de de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence 2 0 max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 3 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Dentro de 2 0 mm Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 3 w
182. 0 U285 U326 U328 U339 U342 U343 Switching between double and single counts Selecting the timing for copy counting Setting service status page Setting the black line cleaning indication Side ejection setting Setting the drum heater ON OFF Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex simplex copy mode DOUBLE COUNT A3 LEDGER After ejection ON ON 8 OFF 0 ON 1 2 11 2K5 1 1 2 3 Installing the key counter option Installing the key counter requires the following component Key counter P N 3025418011 Key counter set P N 302A369708 Supplied parts of key counter set Key counter socket assembly P N 3029236241 Key counter cover P N 3066060011 Key counter mount P N 3066060041 Key counter retainer P N 302GR03020 Key counter cover retainer P N 302GR03010 Two 2 Edgings P N 7YZM210006 H01 One 1 Band P N M21AH010 One 1 M3 x 8 tap tight P screw P N 5MBTPB3008PW R Two 2 M4 x 10 tap tight P screws P N 5MBTPB4010PW R Two 2 M4 x 10 tap tight S screws P N 5MBTPB4010TW R Two 2 M3 x 6 bronze flat head screws P N 7BB003306H One 1 M4 x 20 tap tight S screw P N 7BB100420H One 1 M3 bronze nut P N 7BC1003055 H01 One 1 M3 x 8 bronze binding screw P N B1B03080 One 1 M4 x 30 tap tight S screw P N B1B54300 Five 5 M4 x 6 chrome TP screws P N B4A04060 Two 2 M4 x 10 chrome TP screws P N B4A04100 Procedure 1 Press the power key on the o
183. 0 ms The paper conveying sensor PCS is not turned off within specified time its turning on reversing set 656 ms 96 Jam between the built in finisher and machine built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW is not turned on within the specified time when paper is ejected to the fin isher tray from the process table 2000 ms 3 Paper misfeeds Problem Causes check procedures 2K5 Corrective measures 1 A paper jam in the paper feed convey ing or eject section is indicated as soon as the main power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch eject switch or feedshift switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch eject switch feedshift switch 2 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from cassette 1 Jam code 10 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley of the cassette 1 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 1 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defecti
184. 002 2K593070 2K593060 2H094160 2H094451 2A820530 Eject roller Switchback roller Eject pulley Feed pulley PARTS ROLLER EXIT INNER SP PARTS ROLLER EXIT FEED SP PULLEY EXIT B PULLEY EXIT FEED 302H094370 302H094360 2BL21450 302H028230 2H094370 2H094360 2H028230 Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley PARTS DUPLEX A SP PARTS DUPLEX B SP PULLEY 15 DUPLEX 302H094380 302H094390 3HY07120 2H094380 2H094390 Right filter Ozone filter 1 Ozone filter 2 PARTS HOLDER FILTER A SP FILTER OZONE B FILTER OZONE A 302H094401 302H033180 302H033170 2H094401 2H033180 2H033170 2 4 1 2K5 Maintenance kits Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Alternative part No Maintenance kit lt For 120 V specifications gt Upper lower paper feed pulley Upper lower separation pulley MP separation pulley Upper lower forwarding pulley MP forwarding pulley Developing unit Ozone filter 1 Ozone filter 2 Drum unit Fuser unit Transfer roller unit Right filter MP paper feed pulley lt For 220 240 V specifications gt Upper lower paper feed pulley Upper lower separation pulley MP separation pulley Upper lower forwarding pulley MP forwarding pulley Developing unit Ozone filter 1 Ozone filter 2 Drum unit Fuser unit Transfer roller unit Right filter MP paper feed pulley 2 4 2 MK 6
185. 1 Refermez le capot 31 Colocaci n del cartucho de grapas 30 Abra la cubierta 31 e inserte el cartucho de grapas J 31 Cierre la cubierta 31 Anbringen des Heftklammermagazins 30 Die Abdeckung 31 ffnen und das Heftklammermagazin J einsetzen 31 Die Abdeckung 31 schlief en Montaggio della cartuccia dei punti metallici 30 Aprite il coperchio 31 e inserite la cartuccia del punti metallici J 31 Chiudete il coperchio 31 30 TFR 31 HAW BAT a CD e 31 lt 0 31 AF FWA bY YVORY Ht 30 1 3 31 PAX ATI MARY y Y D ERA 5 31 473 31 205 Adhering the blindfold seal For models with monochrome touch panel only 32 Clean the staple cover with alcohol and then adhere the blindfold seal K Collage de l tiquette de masquage pour les mod les quip s d un cran tactile monochrome seulement 32 Nettoyez le capot de l agrafeuse avec de l alcool puis collez l tiquette de masquage K Pegado del sello ciego S lo modelos con panel de toque monocrom tico 32 Limpie la cubierta de grapas con alcohol y pegue el sello ciego K Anbringen des Blindaufklebers nur f r Modelle mit Monochrom Sensorbildschirm 32 Die Hefterabdeckung mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Blindaufkleber K anbringen Applicate il sigillo mascherina solo per i modelli con pannello monocromatico a sfioramento 32 Pulite il coperchio della pinzatrice co
186. 10 Inserte el carril de gu a D en la parte inferior del finalizador de documentos A 10 Die F hrungsschiene D in das Unterteil des Dokument Finishers A einschieben 10 Inserire la guida della rotaia D nella parte inferiore della finitrice di documenti A 10 419 D HABITA 10 FER ayy RL 0 EA Fitting and adjusting the guide rail 11 While pressing the guide rail D to the document finisher A so that the gap between the guide rail D and the floor is approximately 10 mm secure it using two M4 x 6 binding screws E Note If the guide rail is not properly adjusted the guide rail may not move when the document finisher is Separated Fixation et r glage de la glissiere 11 Tout en pressant la glissi re D contre le retoucheur de document A de facon que l cart entre la glissi re D et le sol soit d environ 10 mm la fixer l aide de deux vis de raccordement M4 x 6 E Remarque Si la glissi re n est pas r gl e correctement la glissi re risquera de ne pas se d placer lorsque le retoucheur de document sera s par Fijaci n y ajuste del carril de gu a 11 Mientras presiona el carril de gu a D en el finalizador de documentos A para que la separaci n entre el carril de gu a D y el piso sea de unos 10 mm aseg relo utilizando dos tornillos de fijaci n M4 x 6 E Nota Si el carril de gu a no est bien ajustado el carril de gu a
187. 14 Program key indicator 2K5 1 1 3 Machine cross section s i a Light path Paper path Figure 1 1 5 Machine cross section Cleaning and charge erasing section Fuser section Eject and switchback section Duplex section Paper feed section Main charging section Optical section Developing section Transfer and separation section ADN OND 2K5 This page is intentionally left blank 1 1 8 1 2 1 Na 2K5 Installation environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 RH Power supply 120 V AC 11 8 A 220 to 240 V AC 6 5 A Power source frequency 50 Hz 0 3 60 Hz 0 3 Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or
188. 21d000b 321d000c 321d000d 321d000e 321d000f 321d0010 321d0011 321d0012 321d0013 321d0014 321d0015 Box open error Box close error Box creation error Box creation error Box deletion error Box movement error Fax memory directory creation error Fax memory error in writing Fax memory error in reading Shortcut error in writing Shortcut error in reading Program error in writing Program error in reading Address One Touch directory creation error Address One Touch error in writing Address One Touch error in reading File reading error File writing error Data mismatch Log file open error Log file error in writing Directory open error Directory error in reading Unspecified error HDD unavailable USB memory is not inserted File for writing is not found in the USB File for reading is not found in the HDD USB error in writing USB error in reading USB unmount error File rename error File open error File close error File reading error File writing error File copy error File compressed error File decompressed error Directory open error Directory creation error File writing error File reading error File deletion error Log file copy error to the USB 1 3 89 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U920 Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts Purpose To check the copy counts Method 1 Press the start key The current counts are displayed D
189. 3 5 2K5 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC4 Connected to the optional built in fin isher and optional job separator RLSOLN SLSOLN SCLK LOPSDI LOPSDO LOPRDY LOPSEL GND 5VSL GND GND 24VSL 24VSL 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC 24 V DC FSSOL return On Off FSSOL activate On Off Built in finisher Job separator clock signal Built in finisher serial communication data signal Job separator JESW On Off Built in finisher Job separator serial communica tion data signal Built in finisher ready signal Job separator EPDSW On Off Built in finisher Job separator select signal Ground 5 V DC power output to built in finisher Job sepa rator Ground Ground 24 V DC power output to built in finisher Job sep arator 24 V DC power output to built in finisher Job sep arator Connected to the optional document finisher DET DFSDO DFSDI DFSCLK DFSEL SISEL DFRDY SIRDY 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Document finisher connection signal Document finisher serial communication data signal Document finisher serial communication data signal Document finisher clock signal Document finisher select signal Not used Document finisher ready signal Not used Connected to the MP tray unit 2 3 6
190. 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 5 VDC Operation panel key scan return signal 0 Operation panel key scan return signal 1 Operation panel key scan return signal 2 Operation panel key scan return signal 3 Operation panel key scan return signal 4 Scan signal 0 Scan signal 1 Scan signal 2 Scan signal 3 Scan signal 6 Operation panel LED display drive signal 0 Operation panel LED display drive signal 1 Power key On Off 5 V DC power output to OPWB R Ground Connector Voltage 2K5 Description YC8 Connected to the left operation PWB o AN DOA A ON o 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse Scan signal 6 Operation panel key scan return signal 5 Operation panel key scan return signal 6 Operation panel key scan return signal 7 Scan signal 0 Scan signal 1 Scan signal 2 Scan signal 3 Operation panel LED display drive signal 2 Operation panel LED display drive signal 3 Operation panel LED display drive signal 4 Ground Connected to the upper operation PWB 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC
191. 33V Ai Ad 33V TIG e E AS 6 6 Ais AS 6 13 1 5 8 AT AS 8 A8 AS AS 8 A8 AS A gt 30 16 AG A6 Ai A16 A6 AIO A16 m LEN EE AS 2 12 72 AZ AZ NA ESE AZ 2 5 AS SL 1515 A OP2IR A15 A15 OP2IR OPAR A15 A15 OPAR 16 16 AS 25 25 WAN RDY NA A16 RDY RDY 16 RDY 1720 5 ls 5 lar 44 5 Arr n5 E 18 A2 212 18 fe 231723 RESET TOR AISI ATS TOR TOR NE A18 TOR 1 2 55 20 Ai 9 21 21 5 015 20 015 015 20 A20 015 221 GND 29 20 GND 21 GND GND AZ A21 GND 212 GND S S S 1e 19 AT 012 22 012 012 A22 A22 012 23 08 5 Ls ES BE D10 D10 010 010 40 gt e 5 wen Ds 25 25 DS 8 76 15 AS ND 5 ND GND GND 2 01 51515 es on 5 DS 27 010 o 1 14 10 D3 D3 D3 D3 1 1 2 Di Di Di 29 29 Dit ND A29 A28 ND GND GND 2 59 Aso Aso c 31 GND HEEL 8 etp 33133 012 TXDREG 82 82 TXDREG TXDREG TXDREG 5 09 35 013 15 Ais 15 15 E B6 2 38 38 06 10 87 10 10 10 s vi T ON a2 GND B10 5 42 GND Bip eit 43 43 KUODREGTO 12 Ai 22 44 KUIODREQTT 43 27 8131813 333V 333V B13 333V 45 KUIODREQRO OPZACK OPZACK OP2ACK 46 KUIODREOR1 5V Bis 815 5V 5V Bis 815 35V 27 27 KUICIORNO RXDREQ 816 RXDREQ RXDREQ 816 48 451 KUIGIORNT SOMA IOW zz
192. 48 2K5 Toner hopper 2 assembly Io 35385233 822 B 3332 3 crew S 8 Remove the toner hopper assembly 6 Remove three screws 7 Remove the connector Figure 1 5 49 9 Remove the top tray Figure 1 5 50 1 5 27 2K5 10 Remove the clamp A 11 Release two clamps B 12 Remove six connectors 13 Remove two screws and remove the cooling fan assembly 1 5 28 o Connector 1 Z AGF N OK Clamp B SENA Figure 1 5 52 2K5 14 Remove three screws and remove the LSU cover 15 Remove two connectors 16 Remove four screws and remove the laser scanner unit 17 Replace the laser scanner unit and install the unit 18 Refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 54 1 5 29 2K5 5 Adjusting the position of the ISU reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral square ness not obtained Caution Adjust the deflection in the paper at the registration roller first see page 1 3 25 Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image and if it is not obtained perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment Before making the following adjustment print the test pattern in maintenance item U402 to use as the original for
193. 6 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper jam during paper insertion to the finisher Jam code 81 Document finisher Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper entry sen sor With 5 V DC present at CN14 1 and CN14 3 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 2 and CN14 4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper entry sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Built in finisher Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper conveying switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 23 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying switch Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed Check and remedy 27 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying fin isher stapler jam Jam code 82 Document finisher Defective staple home posi tion sensor With 5 V DC present at CN10 2 on the finisher main PWB check if CN10 5 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high If it does replace the stapler section Built in finisher The stapler is blocked with a staple Remove the stapler cartridge a
194. 6 0 0 08 mm FRONT TAIL Trailing edge registration first side 66 to 66 0 08 mm 0 BACK HEAD Leading edge registration second side 66 66 0 0 08 mm 0 BACK TAIL Trailing edge registration second side 66 to 66 0 08 mm Adjustment Leading edge registration 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 13 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution If the CCD first side is adjusted check the CCD second side and if adjustment is required carry out the adjustment Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode 0071 0404 1 3 73 Maintenance item No 2K5 Description 9071 Adjustment Trailing edge registration 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 14 5 Press the start key The value is set
195. 6 abzunehmen Procedura Rimozione dei coperchi 1 Aprite il coperchio anteriore 1 e il coperchio sinistro 1 2 2 Rimuovete il contenitore delle graffette 3 3 Togliete due viti 4 e rilasciate i tre fermi 5 per rimuovere il coperchio 6 oo ot we RRR NES 1 TAR 1 AAC 1 2 2 P3e 3 3 E 2 22 4 3 5 WP tthe 6 o REFIR DIN FO RY HEL 1 NDS 1 BLVAW 1 2 ZBL 2 2 Y y FAM 3 609 3 ER 4 2 032 5 3 Dr e f BRUT AA 6 AMV 3 Release the latch 7 using a flat head screwdriver to remove the cover 8 Lib rez le verrou 7 l aide d un tournevis a t te plate pour retirer le capot 8 Suelte el pestillo 7 utilizando un destornillador de cabeza plana para desmontar la cubierta 8 Die Raste 7 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen um die Abdeckung 8 abzunehmen Rilasciate il fermo 7 utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta per rimuovere il coperchio 8 FIEIRA TIA RS PAA 7 BU P ati Bi 9 VEDIA 7 BEER LL 2771 08 ROT EA Q1AGAL AR Remove the screw 9 to remove the metal plate 10 The removed metal plate 10 is no longer required Retirez la vis 9 pour d poser la plaque m tallique 10 La plaque m tallique d pos e 10 n est plus n cessaire Quite el tornillo 9 para desmontar la
196. 71 MAINTENANCE KIT PULLEY PAPER FEED PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY FEED A PULLEY FEED A PARTS DV 420 SP FILTER OZONE B FILTER OZONE A PARTS DK 670 PARTS FK 671 U PARTS TR 670 PARTS HOLDER FILTER A SP UPPER PULLEY BYPASS MK 671 MAINTENANCE KIT PULLEY PAPER FEED PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY FEED A PULLEY FEED A PARTS DV 420 SP FILTER OZONE B FILTER OZONE A PARTS DK 670 PARTS FK 671 E PARTS TR 670 PARTS HOLDER FILTER A SP UPPER PULLEY BYPASS 1702 57050 1702 58 10 02 57050 Periodic maintenance procedures Section Maintenance part location User call Points and cautions 2K5 1 Test copy and test print Section Perform at the maxi mum copy size Maintenance part location Test copy User call 300K Points and cautions Paper feed section Paper feed pulley Check Clean Replace Clean with alcohol Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets Separation pulley Check Clean Replace Clean with alcohol Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets Forwarding pulley Check Clean Replace Clean with alcohol Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets MP paper feed pulley Check Clean Replace Clean with alcohol Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets MP separation pulley Check Clean Replace Clean with alcohol Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets MP forwarding pulley
197. A AE DIMM ORY 4414 E 7 ABE gt EA D2 REAL WAN 2 WO 3 2 Install the memory DIMM 1 or the optional memory DIMM J into the memory slot 3 on the lower level FLS Install it with the IC side facing down Insert it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks 3 Replace the cover 2 using the 2 screws 1 Proceed to step 4 on page 5 2 nstaller la m moire DIMM 1 ou la m moire DIMM en option J dans la fente m moire 3 se trouvant au niveau inf rieur FLS L installer avec le c t IC en bas L ins rer dans la direction de la fl che jusqu au clic 3 Reposez le couvercle 2 l aide des 2 vis 1 Passer l tape 4 de la page 5 2 Instale la memoria DIMM 1 o la memoria DIMM opcional J en la ranura para la memoria 3 en el nivel inferior FLS Inst lelo con el lado IC hacia abajo Ins rtela en la direcci n que indica la flecha hasta que escuche un clic 3 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta 2 utilizando los 2 tornillos 1 Vaya al paso 4 de la p gina 5 2 Setzen Sie die DIMM Speichermodule 1 oder das optionale DIMM Speichermodul J in die untere Position FLS der Speicherbank 3 ein Mit der IC Seite nach unten weisend installieren Schieben Sie das Modul in Pfeilrichtung bis es h rbar einrastet 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 2 wieder mit den 2 Schrauben 1 an Gehen Sie zum Schritt 4 auf Seite 5 weiter 2 lInstallare la memo
198. A ITALIA S p A Via G Verdi 89 91 20063 Cernusco s N Milano Italy Phone 39 02 92179 1 S A KYOCERA MITA BELGIUM N V Hermesstraat 8A 1930 Zaventem Belgium Phone 32 2 720 9270 KYOCERA MITA FRANCE S A Parc Les Algorithmes Saint Aubin 91194 GIF SUR YVETTE France Phone 33 1 6985 2600 KYOCERA MITA ESPANA S A Edificio Kyocera Avda de Manacor No 2 28290 Las Matas Madrid Spain Phone 34 91 631 8392 KYOCERA MITA FINLAND OY Kirvesmiehenkatu 4 00880 Helsinki Finland Phone 358 9 4780 5200 KYOCERA MITA SCHWEIZ Hohlstrasse 614 8048 Z rich Switzerland Phone 41 1 908 4949 KYOCERA MITA DEUTSCHLAND GMBH Otto Hahn Str 12 D 40670 Meerbusch Germany Phone 49 2159 918 0 KYOCERA MITA GMBH AUSTRIA Eduard Kittenberger Gasse 95 1230 Wien Austria Phone 43 1 86338 210 KYOCERA MITA SVENSKA AB Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista Sweden Phone 46 8 546 55000 2010 KYOCERA MITA Corporation t KYOCERG is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation KYOCERA MITA NORGE Postboks 150 Oppsal NO 0619 Oslo Olaf Helsetsvei 6 NO 0694 Oslo Norway Phone 47 22 62 73 00 KYOCERA MITA DANMARK A S Ejby Industrivej 1 DK 2600 Glostrup Denmark Phone 45 5687 1100 KYOCERA MITA PORTUGAL LDA Rua do Centro Cultural 41 Alvalade 1700 106 Lisbon Portugal Phone 351 21 842 9100 KYOCERA MITA SOUTH AFRICA PTY LTD 527 Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Business Park Midrand South Africa Phone 27
199. ACKTNO 13 13 KUIODACKTN1 14 KUIORSTNO 15 15 KUIORSTN1 16 GND 17117 GND 18 SLEEP 19 19 CFOENO 20 EXTBOEN 21 CFWENO 22 22 EXTBDIR 23 23 CFRSTO 24 CFOCSNO 25 25 CFWAITNO 26 CFOCSNi 27 27 CFOCDETT 28 GND 29 29 CFOCDET2 30 YC25 35V K ND 217 3 DS DS 49 50 KUIOCSN1 4 KUIOACKN1 6 KUIOIRN1 Y 8 YC2 1 2 3 RXDMACK B179 B17 RXDMACK B18 9 B18 IOW RXDMACK B17 B18 KUIOIOWNO KUIOIOWN1 B17 RXDMACK B18 TXDMACK B19 B19 TXDMACK B20 D14 B20 D14 D14 B20 TXDMACK B19 B19 TXDMACK B20 D14 D13 B21 B21 D13 D13 B21 D11 B22 B22 D11 D11 B22 B23 B23 D9 B21 D13 B22 D11 B23 D9 B24 B24 D7 D9 B23 D9 D7 B24 B24 D7 D6 D6 B25 D4 B26 B26 D4 00 00 DO B28 B28 DO B28 D6 B25 D6 D D D2 B27 D2 DO DO 1 YC5 YC3 YC4 0 GND 20 Ai 30 20 GND NC ALL At NC NC ALL At NC TP 2 AUDIO N AZ AZ N NC 2 az NC 21 271 SELAUDION 73 30 Ai A4 33V
200. B EPWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASS Y SP Main PWB MPWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASS Y SP Power source PWB PSPWB PARTS LVU 100 PARTS LVU 200 High voltage PWB HVPWB PARTS HIGH VOLTAGE SP Scanner PWB SPWB PARTS PWB SCANNER ASSY SP Inverter PWB INPWB PARTS LAMP INVERTER SP LCD inverter PWB LINPWB PARTS LCD INVERTER SP CCD PWB CCDPWB Main operation PWB OPWB M PARTS PWB PANEL ASS Y SP Right operation PWB OPWB R PARTS PWB OPERATION RIGHT ASS Y SP Left operation PWB OPWB L PARTS PWB OPERATION LEFT ASS Y SP Upper operation PWB OPWB U OPERATION UPPER PWB ASS Y Front operation PWB OPWB F OPERATION FRONT PWB ASS Y APC PWB APCPWB PD PWB PDPWB Fuser PWB FUPWB Drum PWB DRPWB Developing PWB DEVPWB Interface PWB IFPWB PARTS PWB KUIO PWB ASS Y Fax control PWB FCPWB ol NI AJ WO ND 2 2 2 2K5 2 Switches and sensors o co Og ds co Paper size width switch 1 PWSW1 Paper size width switch 2 PWSW2 MP paper switch MPPSW MP paper size length switch MPPLSW MP paper size width switch MPPWSW Feed switch 1 FSW1 Bep N Machine front ZA Machine inside C Machine rear P Figure 2 2 2 Switches and sensors Main power switch MSW Safety switch 1 SSW1 Safety switch 2 SSW2 Paper switch 1 PSW1 Paper switch 2 PSW2 Lift switch 1 LSW1 Lift sw
201. B rn C mE D XC FB E HEBES T esee 1 A 1 HER 5h FAX SEAR Lees 1 1 Co 1 1 JAE oar rs 1 TAREA rn 1 E FAX operation section label H Approval label Australian New Zealand models only Memory DIMM eem Option J Memory DIMM 128 MB M moire 2 Option J M moire DIMM 128 MB Memoria Opci n J Memoria DIMM 128 MB Option J Speicher DIMM 128 MB Opzioni J Memoria DIMM 128 MB J AFH DIMM 128MB J 2 DIMM 128MB F and G are not bundled When installing the Dual FAX A B C are required Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts F G et H ne sont pas fournis L installation du Dual FAX requiert l installation des pi ces A B C Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies F G y H no se suministran Cuando instale el fax Dual se necesitan A B C Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas B F G und H liegen nicht bei F r die Installation von Dual FAX sind A C erforderlich Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig vo
202. B12 e em s i 4 Figure 2 1 23 Duplex section block diagram 2 1 18 2K5 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex copying Paper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section the eject motor switches from normal rotation to reverse rotation to switch the eject roller to reverse rotation and the paper conveying direction is reversed Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex section via the eject roller and the switchback roller Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex section is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper duplex feed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front side is performed Eject roller Switchback roller Eject roller Eject roller EZ L DL q Upper duplex feed roller
203. DC pulse Image control signal 35 HSYNC BP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 36 VSYNC BP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 37 HSYNC BN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 38 VSYNC BN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 39 HSYNC AP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 40 VSYNC AP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 41 HSYNC AN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 42 VSYNC AN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 43 GND J Ground 44 GND J Ground 2 3 11 2K5 Connector Signal Voltage Description YC35 Connected to the main PWB GND EG_IRN 50 EG_SDIR EG_SBSY 24V_OFF 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC pulse 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC Ground EPWB interrupt signal EPWB serial communication data signal EPWB communication direction signal EPWB busy signal EPWB 24 V down signal Connected to the LSU PDN SGND OUTPEN SAMPLEN VDOP VDON 5VSL 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 0 3 3 V DC 5 V DC Laser sync signal Ground Laser diode output signal Sample hold signal Image data signal Image data signal 5 V DC power output to APCPWB Connected to the eject fan motor 2 3 12 FANSPOW FANSDRN 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to EFM EFM On Off 2K5 2 3 3 Main PWB YC29 YC12 077 3 Figure 2 3 3 Main PWB silk screen diagram
204. E IE ESA 25 E 20 SAIS 26 ERESI BLY YC4 27 E 21 8 He Finite 16 H Fa APERET o 2 111822 15 19 220 7 ut m v me PR LA DARD 24 ETS Y NOAA Z A 25 THEBES S 202 74 OAR A 26 YC4 27 Boe 5 21 FJA 8 CHRO 0760 1 16 15 1 WV TU 5 Det xS Attaching the upper left cover 22 Insert five catches 28 to attach the upper left cover F Fixation du capot sup rieur gauche 22 Ins rez les cinq fermoirs 28 pour fixer le capot sup rieur gauche F Colocaci n de la cubierta superior izquierda 22 Inserte las u as 28 para instalar la cubierta superior izquierda F Anbringen der oberen linken Abdeckung 22 Die f nf Klauen 28 zur Anbringung der oberen linken Abdeckung F einh ngen Montaggio del coperchio superiore sinistro 22 Inserite cinque ganci 28 per fissare il coperchio superiore sinistro F XE Ed 22 09 5 ALE 28 Eni F EELAN OWY tlt 22 5 ENT 28 5 PT Ze EUN LA EWN F ROMS Installing the staple cover 23 Release two latches 29 of the cover 6 removed in step 3 using a flat head screwdriver to remove the lower clip holder 30 24 Attach the lower clip holder 30 to the staple cover C Installation du capot de l agrafeuse 23 Lib rez les deux
205. EC FIL 5 0047 lt gt HEDRA 3 Omm LAP OBE 4 Omm LAP 3mm 4mm y 3mm 4mm Checking the angle of trailing edge Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm V rification de l angle du bord arri re V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max Verificaci n del ngulo del borde inferior Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Uberpriifen des Winkels der Hinterkante Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen Uberschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt Fur Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Fur Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controllo dell angolo del
206. ENSE7 9 9 1 z SCANO 8 8 1 SCAN1 747 1 5 2 ef 6 1 SCAN3 5 5 LED2 4 4 i LED3 313 i 217 i SGND 1L 1 1 I 1 Touch panel cono RIGHT 1 LI LI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MPWB 1 1 1 2 1 CE 1 SGND i 242 SGND i B6 MSB 1 4 Be 15 29 ef 6 SGND 2 5 641 6 1 641 H2VSL ia 7 B2 5V 5 E 5 2 51 5V 8 8 B1 35V 473 4 Relay 3 413 5V 9 9 BO LSB GND 3 4 3 4 4 ND 10 10 SGND GND 2 5 2 5 2 5 GND ipu G5 MSB GND 115 1 6 11 5 ND 12 12 G4 13 13 i 14 i4 SGND AAA AAA III ES A 15115 62 16 16 G1 1717 G LSB 18 18 SGND OPWB U 19 19 R5 MSB 20 20 Ale ES 1 22 22 SGND SCAN 0 8 E SCAN 23 23 R2 SCANS 2 2 7 7 SCANS 24 24 Ri LEDS 8 56 LEDS 25 25 RO LSB LED6 ala 5 5 LEDS 26 26 SGND LED7 5 5 4774 LED 27 27 DE S_LEDO 6 6 LEDO 28 28 SGND 5 7 7 24 2 2929 LR GND 8 5 1L SGND 30 30 UD 31 31 SGND fe ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee 32 32 DCLK 33 33 NC 34 34 SGND 1 OPWB F 35 35 5 1 36 36 35V 37 37 35V YC10 i YC1 38 38 5 SCANS T A10 Ai 5 1 5 5 SCANS 39 39 SGND LEDS 242 19 2 3 nay 2 4214 LEDS 40 40 SGND LED AB LED6 5 alas AT 4 2 4 2 2 SLEDI GND 5 5 AS 1 5 TL SGND 1 Li OPWB M 11
207. Ground 22 GND l Ground 23 D8 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 24 DO 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 25 D9 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 26 D1 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 27 D10 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 28 D2 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 29 D11 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 30 D3 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 31 GND l Ground 32 GND Ground 33 D12 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 34 D4 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 35 D13 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 36 D5 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 37 D14 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 38 D6 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 39 D15 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 40 D7 0 3 3 V DC pulse Data bus signal 41 GND l Ground 42 GND l Ground 43 KUIODREQTO 10 3 3 V DC pulse KUIODREQTO signal 44 KUIODREQT1 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIODREQT1 signal 45 KUIODREQRO 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIODREQRO signal 46 KUIODREQR1 0 3 3 DC pulse KUIODREQR1 signal 47 KUIOIORNO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIOIORNO signal 48 KUIOIORN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIOIORN1 signal 49 KUIOIOWNO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIOIOWNO signal 50 KUIOIOWN1 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIOIOWN 1 signal 2 3 16 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC9 1 KUIOCSNO O 0 3 3 V DC pulse KUIOCSNO
208. H LAA 1 OPPS AV ene eee pa 1 105 9 LAME Arica eensire rx pes 1 val eir RN 1 When installing the document finisher to a full color MFP use parts G H 1 J K and L supplied with the job separator For monochrome machines part M is needed separately Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts Lors de l installation du retoucheur de documents sur une MFP polychrome les pi ces G H 1 J K et L avec le s parateur de travaux sont requises Sur les machines monochromes il faut utiliser la pi ce M s par ment Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Cuando instale el finalizador de documentos en una MFP a todo color ser n necesarias las partes 1 J y L suministradas con el separador de tareas Para las m quinas monocrom ticas es necesario por separado la pieza M Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Wenn der Dokument Finisher auf einem Farbmultifunktionsger t angebracht wird sind die Teile G H I J K und L die mit dem Jobtrenner gelieferten erforderlich F r Monochrommaschinen wird Teil M getrennt ben tigt Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder D mpfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen
209. INAL AREA R Detected original width size R ORIGINAL AREA G Detected original width size G ORIGINAL AREA B Detected original width size B ORIGINAL AREA Detected original width size SIZE SWL Displays the original size sensor OSS ON OFF 2 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting Detection sensor threshold value 1 Select an item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Display Description range setting ORIGINAL R1 3 Original threshold value for color R 0 to 255 40 30 20 ORIGINAL G1 Original threshold value for color G 0 to 255 40 30 20 ORIGINAL B1 3 Original threshold value for color B 0 to 255 40 30 20 LIGHT SOURCE R Light source threshold value for color R 0 to 255 19 LIGHT SOURCE G Light source threshold value for color G 0 to 255 19 LIGHT SOURCE B Light source threshold value for color B 0 to 255 19 WAIT TIME Time from activation of the original detection 0 to 255 185 switch ODSW to original size judgment 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 43 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0100 Setting the main high voltage Description Performs main charging Purpose To check main charging Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated 3 Press the
210. L o aay SERERE 1 REB ROBE 7 ae MIEL AA EIA Y FR ON ICTS 2 ATI EBRIO 74 wx 11 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR JOB SEPARATOR Supplied parts muou gt JOD SED SKA p 1 LED PWB unit nad Tray holder 4 1 Job separator tray 2 1 Left front 4 1 Francais Pi ces fournies gt S parateur de 1 Unit LED PWB E Support de plateau cl Plateau du s parateur de travaux xis Capot avant gauche 1 suministradas moov A Separador de 1 Unidad PWB LED 2 1 Soporte de bandeja zl Bandeja de separador de trabajos 2221 Cubierta delantera izquierda 1 Deutsch red Teile gt 1 LED Platineneinheit zs Fachhalter 221 Job Separator Fach ll Linke 1 di fornitura muou gt Separatore 1 Unit LED PWB ze Supporto vassoio E Vassoio del separatore lavori sii Coperchio frontale
211. LEGAL Double count for FOLIO Legal size or larger Initial setting DOUBLE COUNT A3 LEDGER 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 64 Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters Purpose To be set according to user copy service provider request If a paper jam occurs frequently in the optional document finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection copies are provided without copy counts The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying To prevent this the copy timing should be made earlier If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fuser sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections copying is charged without a copy being made To prevent this the copy timing should be made later Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the copy count timing Display Description FEED When secondary paper feed starts EJECT When the paper is ejected Initial setting EJECT 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U265 Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchas
212. LEY FEED A UPPER PULLEY BYPASS PULLEY SEPARATION PULLEY FEED A PARTS ROLLER MPF FEED A SP PARTS ROLLER MPF FEED B SP PULLEY 15 MPF FEED PARTS ROLLER REGIST LEFT SP ROLLER REGIST RIGHT PULLEY 15 DUPLEX PARTS PULLEY MID FEED ASSY SP PARTS ROLLER VERTICAL FEED A PARTS ROLLER VERTICAL FEED B SPONGE CLEANER REG 2 07220 2 07230 2BJ06010 61706770 2 07230 2 06010 302 094110 302H094120 302H008220 302H094140 302H024020 3HY07120 302H094431 302H094091 302H094101 302H024240 2H094110 2H094120 2H008220 2 094140 2 024020 2 094431 2 094091 2 094101 2 024240 Contact glass Slit glass Mirror 1 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Reflector Exposure lamp Original size sensor CONTACT GLASS CONTACT GLASS ADF MIRROR A MIRROR B REFLECTOR SCANNER PARTS LAMP SCANNER W SP SENSOR ORIGINAL 20912250 2C912280 302K517030 302KK17330 302H017100 302H094130 302H044110 2K517030 2KK17330 2H017100 2H094130 2H044110 Transfer roller unit Separation electrode PARTS TR 670 PLATE STA ELIMINATION 302H093051 2FT17030 2H093051 Developing unit PARTS DV 420 SP 302FT93053 2FT93053 Drum unit PARTS DK 670 302H093012 2H093012 Fuser unit Fuser unit Heat roller Press roller Heat roller separation claw PARTS FK 671 E PARTS FK 670 U PARTS ROLLER HEAT SP PARTS ROLLER PRESS SP SEPARATOR 40301P0028 A4 302K593070 302K593060 302H094160 302H094451 5MVX222XN
213. LIFTSW LOPAPSW LOFECL FEED3CL LOLIFTSW1 2 LOLIFTMREM LODIGO 1 2 LOLENGSW LFEED_SW3 LFEED_SW2 Figure 2 1 2 Cassette paper feed section block diagram EPWB YC8 B15 YC8 B2 YC10 22 YC8 B8 YC8 B5 YC23 B9 YC23 B12 YC8 A13 YC8 A12 YC23 B3 B5 YC23 B7 YC22 6 8 12 YC23 B2 YC23 A2 YC23 A5 YC8 A15 YC8 A5 YC23 A7 A9 YC23 A11 YC22 5 7 11 YC23 A12 YC8 A2 YC8 A7 2K5 2 MP tray paper feed section The MP tray can be hold up to 200 sheets of paper at one time Paper is fed from the MP tray by the rotation of the MP for warding pulley and MP paper feed pulley Also during paper feed the MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter 1 0 3 y gilia eta PATA ee gt 12 8 11 6 5 13 Figure 2 1 3 MP tray paper feed section 1 MP tray 9 MP feed roller 2 2 MP lift plate 10 MP paper switch MPPSW 3 MP forwarding pulley 11 MP feed switch MPFSW 4 MP paper feed pulley 12 MP paper size length switch 5 MP separation pulley MPPLSW 6 MP feed pulley 13 MP paper size width switch 7 MP feed roller 1 MPPWSW 8 MP feed pulley MPFPAPS MPFFECL YC7 9 MPFPAPCL YC22 22 BYPFEEDSW WFSW T C7 1 2 3 MPFSIZE0 1 2 MPFLENGTH
214. Lower right Use two screws 4 removed in step 3 Upper right Use M3 x 6 screw N 25 Fixez le capot de l agrafeuse C l aide de trois vis C t sup rieur inf rieur droit Utilisez les deux vis 4 retir es auparavant lors de l tape 3 C t sup rieur droit Utilisez une vis M3 x 6 N 25 Fije la cubierta de grapas C utilizando tres tornillos Superior inferior derecho Utilice dos tornillos 4 sacados en el paso 3 Superior derecho Utilice el tornillo M3 x 6 N 25 Die Hefterabdeckung C mit drei Schrauben befestigen Oben Unten rechts Die in Schritt 3 entfernten zwei Schrauben 4 benutzen Oben rechts Die M3 x 6 Schraube N benutzen 25 Fissate il coperchio della pinzatrice C utilizzando tre viti Lato superiore inferiore destro utilizzate due viti 4 rimosse nel passo 3 Lato superiore destro utilizzate una vite M3 x 6 N 25 JH 3 E x REV en Em FU 3 2 RZ 4 AEM 1 4322 M3 6 N 25 EXB3RTATINAIS C SAE Do EAR AG PAB PES TALEE 4 2 d Efl EA X 6 N 1 26 Replace the clip holder 3 removed in step 2 27 Close left cover 1 2 and the front cover 1 26 Remettez en place le support pince 3 retir auparavant lors de l tape 2 27 Refermez le capot gauche 1 2 et le capot avant 1 26 Vuelva a colocar el soporte de clip 3 desmontado en el paso 2 27 Cierre la cubierta izquierda 1 2 y la cubi
215. N OFF Automatic toner install function OFF Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 The machine automatically returns to the same status as when the power is turned on Relay board maintenance Description Sets the mode when call for service C0060 occurs Purpose Sets the machine status temporarily when call for service C0060 occurs However after the setting call for service C0060 occurs again when progress of period Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description MODEO Setting mode OFF MODE1 Setting mode ON Usable up to three times of use Initial setting MODEO 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Supplement After removing the cause of the problem be sure to change the setting in OFF 1 3 91 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the deflection generated when the DP is used Purpose Use this mode if an original non feed jam oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step FEED MOT Deflection in the original feed motor 31 to 31 0 0 31 mm REV MOT Deflection in the original switchback 31 to 31 0 0 39 mm motor
216. No Description U233 Limiting job separator output Description Sets a limit of number of output pages from the job separator Purpose Settings may be modified if curled paper is output from the job separator Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the mode Display Description MODEO All sizes 100 sheets MODE1 A3 and Ledger sizes 70 other sizes 100 MODE2 A3 and Ledger sizes 50 other sizes 100 Initial setting MODEO 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on 1 3 58 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built in finisher Description If the machine is equipped with an built in finisher this mode sets whether A5R B5R statement size paper is output to the machine top tray or not Purpose If the machine is equipped with an built in finisher and if paper jams occur due to curling of paper in the built in ejection section when two sided copying onto A5R B5R statement size paper is performed this mode is used to change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine top tray Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Does not eject to the machine top tray OFF Eject to the machine top tray Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance
217. P 09 08 2009 12 00 Firmware version 2K5_2000 000 000 2009 08 09 XXXXXXXX DOOOOOXXX XXXXXXXX LLL ULL UL LLL LLLLLIAO Engine Information 29 NVRAM Version Bb04B29 Bb04B29 Send Information 30 Scanner Version 2K5 1200 001 089 33 Date and Time 09 08 09 31 FAX Slot1 34 Address FAX BOOT Version 5JP_5000 001 001 FAX APL Version 5JP_5100 001 001 FAX IPL Version 5JP_5200 001 001 32 MAC Address 00 C0 EE D0 01 0D 35 1 2 36 100 100 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 F00 U00 0 0 0 30 30 70 70 abcde 1 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 51 12345678 11223344 00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678 01234567890123456789012345678901 0008 00 07 52 XXXXXXXX 53 0000000000 F80C001A37 302A183C00 000100013D 8791BEC305 0000003100 000F5D0000 01FD000000 0000000FB7 0000000000 0000260000 0000000000 0000000000 0000008400 0000000000 011E000F51 0000000FB7 0000000000 0000260000 0000000000 0000 54 ABCDEFGHIJ XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Figure 1 3 3 1 3 13 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U000 1 3 14 Detail of service status page z 9 Description Supplement System version a D System date wo Engine soft version a Engine boot version
218. P Qualora la finitrice di documenti e l MFP non si innestino saldamente osservare la seguente procedura di regolazione dell altezza della finitrice di documenti 14 iH PR a FER EEE AOL Es AER WET A O a 14 B akV SHY UR RATA Fat ARO 7 y FEU AICI SAD SHE FI LARVAL RO TAI VIVO AMAR Adjusting the height of the document finisher 1 Remove two screws 9 and remove the covers 10 from the document finisher A R glage de la hauteur du retoucheur de document 1 D poser les deux vis 9 et les capots 10 du retoucheur de document A Ajuste de altura del finalizador de documentos 1 Quite los dos tornillos 9 y desmonte las cubiertas 10 del finalizador de documentos A Einstellen der Dokument Finisherh he 1 Die beiden Schrauben 9 entfernen und die Abdeckungen 10 vom Dokument Finisher A abnehmen Regolazione dell altezza della finitrice di documenti 1 Rimuovere le due viti 9 e quindi rimuovere i coperchi 10 dalla finitrice di documenti A Val SECRET as HY ea AE 1 J amp F 2 MIRE 9 TEE EIR 10 F a y 1 EX 9 PELAS 74 my YY DAI 10 NU0 3 2 Loosen the two screws 11 on the rear right caster of the document finisher A Adjust the height of the rear right caster by turning its adjustment bolt 14 using a cross headed screwdriver so that the a
219. P separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys MP forwarding 6 n MP forwarding Bush QU pulley retainer Cam Stop ring MP forwarding pulley retainer MP forwarding pulley shaft Figure 1 5 25 30 Refit all the removed parts When refitting the MP unit cover the films on the cover are positioned under the MP paper feed pulley shaft es ee eed 31 When the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or the MP separation pulley is replaced perform maintenance mode U901 a to clear the counter value see page 1 3 84 72 paperfeed pulley shaft Figure 1 5 26 1 5 14 5 N 1 5 3 Optical section 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Follow the procedure below to replace the exposure lamp SN NA X NS SS 5 BETIS E MUNSI A Fun gt MMM Remove the original cover or the DP 2 Remove eleven screws and remove the rear cover 1 Procedure Rear cover Figure 1 5 27 ANI m e 12 Clip holder Front left 4 Remove two screws remove the front left cover 3 Remove the clip holder Figure 1 5 28 1 5 15 2K5 5 Remove two screws and remove the scan ner right cover 6 Remove the contact glass 7 Remove the scanner front cover 8 Remove the screw and remove the scanner rear cover 1 5 16
220. PE SHER ORG 4 EVY272V 4 E74 LIA bo bIHHOTI TIL Baal Deed A 100V 120V HA b F Y FT EERE a7 F ZENTA En Initialize the FAX circuit board 1 Plug the MFP into a power outlet and turn on the main power 2 If the FAX circuit board has been installed only in OPT1 or installed both in OPT1 and OPT2 to initialize all FAX circuit boards Perform the maintenance mode U600 to initialize the fax control assembly Initialiser la carte circuits FAX 1 Brancher le MFP sur une prise d alimentation et le mettre sous tension 2 Si la carte a circuits FAX a t install e dans l OPT1 seulement ou a t install e dans l OPT1 et dans l OPT2 pour initialiser toutes les cartes circuits FAX Ex cuter le mode de maintenance U600 pour initialiser l ensemble de commande de fax Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX 1 Conecte el MFP a un recept culo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal 2 Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se instal solo en OPT1 o se instal tanto en OPT1 como OPT2 para inicializar todas las tarjetas de circuito de FAX Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar el conjunto de control de fax Initialisieren der FAX Leiterplatte 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose stecken und Hauptschalter einschalten
221. Partially lock the operation from the system menu Lock Entirely lock the operation from the system menu Unlock Release the lock of the operation from the system menu Initial setting Unlock 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Panel sheet extension Description Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and the image data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data Purpose Set according to the preference of the user Setting Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory Insert USB memory in USB memory slot of the machine Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select the Install or UnInstall Display Description Install Installs the image data or the message data Uninstall Restores the original image data or message data Select the item Display Description Opening Img Startup screen Call Img Service call image Call Msg Top Service call screen 1 Call Msg Detail Service call screen 2 8 Press the start key Installation or uninstallation is started 9 When normally completed COMPLETE is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 57 2K5 Maintenance item
222. R 4 2 CARIN E RYT S 23 FI 2 COO A Uf Z Y y TAM 3 i8 0 MOIS 24 2 30 73 1 2 BLURRY 0 FACS Adhering the blindfold seal For models with monochrome touch panel only 25 Clean the left front cover with alcohol and then adhere the blindfold seal F Collage de l tiquette de masquage pour les modeles quip s d un cran tactile monochrome seulement 25 Nettoyez le capot avant gauche avec de l alcool puis collez l tiquette de masquage F Pegado del sello ciego S lo modelos con panel de toque monocrom tico 25 Limpie la cubierta delantera izquierda con alcohol y pegue el sello ciego F Anbringen des Blindaufklebers nur f r Modelle mit Monochrom Sensorbildschirm 25 Die linke Frontabdeckung mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Blindaufkleber F anbringen Applicate il sigillo mascherina solo per i modelli con pannello monocromatico a sfioramento 25 Pulite il coperchio frontale sinistro con alcol e poi applicate il sigillo mascherina F Wh CARA EAN 25 ARA JALEA Y JLOBE Y tlt E I y TIT MIBEO 2H 25 7 jv a Viii fie Y F BE UT 2 Checking the operation 1 Connect the power plug of the machine to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on 2 Specify the output tray to the job separator tray from the system menu V rification du fonctionnement 1 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation de la ma
223. Remove the eject spacer Figure 1 2 4 2 Remove four tapes Figure 1 2 5 2K5 Install the optional paper feeder 1 Install the optional paper feeder as neces sary 2 Verify levelness at the four corners of the platen using a level gauge and adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness Release the scanner pins 1 Remove two tapes 2 Remove two scanner pins Release of cassette lift plate 1 Pull cassette 1 and 2 out Remove the lift plate stopper from each cas sette and attach it to the storage location When moving the machine attach the lift plate in original position 1 2 6 gt gt S i i i i i SS SS SS SS SS X Scanner pin Figure 1 2 6 Lift plate stopper Cassette 1 cassette 2 Figure 1 2 7 Load paper 1 Holding the paper width adjusting tab both ends move the paper width guides to fit the paper size 2 Adjust the paper length guide to fit the paper size 3 Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette 4 Gently push cassette 1 and 2 back in Paper width adjusting tab Figure 1 2 10 N 2K5 Install the toner container Open the front cover 2 Hold the toner container vertically and tap the upper part five times or more Turn the toner cont
224. S SEIS HERR 8 ARA 7 MAGA i D ROJAS FAAP BUSS 2 TAUREN AJA SRA 8 EE n CR YER HL CRA 5 DER t BUR o 13 MFP 102 VET DARA 7 SIE LC 5 ER 8 2 ZR E vo T IS IRA 7 X4 Fv v D 2 REO 82 Dis EX La JE lt LAOL 24 BUN BBD MB AAY ATAR INDIANA 14 Slide the document finisher to engage it with the latch catch of the MFP If the document finisher and the MFP do not engage securely perform the following document finisher height adjustment 14 Faire glisser le retoucheur de document pour dans le pontet du loquet du MFP Si le retoucheur de document et le MFP ne s engagent pas correctement effectuer le r glage de hauteur suivant sur le retoucheur de document 14 Deslice el finalizador de documentos hasta que enganche con el cerrojo del MFP Si el finalizador de documentos y el MFP no se acoplan de manera segura realice el siguiente ajuste de la altura del finalizador de documentos 14 Den Dokument Finisher verschieben um ihn mit dem RiegelschloBbausatz des MFP in Eingriff zu bringen Wenn der Dokument Finisher und der MFP nicht richtig ineinander eingreifen f hren Sie die folgende H heneinstellung f r den Dokument Finisher aus 14 Fare scivolare la finitrice di documenti per farla innestare con il dispositivo di arresto dell MF
225. Schritt 13 l sen und die Befestigungsposition der F hrungsschieneneinheit korrigieren Dopo aver completato il montaggio ritornare alle pagine 7 e 8 della procedura di installazione e allentare le quattro viti di serraggio M4 x 6 E nei passi 11 e 12 Quindi allentare le due viti 8 nel passo 13 e regolare l installazione della guida della rotaia HRS 7 8 11 35 JE 11 12 WY 4 4S M4x6 A RET 13 PA 2 C80 FPR ar OSE I TA 0 7 8 HIRO 11 712 0 A M4 X 67234 B4 ARO ENE 13 DEA 8 2 RED 27 Sb LO IN SES 5 7 5 AMAA WANA MAAN Connecting the signal cable 1 Connect the signal cable 18 of the document finisher A to the MFP Connexion du c ble d interconnexion 1 Connecter le c ble d interconnexion 18 du retoucheur de document A au MFP Conexi n del cable de se al 1 Conecte el cable de se al 18 del finalizador de documentos A en el MFP AnschlieBen des Signalkabels 1 Das Signalkabel 18 des Dokument Finishers A an den MFP anschlieBen Connessione del cavo del segnale 1 Collegare il cavo del segnale 18 della finitrice di documenti A all MFP DERA 1 Bei Mas 18 ENL iE fai o BEE 1 L 18 MFP BERE o Operation check 1 Insert the MFP
226. Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento lt Valore di riferimento gt Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm RAVER 1 6 EASEEIFERISZE 2 lt EREE gt 3 Omm 4 LIA HJETA RICARD IEY VOPR 2 EC 1 6 REO KT lt gt Fri 346 3 0mm LAP HEDRA 4 Omm LAA 13 X 100 lt 1 5 Checking the magnification Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value Within 1 5 V rification de l agrandissement V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence 1 5 max Verificaci n del cambio de tama o Verifique la se
227. Setting and then Print of Print Accounting Report Press Yes on the screen to confirm the printing 2K5 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903 To remove paper jammed in the machine open the front cover left cover or pull the cassette out To remove original jammed in the optional DP open the document processor top cover To remove the jammed paper in optional document finisher detach the finisher from the machine Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on Figure 1 4 1 Misfeed in cassette 1 2 Misfeed in cassette 2 3 Misfeed in optional cassette 3 or 4 4 Misfeed in MP tray 5 Misfeed in duplex unit or left cover 1 6 Misfeed in left cover 2 or 7 Misfeed in optional built in finisher 8 Misfeed in optional DP 9 Misfeed in optional document finisher 1 4 1 2K5 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions E ea ee ea eae LA Figure 1 4 2 1 4 2 2K5 Section Description Conditions Specified time System 04 Cover is open during copying Cover open 05 Secondary paper feed does
228. TOR ADJ Magnification in the auxiliary scanning 25 to 25 0 0 05 96 FRONT direction first side MOTOR ADJ Magnification in the auxiliary scanning 25 to 25 0 05 BACK direction second side Adjustment Auxiliary scanning direction 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value ttt Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 12 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U070 0071 0404 1 3 34 1 3 73 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 33 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 9071 1 3 34 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step FRONT HEAD Leading edge registration first side 66 to6
229. UPFECL SLEEPN CE 6 6 SLEEPN 2 A14 A14 24VDUP 24VSL 7 7 gt HRELAY gt Nc 979 1 Rela 15 15 LOFECL PFCL2 connector A16 24VDLO 1 7 TONERCLREM TFCL 27 Relay Ais Y A18 TONERCL 24V TB1 3 A19 9 N C LIVE 250 AC LIVE aro la rini 2 Inlet ae 1 31377 pa Br GND NEUTRAL 250 AC_NEUTRAL 1 RSW 2 2 2 oso 2 RESISTSW 1111 43 9 63 5VSL B4 B4 GND 1 Middle feed Be 3 le 1 J Rela B7 B7 24VSL onec B8 FEEDICL YC6 FAN7DRN 11 1 21 41 perg 324VSL 5 Paper feeder 1 Relan 2 1 5 9 DUPCL i 1 DUPFCL j connector 1 2 Relay LL re B10 24VSL option 1 313 3 connector 3 Bii Bii GND 615 LIVE 1 A DUPPCSW 212 4 2 B12 B12 DUPSW i 1111 5 1 B13 5VSL 12112 COM 1 L i a i i 1 B14 324VSL 1 111 24V2 Conveying RCL 2 AZ PGND 3 B15 RESFECL 1 1 YC35 YC3 1 1 Relay 1 4 B16 B16 FANSREMA EG SCLK rja EG SCLK 1 1 72 eonnector 2 3 B17 B17 24VSL HLD ENG 2 2 2 2 HLD ENG i 1 PCcFM2LLT RE 2 3 connector 2 t B18 B18 EG 51 313 313 EG SI i 2 connector 1 4 1 1 B19 B19 24VSL SLEEP 474 474 SLEEP 24VSL i 1 1 1 GND 5 5 515 GND GND 1 1 1 GND 6 6 6 6 GND 5VSL 1 1 I GND 7 7 717 GND 1 1 VMRED 818 818 VMRED P 1 1 aaa J GND 9 9 9 GND 1 1 VMRED N 10 10 VMRED N 2 1 1 VCLK P 11 11
230. V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC Ground FSW3 On Off 5 V DC power output to FSW3 24 V DC power output to FCL3 FCL3 On Off Ground FSW2 On Off 5 V DC power output to FSW2 Ground LC2SW On Off 24 V DC power output to FCL2 FCL2 On Off PFCL1 On Off 24 V DC power output to PFCL1 PFCL2 On Off 24 V DC power output to PFCL2 TFCL On Off 24 V DC power output to TFCL Not used Ground RSW On Off 5 V DC power output to RSW Ground FSW1 On Off 5 V DC power output to FSW1 24 V DC power output to FCL1 FCL1 On Off DUPFCL On Off 24 V DC power output to DUPFCL Ground DUPPCSW On Off 5 V DC power output to DUPPCSW 24 V DC power output to RCL RCL On Off PCFM1 On Off 24 V DC power output to PCFM1 PCFM2 On Off 24 V DC power output to PCFM2 Connected to the feed shift switch and eject switch GND EXTSWN SEPSWN 5VSL 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 V DC Ground ESW On Off FSSW On Off 5 V DC power output to FSSW ESW 2 3 7 2K5 Connector Signal Voltage Description 10 Connected to the main motor drum motor paper feed motor and drum heater ON DAF ON N PO NM NM N NM NM 9 ca c 02 c c c lc 2 3 JO 0 o NUN 24VIL2 24VIL2 24VIL2 24VIL2 GND GND GND GND MMOTLOCK DMOTLOCK MMOTON DMOTON MMOTCWCCW DMOTCWCCW MMOTCLK DMOTCLK 24VIL2 24VIL2 GND GND SMOTLOCK SMOTON SMOTCWCCW SMOTCLK 24VSL DHEATERREM
231. a a aa aaae aa a anea naksh 2 2 7 5 Other electrical 2 2 8 2 3 Operation of the PWBs 2 3 1 Power source PWDB iecore err iii 2 3 1 2 322 Engitie PB iia bei 2 3 4 2 3 3 MAIN EEA E 2 3 13 2 3 4 5 a 2 3 21 2 3 5 Main operation PWB eere ree reete e 2 3 24 2 4 Appendixes Maintenance parts llSt 2 Berto io treat tee ee o e de tee ote e od e ecd nt de 2 4 1 Maintenance KitS ocio e eee dire Dee e t qot 2 4 2 Periodic maintenance 2 4 3 Chart of image adjustment enne enne 2 4 7 Wiring diagram NO 3 2 aite Het pde i E td ae 2 4 9 Wiring diagram NO 2 2 4 10 Wiring diagrar N Loe AE A A E E EE T 2 4 11 WiringidlagraM NO4 our Her ce ont ede eee aaa 2 4 12 Wiring di gramrNo 5 2 22 reticere aplasia eta 2 4 13 Wiring diagratm No O ds 2 4 14 INSTALLATION GUIDE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR PAPER FEEDER DOCUMENT FINISHER BUILT IN FINISHER JOB SEPARATOR FAX System 2K5 This page is intentionally left blank 2K5 1
232. a di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 3 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 1 5 ED SPA 1 3 2 ARMA o lt gt 4 1 596 EAM BUT AMAU EBIAD AE FL POR 2 BEENA SEC FIL 3 EY GK 32 lt gt 1 5 15 Checking the leading edge timing Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment Reference value Within 2 0 mm V rification de la synchronisation du bord avant V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence 2 0 max Cambio de la sincronizaci n de borde superior Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Dentro de 2 0 mm Uberpriifen des Vorderkanten Timings Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen Uberschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende
233. ack conveying section 78 Document processor cover open 1 3 8 Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U000 Items Description Paper Jam Log 80 81 91 92 93 94 95 96 Finisher timeout jam built in finisher Paper entry sensor nonarrival jam 82 83 Jam in stapler Exit sensor stay jam Finisher cover open document finisher Exit sensor non arrival jam document finisher Reverse sensor jam document finisher Paper entry sensor stay remaining jam document finisher Paper conveying sensor jam document finisher Jam between the built in finisher and machine built in finisher b Detail of paper source Hexadecimal 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 MP tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 paper feeder Cassette 4 paper feeder Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved c Detail of paper size Hexadecimal 01 02 03 04 05 06 86 07 08 Monarch 0C Ledger Business 0D A5 International DL OE A6 26 Full bleed paper International C5 OF B6 12 x 8 Executive 10 Commercial 9 27 8K Letter R 11 Commercial 6 28 16K R Letter E 12 ISO B5 A8 16K E Legal 13 Custom size 32 Statement R 24 A3 wide 25 Ledger wide 1E C4 B2 Statement E 88 09 89 OA OB A4E 1F Postcard 33 Folio B5R 20 Reply paid postcard 34 Western type 2 B5E 21 Oficio 11 35 Western typ
234. age appears Then remove the USB memory Activating Deactivating Application 1 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail Enter the license key and press Official Some applications do not require you to enter an license key If the license key entry screen does not appear go to Step 3 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Deleting Applications 1 Select the application to be deleted and press Delete You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail When the deletion confirmation screen appears press Yes The application is deleted 1 3 104 13 System Settings Restarting the System 1 2 Press Execute of Restart When the confirmation screen appears press Yes The system is restarted Network Setup TCP IP IPv4 Setup 1 RON 11 12 13 Press Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Change of IPv4 Press DHCP Press Off of DHCP and then press OK Press Bonjour Press Off of Bonjour and then press OK Press IP Address and enter the address using the numeric keys Press Subnet Mask and enter the address using the num
235. age control signal 28 VSYNC_DP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 29 HSYNC_DN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 30 VSYNC_DN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 31 HSYNC_CP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 32 VSYNC_CP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 33 HSYNC_CN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 34 VSYNC_CN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 35 HSYNC_BP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 36 VSYNC_BP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 2 3 14 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC3 37 HSYNC_BN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal Connected 38 VSYNC_BN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal main 39 HSYNC AP 10 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 40 VSYNC AP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 41 HSYNC_AN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 42 VSYNC_AN 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 43 GND 47 Ground 44 GND l Ground 45 GND Ground 46 EG_IRN 0 3 3V DC EPWB interrupt signal 47 EG SO 0 3 3 V DC pulse EPWB serial communication data signal 48 EG_SDIR O 0 3 3 V DC EPWB communication direction signal 49 SBSY O 0 3 3V DC EPWB busy signal 50 24V_OFF O 0 3 3V DC EPWB 24 V down signal YC5 1 1 CT 3 3VDC 3 3 V DC power output Connected 2 TD O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data to ether 3 O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Transmission data
236. ainer upside down and tap the upper part five times or more 3 Shake the toner container up and down five times or more Turn the toner container upside down and shake it five times or more 4 Shake the toner container approximately five times in the horizontal direction to stir toner 1 2 8 Figure 1 2 11 us 1 1 container Figure 1 2 12 Toner container Figure 1 2 13 5 Gently push the toner container into the machine along the rails Push the container all the way into the machine until it locks in place Figure 1 2 14 Install the waste toner box 1 2 Close the front cover Install the waste toner box in the machine 9 2K5 Figure 1 2 15 Install the optional original cover or the DP 1 Install the optional original cover or DP Install other optional devices 1 Install the optional devices job separator built in finisher document finisher and or fax kit etc as necessary 2K5 Connect the power cord Connect the power cord to the connector on the machine Insert the power plug into the wall outlet Na Installing toner Turn the main power switch on Toner installation is started 2
237. aintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse MP feed switch registration switch 10 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in paper feed section Jam code 21 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item 0031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 Broken PF feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective PF feed switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 8 on the PF main PWB check if YC2 7 on the PF main PWB remains low when the PF feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the PF feed switch Check if the clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U032 and select following clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary paper feed clutch 1 2 Electrical problem with clutch Check see page 1 4 42 Check if PF paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with PF paper feed clutch 1 Check
238. aintenance item U935 to contact the Service Administrative Division Abnormal detection of fax control PWB incompatibility In the initial communication with the fax control PWB any normal communication command is not transmitted Defective fax soft ware Install the fax software Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Backup memory EEPROM device problem Main PWB Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division MAC address data error For data in which the MAC address is invalid Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Backup memory EEPROM device problem Engine PWB Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory EEPROM data problem Engine PWB Reading data from EEPROM is abnor mal Read and write data does not match 5 times continuously Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Copy counts problem A checksum error is detected in the main and engine backup memories for the copy counters Data damage of EEPROM
239. ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 2 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 3 0 mm Uberpriifen der Mittellinie Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen Uberschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt Fur Simplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm Fur Duplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Controllo della linea centrale Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione lt Valore di riferimento gt Per copia simplex Entro 2 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 3 0 mm MU Hee DI 1 2 DA TT Vil A o lt ERMETE HME 2 Omm AA 3 Omm EV A 74 ii DEVIF74 7 1 7 SAGAS 2 2 3 XVI ERO 7 5 lt gt KEDRA 2 LAP MORA 3 LAP 18 Adjusting the DP center line 1 Enter the maintenance mode and run the maintenance item U072 to adjust Select FRONT to adjust both the simplex and duplex copying at once Use BACK only if you need to adjust the second side of duplex copying individually R glage de la ligne m diane du DP 1 Passez en mode de maintenance et
240. alue raises the detection sensitivity but increases the possibility of false detection A larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection 2 Press the start key The value is set Maintenance item No Description 2K5 1 U485 Setting PDF Rotate 1 Change the setting value using or numeric keys Display Description 0 Assigns the image rotation with the internal parameter 1 Assigns the image rotation with the actual image Initial setting O 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the enterprise mode Description Sets whether or not the application function is enabled Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select MODE1 3 Select the item Display Description ON Application function is enabled OFF Application function is disabled INSTALL Executing the install UNINSTALL Executing the uninstall 4 Press the start key The setting is set Method INSTALL Insert the USB memory that contains the application into the USB memory slot on the machine Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select INSTALL Press the start key Installation of application is started When normally completed Compl
241. and pull the shaft 13 out 2 Insert the shaft 13 into the holes 14 and refit two stop rings 12 Pour r gler langle d ouverture fermeture du DP 30 degr s 1 Retirez deux bagues d arr t 12 et tirez l arbre 13 vers l ext rieur 2 Ins rez l arbre 13 dans les orifices 14 et remettez les deux bagues d arr t 12 en place Para ajustar el ngulo de apertura cierre del DP a 30 grados 1 Desmonte los dos aros de tope 12 y tire del eje 13 hacia fuera 2 Inserte el eje 13 en los orificios 14 y vuelva a colocar los dos aros de tope 12 Einstellung des DP Offnungs SchlieBungswinkels auf 30 Grad 1 Die zwei Sicherungsringe 12 entfernen und die Achse 13 herausziehen 2 Die Achse 13 in die L cher 14 einf hren und die zwei Sicherungsringe 12 wieder anbringen Per regolare l angolo di apertura e chiusura del DP a 30 gradi 1 Rimuovere i due anelli di arresto 12 ed estrarre l albero 13 2 Inserire l albero 13 nei fori 14 e fissare nuovamente i due anelli di arresto 12 34 DP RIA ARABIA 30 R 1 J amp F 2 12 BOR A 13 2 13 14 2562 MESIR 12 SCRAP RE o DP ES 30 CHET SEA 1 PUY 12 2 eS LH 13 5 amp lt 2 Hh 13 EX 14 IHAL A RYU AY 12 2 114726 0 MYO HITS 3 MA 3 Insert the angle adjusting plate and fit it using M4 x 14 screw E 3 Ins rez
242. are Install the fax software Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Faults of RTC The time is judged to go back based on the comparison of the RTC time and the current time or five years or more have passed Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation The battery is dis connected from the main PWB Check visually and remedy if necessary Fax control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer problem High capacity data transfer between the fax control PWB and the scanner MIP PWB was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried 10 times Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the interface PWB and the connector on the fax control PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 21 2K5 Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Fax file system error The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PWB Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Lift motor 1 error After cassette 1 is inserted lift switch 1 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected four times successiv
243. are il separatore lavori A utilizzando due perni Lato frontale utilizzare il perno grande G Lato posteriore utilizzare il perno piccolo H AEE BB 9 ALAS EBLE TSA ELA II ZU TE 10 FA 2 PRAE ze AENEA BS AS A ARE VaPeNL FZORY tlt 9 Va ZENU 8 A e BERI UBI DHA UL ZITAT EPS 10 Ya 7EXL 2 EU gt 2ACHETFODO AM Ek E H 11 Connect the connector 17 at the rear of the job separator to YC4 18 on the engine PWB 12 Loosen the screw 19 to make the drive unit of the job separator ready for starting to drive 13 Tighten the screw 19 14 Refit the cover 16 using the screw 15 removed in step 8 11 Branchez le connecteur 17 situ l arri re du s parateur de travaux YC4 18 sur le PWB du moteur 12 Desserrez la vis 19 pour que l unit d entrainement du s parateur de travaux soit pr te d marrer 13 Resserrez la vis 19 14 Remettez le capot 16 en place en utilisant la vis 15 retir e auparavant lors de l tape 8 11 Conecte el conector 17 en el lado trasero del separador de trabajos a YC4 18 en el PWB de motor 12 Afloje el tornillo 19 para que la unidad de accionamiento del separador de trabajos est lista para accionar 13 Apriete el tornillo 19 14 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta 16 utilizando el
244. arker to adjust density 4 Press OK Print Density 1 Press Change of Print Density 2 Press 1 5 Lighter Darker to adjust density 3 Press OK Drum Refresh 1 Press Next of Drum Refresh 1 or Drum Refresh 2 2 Press Execute to Drum Refresh 3 After Drum Refresh is completed press OK to return to the Adjustment Maintenance screen Auto Drum Refresh 1 Press cursor down key and Change of Auto Drum Refresh 2 Press Off Standard or Long 3 Press OK Correcting Fine Black Lines 1 Press Change of Correcting Black Line 2 Press Off On Low or On High 3 Press OK Display Brightness 1 Press Change of Display Brightness 2 Press 1 4 Darker Lighter to adjust brightness 3 Press OK Silent Mode 1 Press Change of Silent Mode 2 Press Off or On 3 Press OK Auto Color Correction 1 Press cursor down key and Change of Auto Color Correction 2 Press one of keys 1 to 5 Color B amp W to set the detection level 3 Press OK 2K5 Gray Adjustment 1 Press cursor down key and then Next of Gray Adjustment 2 Press Execute A color pattern is printed 3 As shown in the illustration place the printed side down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned to the top 4 Press Execute The color pattern is read and adjustment begins 5 Press OK in the adjustment end confirmation screen System Initializat
245. ars the jam counts Total Count Displays the total jam counts Method Count 1 Select Count The count of jam code by type is displayed Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the counts for all jam codes and press ALL CLEAR The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The count is cleared Method Total Count 1 Select Total Count The total number of jam code by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of jam count cannot be cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U904 Checking clearing the service call counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types Purpose To check the service call code status by types Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing con sumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Display Description Count Displays clears the call for service counts Total Count Displays the total call for service counts Method Count 1 Select Count The count for service call detection by type is displayed Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up do
246. asing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Printer leading edge margin 3 0 2 5 mm Printer gt lt Printer left margin right margin 2 0 2 0 1 5mm 2 0 2 0 1 5 mm Printer trailing edge margin 3 0 2 5 mm Figure 1 3 17 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode 403 U404 P 1 3 72 P 1 3 73 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 71 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U403 1 3 72 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step A MARGIN Scanner left margin 0to10 0 2 0 0 5mm B MARGIN Scanner leading edge margin 10 0 2 0 0 5mm C MARGIN Scanner right margin 0to10 0 2 0 0 5mm D MARGIN Scanner trailing edge margin 0to10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Display Description Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the k
247. ass word Enter the login password and press OK Press Confirm Password 9 Enter the same login password to confirm and press OK 10 Press OK 11 Press Change of Access Level 12 Select the user access privilege and press OK 13 Press Change of Account Name 14 Select the account and press OK 15 Press Register to add a new user on the local user list o RO Changing User Properties 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of User Login Setting and Register Edit of Local User List Select the user whose properties you wish to change The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing user information 1 Press Detail 2 Refer to steps 3 to 14 of Adding a User to change a user property 3 Press Register 4 Press Yes in the registration confirmation screen The user information is changed Deleting a user 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confirm deletion The selected user will be deleted Unknown login user name Job 1 om If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Change of Unknown ID Job Press Reject or Permit Press OK Group Authorization 1 If user login administration
248. assette 2 5 mm MP tray 2 5 mm Duplex 2 5 mm Cassette 1 5 mm or less MP tray 1 5 mm or less Duplex 2 0 mm or less Cassette 2 0 mm MP tray 2 0 mm Duplex 3 0 mm 2 4 8 Wiring diagram No 1 2K5 ASA A SS 1 1 MP unit YC20 SVSL 1 A TXD 2 GND 1 Re
249. below explains the items to be entered The Folder FTP Address 1 Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the informa tion for each item and press OK The Folder SMB Address 1 Press Change of Host Name Path Login User Name and Login Password enter the informa tion for each item and press OK 8 Check if the destination entry is correct and press Register The destination is added to the Address Book oak m Adding a Group 1 Press Register Edit of Address Book Group and then Next 2 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number 3 Use or the numeric keys to enter an address number 1 to 2500 To have the number assigned automatically set 0000 4 Press OK The Add Group screen reappears 5 Press Change of Name 6 Enterthe group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters 7 Press Member 8 Press Add 9 Select a destination contacts to add to the group 10 Press OK If you have more destinations to add repeat Steps 8 to 10 11 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press Register Now the group is added to the Address Book Editing a Destination 1 Press Register Edit of Address Book 2 Select a destination or group to edit 3 Press Detail The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Editing an Individual Destination 1 Change A
250. bited letters are used to shared name lt gt Error Pathname or File Name Domain name is not enter Enter the user name with the form of either Domain User Domain User or Domain User Connect to the folder which is not permitted for reference writing Enter correct user name password Check the access limit of destination folder Assign disable folder path Enter correct folder path Error Not support protocol SMB Protocol is set to OFF Check ON in the Scanner SMB screen in COMMAND CENTER Error Can not connect Enter the disable host name IP address Enter the correct host name or IP address Assign the wrong port num ber Enter the correct port number Network is not connected Check if the server is operating properly Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc Error Response wait with timeout The server is unable to com municate Check if the server is operating properly Error Network transfer Error occurs on the network Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc Error Response wait with timeout Response is not returned from the server above speci fied time Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc Error Page max count over 1 4 48 The number of pages of a send file exceeded 999 pages Set the
251. bzunehmen Togliete la vite 15 dal lato posteriore della macchina per rimuovere il coperchio 16 1 AIR 15 6 FC US RID EA 15 1 REAL 07 16 210 3 Installing the job separator 9 Insert the job separator A from the machine front and slide it to the left 10 Fix the job separator A using two pins Front Use the large pin G Rear Use the small pin H Installation du s parateur de travaux 9 Ins rez le s parateur de travaux A depuis l avant de la machine et faites le glisser vers la gauche 10 Fixez le s parateur de travaux A l aide de deux goupilles Avant Utilisez la grande goupille G Arri re Utilisez la petite goupille H Instalaci n del separador de trabajos 9 Inserte el separador de trabajos A en el frente de la m quina y desl celo a la izquierda 10 Fije el separador de trabajo A utilizando dos pasadores Frente Utilice el pasador grande G Atr s Utilice el pasador peque o H Installieren des Job Separators 9 Den Job Separator A von der Vorderseite der Maschine einf hren und nach links schieben 10 Den Job Separator A mit zwei Stiften befestigen Vorn Den gro en Stift verwenden Hinten Den kleinen Stift H verwenden Installazione del separatore lavori 9 Inserire il separatore lavori A dal lato frontale della macchina e farlo scorrere a sinistra 10 Fiss
252. c on tion 1 72 DP timing switch DPTSW turns off within the specified 1145 pulses An original jam in the time of period of the original conveying motor OCM original conveying sec turning on tion 2 73 DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn off within speci 9900 pulses 1 4 6 An original jam in the original switchback section fied time of the original switchback motor OSBM turning on 74 An original jam in the original switchback feed section DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn on within speci fied time of the original switchback motor OSBM turning on 10700 pulses 75 An original jam in the original switchback conveying section The original switchback switch OSBSW does not turn on within specified time of the DP timing switch DPTSW turning off 1724 pulses 78 Document processor cover open The document processor or document processor top cover is opened during original feeding DP timing switch DPTSW or original switchback switch OSBSW turns on when starting the original paper feed Section Description Conditions 2K5 1 Specified time Optional finisher 80 Finisher timeout jam built in finisher Document finisher Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the doc ument finisher within specified time of the paper entry sensor PES turning on 15s Built in finisher Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the
253. cable el ctrico del tomacorriente de la pared VorsichtsmaBnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Schalten Sie unbedingt den Betriebsschalter der Maschine aus und trennen Sie das Netzkabel von der Netzsteckdose bevor Sie den Finisher installieren Precauzioni Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite Prima di installare il finitore assicurarsi di spegnere l interruttore principale di alimentazione della macchina e scollegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a muro della rete elettrica WR B ZIRE ALGO WL AS LE EIK HI RUSSE Jes FEAT E Mo BSH ACES TREATY CW 9S 9 QVZquI e9vee o3 03 ERA YPF 07 7 ZEI VCD AJ Important When placing the paper conveying unit A on the floor or the like be sure to place it upside down because the staple mounting plate may be deformed Important Lorsque vous placez l unit de transport du papier A sur le sol ou sur une surface quivalente veillez la placer sens dessus dessous car la plaque de montage d agrafes risque d tre d form e Importante Cuando coloca la unidad de transporte de papel A en el piso o similar aseg rese de colocarlo invertido porque la placa de mon
254. chine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension 2 D finissez le bac de sortie sur le plateau du s parateur de travaux dans le menu syst me Verificaci n del funcionamiento 1 Conecte el enchufe el ctrico de la m quina en un tomacorriente de la pared y conecte el interruptor principal 2 Especifique como bandeja de salida a la bandeja del separador de trabajos en el men del sistema Uberpr fen des Betriebs 1 Den Netzstecker der Maschine in die Steckdose stecken und den Betriebsschalter einschalten 2 Das Job Separator Fach ber das Systemmen als Ausgabefach angeben Verifica di funzionamento 1 Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione della macchina alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e accendere l interruttore principale di alimentazione 2 Specificare il vassoio di uscita al vassoio del separatore lavori mediante il menu sistema TERT ERBTA 1 Do e Haat dif AN di Se rp FT PE 2 BYE HERE i BAKO EIRT F pZ FERRI y FE NITA 2 DAFA SOPA L 2 5 QTABauC Ed LAM Make a proof copy to check that a copy is ejected to the job separator tray Effectuez une copie de test pour v rifier si une copie est bien ject e sur le plateau du s parateur de travaux Haga una copia de prueba para verificar que la copia sale a la bandeja del separador de trabajos
255. chromatic aberration filter MTF Automatic adjustment using the platen for MTF filter GAMMA Automatic adjustment using the platen for input gamma MATRIX Automatic adjustment using the platen for matrix 4 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed Complete is displayed If a problem occurs dur ing auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items Method DP FACE UP 1 Measure the leading edge main scanning and auxiliary scanning of the specified original P N 302AC68243 and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 302AC68243 in the DP Cut the trailing edge of the original mm Figure 1 3 22 2K5 Maintenance item No U411 3 Press INPUT Display Description Description INPUT Automatic adjustment of first page using the DP for original size mag nification leading edge timing center line 4 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed Complete is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Sh
256. ckung 7 abzunehmen Rimuovere la vite 6 dal retro dell unit di alimentazione della carta per togliere il coperchio 7 ARIA 1 MRH 0 A Fi de OIT A AHF EMO EA 6 1 2001 7 2800 95 Remove the 8 to remove the metal plate 9 The removed metal plate 9 is no longer required Retirer la vis 8 pour d poser la plaque m tallique 9 La plaque m tallique d pos e 9 n est plus n cessaire Quite el tornillo 8 para desmontar la placa de metal 9 La placa de metal desmontada 9 ya no es necesaria Die Schraube 8 herausdrehen um die Metallplatte 9 abzunehmen Die abgenommene Metallplatte 9 wird nicht mehr ben tigt Rimuovere la vite 8 per togliere la piastra di metallo 9 La piastra di metallo 9 rimossa non piu necessaria 1 MERZ 8 PE FENE 9 SBE AIEEE 9 BIRENAL AR 9 61480957 ER 9 IX V RE 72 VN Connect the connector 10 to the machine Brancher le connecteur 10 la machine Conecte el conector 10 en la m quina Den Steckverbinder 10 an die Maschine anschlie en Collegare il connettore 10 alla macchina 10 IZZA 10 ZRAKE BEET Do 10 Attach the joint plate C using two screws Right Use the screw 8 removed in step 8 Left Use M3 x 6 screw D 10 Fixer la plaque de
257. connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC12 2 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB 2 No image appears entirely black Copy example Causes Check if developing bias is output when CN1 11 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item 0101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Check procedures corrective measures No main charging Broken main charger wire Replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 33 Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC12 5 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U100 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if main charging takes place when CN1 8 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Exposure lamp fails to light Poor contact in the expo sure lamp connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace
258. ct in the Check the connection of connector YC7 and A communication error is detected connector termi YC8 on the scanner PWB and the connector nals of the DP and the continuity across the con nector terminals Repair or replace if neces sary Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for PWB correct operation C9060 DP EEPROM error optional DP Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for Read and write data does not match PWB correct operation Datan the specified area of the backup Device damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division memory does not match the specified EEPROM values C9500 Contact the Service Administrative Division C9510 Contact the Service Administrative Division C9520 Contact the Service Administrative Division F000 Operation panel PWB communication Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor error PWB rect operation Defective opera Replace the operation panel PWB and tion panel PWB check for correct operation F040 Engine PWB communication error Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation F041 Scanner PWB communication error Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation Defective scanner Replace the scanner PWB and check for PWB correct operation F050 Engine ROM checksum error Defective engine Replace the
259. ctor Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective trailing edge registration home position sen sor Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2K5 Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Stapler problem optional document finisher Jam 82 is indicated The stapler con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The stapler is blocked with a sta ple Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the sta pler The stapler is bro ken Replace the stapler and check for correct operation Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Finisher stapler problem optional built in finisher The stapler home position sensor does not change state from nondetection to detection within 200 ms of the start of stapler motor counterclockwise forward rotation During initialization the stapler home position sensor does not change state from non detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of stapler motor clockwise reverse rotation The stapler con nector makes poor contact R
260. curl eliminator M using the two screws 2 removed in step 2 3 Fixer l l ment d limination des boucles M au couvercle d jection 1 de telle facon que les projections 4 du couvercle s ins rent dans les deux extr mit s de cet l ment M 4 Fixer l l ment d limination des boucles M l aide des deux vis 2 retir es l tape 2 3 Coloque el eliminador de enrollamiento M en la cubierta de expulsi n 1 de modo que las proyecciones 4 de la cubierta encajen en los dos extremos del eliminador de enrollamiento M 4 Asegure el eliminador de enrollamiento M usando los dos tornillos 2 que quit en el paso 2 3 Bringen Sie den Wellenverhinderer M so an die Auswurfabdeckung 1 an daB die Vorspr nge 4 auf der Abdeckung in die zwei Enden des Wellenverhinderers M passen 4 Befestigen Sie den Wellenverhinderer M mittels der in Schritt 2 entfernten zwei Schrauben 2 3 Inserire l eliminatore degli accartocciamenti M nella copertura dell uscita carta 1 in modo tale che le proiezioni 4 sulla copertura siano inserite nelle due estremit dell eliminatore degli accartocciamenti M 4 Fissare l eliminatore degli accartocciamenti M utilizzando le due viti 2 rimosse al punto 2 3 1 e HJE 07 8 AE AR 1 HC RE 4 CN DTE ARE 4 2 MET
261. d Leiterplatte mit den in 4 Die beiden Schrauben 4 herausdrehen und Abdeckung OPT1 5 abnehmen Rimuovere il coperchio 4 Rimuovere le due viti 4 quindi rimuovere il coperchio OPT1 5 JE AR 4 He F 2 BRE 4 F OPTI A 5 DN ORY HL 4 CA 92 REAL OPTI DH 5 EM DAF Schritt 4 ausgebauten Schrauben 4 befestigen Ber hren Sie die Anschl sse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten Die FAX Leiterplatte A so in die Nut einsetzen dass der Aufkleber 6 wie abgebildet zur Leiterplatte zeigt Montaggio della scheda a circuiti FAX 5 Inserire la scheda circuiti FAX A lungo l incavo nell OPT1 e fissare la scheda con le due viti 4 rimosse nell operazione 4 Non toccare direttamente il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX A Per inserire il circuito FAX A tenere l estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX o la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX Orientare l etichetta 6 sulla scheda a circuiti FAX A come indicato nell illustrazione e inserire la scheda lungo l incavo RIRE ERIR AE OPTI TEL HR A 4 T RRE 4 ER UE E A mT o FENER ASC PS AAT ER S ect TZE B TS IRE ERIR A HA o KARE ERI A EME 6 fs NST 8
262. d modular connector cable B Pour les mod les 100 V 120 V Australie ou Chine utilisez le cable connecteur modulaire B fourni Para los modelos de 100 V 120 V Australiano o Chino utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B f r die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden Per modelli da 100 V 120 V Australia o Cina utilizzare il cavo connettore modulare B in dotazione gt FF 100 v 120 V CARNE SUP ER TE TE RP CBD o 100V 120V FA gt TEER EOXZaa FE B BER NE CE ve E NS ID os os lt lt lt Connect the MFP to the separate phone except for New Zealand model 7 Plug the modular connector cable 8 into the telephone terminal and then connect the other end to the separate phone Connecter le MFP au t l phone s par 7 Brancher le cable du connecteur modulaire 8 la borne du t l phone puis connecter l autre extr mit au t l phone s par Conecte el MFP al tel fono separado 7 Enchufe el cable del conector modular 8 en el terminal del tel fono y a continuaci n conecte el otro extremo al tel fono separado Anschlie en des MFP an das separate Telefon 7 Das Telefonmodulkabel 8 in die Telefonbuchse einstecken und das andere Ende an das separate Telefon anschli
263. d pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary The feedshift solenoid malfunctions See page 1 4 42 Check if the duplex feed pulley upper duplex feed roller or lower duplex feed roller is deformed Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed 7 Toner drops on the paper conveying path Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty Clean the developing unit 8 Abnormal noise is heard Check if the pulleys rollers and gears operate smoothly Grease the bearings and gears Check if the following clutches are installed correctly paper feed clutches 1 2 feed clutches 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch Correct 1 4 47 2K5 1 4 6 Send error code 1 Scan to SMB error codes Display Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Error User Password or Shared Name Folder Name Domain name is not entered Enter the user name with the form of either Domain User Domain User or Domain gUser Assign disable user pass word Enter the correct user name password Assign the user who is not allowed to access to folder Enter correct user name password Check the access limit of destination folder Assign disable shared name Enter the correct shared name Check if the prohibited letters below are used to shared name amp T Host name error Check if the prohi
264. ddress Number Name and destination type and address 2 After you have completed the changes press Register 3 Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination Editing a Group 1 Change Address Number and Name 2 Press Member 3 To delete any destination from the group select the destination and press Delete Press Yes on the screen to confirm the dele tion 4 After you have completed the changes press Register 5 Press Yes in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group Deleting an Individual Destination or Group 1 Press Delete Press Yes on the screen to con firm the deletion Deletion is performed Adding a Destination on One Touch Key 1 Press Register Edit of One touch Key 2 Selecta One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direct entry of a One Touch Key num ber Select a One Touch Key with no registered destina tion 3 Press Register Edit The address book appears 4 Select a destination individual or group to add to the One Touch Key number Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected des tination 5 Press OK The destination will be added to the One Touch Key Editing One Touch Key 1 Press Register Edit of One Touch Key 2 Selecta One Touch Key number 0001 to 1000 for the destination Pressing Quick No Search key or No enables direc
265. de deux crans sur l chelle de la glissi re D puis resserrer les deux vis 8 Remarque Si la glissi re D n est pas ajust e proprement elle ne va pas se d placer et le retoucheur de document risque de tomber 13 Afloje temporalmente los dos tornillos 8 que aseguran la hoja de metal 7 de la placa de montaje de carril en el MFP levante la hoja de metal 7 con dos divisiones de la escala del carril de gu a D y apriete los dos tornillos 8 Nota Si no se ajusta correctamente el carril gu a D ste no se mover y puede provocar que el finalizador de documentos se caiga 13 Die zwei Schrauben 8 die das Blech 7 der Schienenmontageplatte C am MFP sichern vor bergehend l sen das Blech 7 um zwei Teilstriche der Skala von der F hrungsschiene D aus anheben und die zwei Schrauben 8 wieder anziehen Hinweis Falls die F hrungsschieneneinheit D nicht ordnungsgem f eingestellt ist kann sie sich nicht bewegen und k nnte dazu f hren dass der Dokument Finisher umfallt 13 Allentare temporaneamente le due viti 8 che fissano il foglio metallico 7 della piastra di montaggio della rotaia C dell MFP sollevare il foglio di metallo 7 di due posizioni sulla guida della rotaia D e serrare le due viti 8 Nota Se la guida della rotaia D non regolata correttamente essa non si muover e potr causare la caduta della finitrice di documenti 13 ASH EEE MILE C fO SR 7 ERG P
266. den Motor ber hren k nnen Fare passare i cavi 12 attraverso il morsetto 11 Assicurarsi di fare passare i cavi 12 attraverso il morsetto 11 perch potrebbero toccare il motore 12 FERH 11 Ss ERE 12 HURT 01 12 MARDI ZFT 11 ics 12 2383 ER 12 b E A Iz ft 20115250 TIBIA TT MIER 2 STC o fe 12 Refit the cover 7 using the screw 6 removed in step 7 12 Remettre le couvercle 7 en place l aide de la vis 6 retir e auparavant l tape 7 12 Vuelva a colocar la tapa 7 utilizando el tornillo 6 quitado en el paso 7 12 Bringen Sie die Abdeckung 7 wieder mit der in Schritt 7 entfernten Schraube 6 an 12 Inserire il pannello posteriore 7 usando le viti 6 rimosse al punto 7 12 1 RA 6 Yrs 7 3 BRINE FIT TLEER 6 1 KTH 7 004195 Adjusting the height 13 Turn four adjusters 13 until they reach the floor and then adjust them so that the machine becomes level R glage de la hauteur 13 Tourner les quatre pieds r glables 13 jusqu ce qu ils atteignent le sol puis les ajuster de mani re que la machine soit bien horizontale Ajuste de la altura 13 Gire los cuatro ajustadores 13 hasta que lleguen al piso y aj stelos hasta que la m quina quede horizontal Einstellen der H he 13 Die vier Einstellf Re 13 drehe
267. developer excessively Protect the eyes If toner or developer is acciden tally ingested drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi ately If it gets into the eyes rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical Cie EEEE A Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier s instruction haridbook 1 e a a Lig de Pee deed ied O 2 Precautions for Maintenance WARNING Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related biochllfes eco tn dd Under circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms andprotective cI Cuits e td aad Always use parts having the correct specifications O Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related bro chure when replacing them Using a piece of wire for example could lead to fire or other serious Q AE EA T E De When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part always use the correct scale and measure carefully Q
268. developing counter Method 1 Press the start key Past record of 5 cases is displayed Display Description MACHINE No Historical records of the machine number HISTORY1 to 5 DEVELOP COUNT Historical records of developing counter HISTORY1 to 5 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed HDD scandisk Description Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged Use this mode to restore the data Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE 3 Press the start key When scanning of the disk is complete the execution result is displayed 4 Turn the main power switch off and on 1 3 94 Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method 1 Press the start key Display Description COPY SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for copying FAX SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for fax OTHER SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count except for copying Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance No item is displayed 2K5 1 3 2 Management mode In addition to a maintenance function for service the machine is equipped with a management function which can be oper ated
269. e Figure 2 1 9 Laser scanner section lens 8 PD sensor mirror 9 Cylindrical correcting lens 10 PD PWB PDPWB 1 APC PWB APCPWB 2 Laser diode 3 Cylindrical lens 4 Polygon motor PM 5 Polygon mirror 6 fO lens 2 1 7 2K5 2 1 8 Laser scanner unit LSU PDN PLGDRN PLGRDYN gt Polygon PLGCLKN mirror PS oe a X p 27 A A 1 Laser diode APCPWB T OUTPEN SAMPLEN VDOP VDON Figure 2 1 10 Laser scanner section block diagram YC36 1 YC2 3 YC2 4 YC2 5 EPWB YC36 3 YC36 4 YC36 5 YC36 6 2K5 2 1 4 Developing section The developing unit consists of the developing sleeve where a magnetic brush is formed the magnetic toner blade and the developing spirals that agitate the toner When the toner sensor TNS detects a low toner level in the developing unit the toner replenishment signal is output to the engine PWB EPWB The engine PWB EPWB that has received the signal turns on the toner feed motor TFM and replenishes toner from the toner container to the developing unit 2 u Figure 2 1 11 Developing section 1 Drum 2 Developing sleeve 3 Magnetic toner blade 4 Left developing spiral 5 Right developing spiral 6 Developing housing Toner sensor TNS 2 1 9 2K5 TONERCLREM TNMOTREM HVPWB Develop
270. e EPWB clock signal Connected 2 HLD_ENG 0 3 3 V DC EPWB hold signal main 3 EG_SI 0 3 3 V DC pulse EPWB serial communication data signal 4 SLEEPG 0 3 3 V DC Sleep signal On Off 5 GND J Ground 6 GND Ground 7 GND J Ground 8 VMRED_P l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 9 GND Ground 10 VMRED_N l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 11 VCLK_P 0 3 3 V DC pulse MPWB clock signal 12 VD_DO_P 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 13 VCLK_N 0 3 3 V DC pulse MPWB clock signal 14 VD DO N 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 15 GND J Ground 16 VD_D1_P l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 17 GND J Ground 18 VD_D1_N l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 19 GND Ground 20 VD_D2_P l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 21 GND J Ground 22 VD_D2_N 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 23 GND 47 Ground 24 VD_D3_P 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 25 GND J Ground 26 VD_D3_N l 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 27 HSYNC_DP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 28 VSYNC_DP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 29 HSYNC_DN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 30 VSYNC_DN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 31 HSYNC CP O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 32 VSYNC CP 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 33 HSYNC CN O 0 3 3 V DC pulse Image control signal 34 VSYNC CN O 0 3 3 V
271. e pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right the top LED in that line will light 4 When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U221 Setting the USB host lock function Description Specifies ON OFF the USB host lock function Setting this to ON causes the machine to be unable to recog nize the device connected to the USB host Purpose Set according to the preference of the user Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description USB HOST LOCK USB host lock function ON OFF setting Setting 1 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON USB host lock function ON OFF USB host lock function OFF Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on U222 Setting the IC card type 1 3 56 Description Sets the IC card type This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary Maintenance item No Description 2K5 U223 Operation panel lock Description Sets the operation panel lock function to ON or OFF Purpose To restrict operation in the system menu on the operation panel Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description Partial Lock
272. e 4 A3 22 Special 1 B4 23 Special 2 Detail of paper type Hexadecimal Plain DA Color Transparency Preprinted Labels 0D Cardstock Bond OE Coated Recycled Vellum Rough 11 High quality Letterhead Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8 OB Prepunched OC Envelope OF 2nd side 10 Media 16 1 3 9 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U000 1 3 10 Items Description Paper Jam Log e Detail of paper exit location Hexadecimal 01 Face down FD 02 Face up FU Document finisher face up FU 3000 sheet document finisher left sub tray FU 03 Document finisher face down FD 04 to 48 Reserved Service Call Log Count Service Code Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of self diag nostics error If the occurrence of the previ ous diagnostics error is less than 8 all of the diagnostics errors are logged The total page count at the time of the self diagnostics error Self diagnostic error code See page 1 4 20 Example 01 6000 01 Self diagnostic error 6000 Self diagnostic error code number Maintenance Log Count Item Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of replace ment If the occurrence of the previous replace ment of toner container is less than 8 all of the occurrences of replace ment are logged The total page count at
273. e ajuste 14 en la direcci n de las manecillas del reloj se levanta el finalizador de documentos A y al girar contra las manecillas del reloj baja el finalizador de documentos A 2 Die zwei Schrauben 11 an der hinteren rechten Laufrolle des Dokument Finishers A l sen Die H he der hinteren rechten Laufrolle durch Drehen ihrer Einstellschraube 14 mit einem Kreuzschlitzschraubenzieher so einstellen dass die Achse des Stifts 12 der Verriegelungsklaue auf die Markierung des Schlitzes 13 des Dokument Finishers A ausgerichtet ist wenn der Dokument Finisher A an den MFP angesetzt ist von der Ger tevorderseite gesehen Durch Drehen der Einstellschraube 14 im Uhrzeigersinn wird der Dokument Finisher A angehoben w hrend er durch Drehen entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn abgesenkt wird 2 Allentare le due viti 11 sulla ruota orientabile posteriore destra della finitrice di documenti A Regolare l altezza della ruota orientabile posteriore destra ruotandone il suo bullone di regolazione 14 a mezzo di un cacciavite a croce in modo che l asse del perno 12 del dispositivo di arresto risulti allineato ai contrassegni del foro 13 della finitrice di documenti A una volta che la finitrice stessa A viene unita all MFP vista dal lato frontale della macchina Ruotando il bullone di regolazione 14 in senso orario si solleva la finitrice di documenti A mentre ruotandolo in senso antiorario si abbassa la finitrice di documenti A
274. e de la pared antes de empezar a instalar el finalizador de documentos Verfahren Vor dem Installieren des Dokument Finishers ist zuerst der Jobtrenner anzubringen Schalten Sie den MFP Hauptschalter aus und ziehen Sie den MFP Netzstecker von der Netzsteckdose ab bevor Sie mit der Installation des Dokument Finishers beginnen Procedura Prima di installare la finitrice di documenti installare prima il separatore dei lavori Prima di dare inizio alla procedura di installazione della finitrice di documenti non mancare di spegnere usando l interruttore principale di alimentazione e disinserire la spina dell MFP dalla presa a muro della rete elettrica JUR WR pe E DM AAE o CORBETT ASIN AIR ELE At ELA re Ji S di ER o SUE II FXx RALRZa4LIcAHRUTMAS C 2 TENA METIDO bh ay ABONA ARO E BEBA 4 y F OFF IT LAA WTI TEAL LE Steps 1 to 5 below are only for full color machines 1 Place the document finisher A sideways remove the eight screws 1 and remove the two pieces of fittings 2 Les tapes 1 a5 ci dessous concernent les machines enti rement en couleurs seulement 1 Placer le retoucheur de document A sur le C t retirer les huit vis 1 et retirer les deux pi ces de fixation 2 Los pasos 1 a 5 a continuaci n son solo para m quinas a todo co
275. e eject motor oper ates If not replace the engine PWB 3 The toner feed motor does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective drive transmis sion system Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective toner feed motor Run maintenance item U135 and check if the toner feed motor operates If not replace the toner feed motor Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U135 and check if the toner feed motor operates If not replace the engine PWB 4 The power source fan motor does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the motor Defective motor Run maintenance item U037 and check if the motor operates when the following terminals on the PWB goes low If not replace the corresponding motor Power source fan motor YC6 1 on the power source PWB Defective power source PWB Run maintenance item U037 and check if following terminals on the PWB goes low If not replace the power source PWB Power source fa
276. e engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective humidity sensor Poor contact in the connector termi nals Replace the humidity sensor Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drum unit Replace the drum unit 2K5 Remarks rede Causes Check procedures corrective measures C7910 Developing unit EEPROM error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the Reading from or writing to EEPROM connector termi engine PWB and the continuity across the cannot be performed nals connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective develop Replace the developing unit ing unit C8030 Tray upper limit detection problem The tray upper limit Reinsert the connector Also check for conti optional document finisher sensor paper sur nuity within the connector cable If none When the tray elevation motor raisesa face sensor 1 2 remedy or replace the cable tray the ON status of the tray upper limit connector makes sensor is detected poor contact Defective tray Replace the sensor upper limit sensor paper surface sen sor 1 2 Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check main PWB for correct operation C8040 Belt problem optional document fin The belt s
277. e image quality modes Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respec tive image quality modes Also used to make copy images darker or lighter Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the image quality mode The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description TEXT Density in the text mode MIXED Density in the text and photo mode OTHER Density in modes other than the text mode or the text and photo mode FAX TEXT Density in the text in fax mode FAX PHOTO Density in the photo in fax mode Setting TEXT 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller Image density Setting Setting 0 Dark Set to LIGHTER Set to DARKER Light Density adjustment Light Center Dark Figure 1 3 16 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting MIXED 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting MIXED DARKER Change in density when manual
278. e two M4 x 6 binding screws E so that there is a gap of approximately 10 mm between the rail and the floor 12 Fixer la glissi re D a l aide des deux vis de fixation M4 x 6 E de sorte m nager un espace d environ 10 mm entre la glissi re et le sol 12 Asegure el carril gu a D con dos tornillos de sujeci n M4 x 6 E de forma tal que exista un espacio de aproximadamente 10 mm entre el carril y el piso 12 Die F hrungsschieneneinheit D mit den beiden M4 x 6 Verbundschrauben E so sichern dass ein Abstand von etwa 10 mm zwischen Schiene und Boden vorhanden ist 12 Fissare la guida della rotaia D con le due viti di serraggio M4 x 6 E in modo che ci sia una distanza di circa 10 mm tra la rotaia e il pavimento 12 124 MA x6 i E Al Es Wate Pui AH RIZ 20K IEE 84 12 24 FUMA 0 Ep o2 10mm 12 MX BRAY RFR G2Xc RETO 13 Loosen temporarily the two screws 8 that secure the sheet metal 7 of the rail mounting plate C on the MFP raise the sheet metal 7 by two divisions of the scale from the guide rail D and tighten the two screws 8 Note If the guide rail D is not adjusted correctly it will not move and could cause the document finisher to fall over 13 Desserrer provisoirement les deux vis 8 qui fixent la feuille m tallique 7 de la plaque de montage du sur le lever la feuille m tallique 7
279. e using the keys in SUB SCAN 7 Press the start key The value is set Description Original for adjustment P N 302AC68243 Figure 1 3 24 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 80 2K5 Maintenance Description item No 0470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio Description Sets the compression ratio for JPEG images in each image quality mode Purpose To change the setting in accordance with the image that the user is copying For example in order to soften the coarseness of the image when making copies at over 200 magnification change the level of compres sion by raising the value Lowering the value will increase the compression and thereby lower the image qual ity Raising the value will increase image quality but lower the image processing speed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description System Compression ratio for temporary storage in system Copy Compression ratio for copying Send Compression ratio for sending Setting System 1 Select the item to be set 2 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Y Brightness 1 to 100 90 Color differential 1 to 100 90 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting Copy 1 S
280. eRen Collegamento dell MFP al telefono separato 7 Inserire il cavo connettore modulare 8 nel terminale del telefono e quindi collegare l altro terminale al telefono separato 4 MFP xEHESI EE BIG TARDAN 8 Ji Hin A 55 Efl e EE o OE T EY 2723 F 8 TEL PIC LIAL 625 H4 077 TIL IMTS Es le Do If you don t connect the MFP to the separate phone wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal C upon the customer s request Si le MFP n est pas connect au t l phone s par la demande du client nettoyer la surface de la borne de t l phone avec de l alcool et apposer le joint de borne C Si no conecta el MFP a un tel fono separado limpie la superficie del terminal del tel fono con alcohol y pegue el sello del terminal C a solicitud del cliente Wenn der MFP nicht an das separate Telefon angeschlossen wird die Oberfl che der Telefonbuchse mit Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe C einsetzen falls vom Kunden gew nscht Nel caso in cui non si colleghi al telefono separato pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con dell alcol e applicare la guarnizione terminale C a richiesta del cliente du HE CREE 2192 5016 UTE jf HORAE ial gt MARIA BRED EL LY TEL
281. easing it makes the image lighter 4 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position If dust is identified the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals Purpose When using DP to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected BLACK LINE Initialization of original reading position Setting Standard data when dust is detected 1 Select the item to be set 2 Change the value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting CCDR Lowest density of the regard as the dust 0 to 255 125 CCD G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 125 CCD B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0
282. ecessary 23 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original switchback feed sec tion Jam code 74 Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the original switch back motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original switchback motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary 24 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original switchback convey ing section Jam code 75 Defective switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse DP timing switch original switchback switch 25 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying jam between finisher and machine Jam code 80 1 4 14 Defective paper entry sen sor With 5 V DC present at CN14 1 and CN14 3 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 2 and CN14 4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper entry sensor Problem Causes check procedures 2K5 Corrective measures 2
283. ective measures Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Paper creased Change the paper Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation Dirty or flawed drum 16 Fusing is poor Copy example Causes Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 31 Check procedures corrective measures n Wrong types of paper Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Flawed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 41 Flawed fuser heater 17 Image is out of focus Copy example Causes Replace the fuser heaters see page 1 5 43 Check procedures corrective measures 4 Defective image scanning unit Replace the image scanning unit see page 1 5 24 Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation 1 4 39 2K5 18 Image center does not align with the original center Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 40 Misadjusted image center line Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of image printing see page 1 3 23 Misadjusted scanner center line Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration see page 1 3 31 Original is not
284. einsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The stapler is blocked with a sta ple Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the sta pler The stapler is bro ken Replace the front stapler and check for cor rect operation Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Adjustment motor 2 problem optional document finisher The adjustment sensor 2 does not turn on off within specified time of the adjust ment motor 2 turning on The adjustment sensor 2 adjust ment motor 2 con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective adjust ment sensor 2 Replace the adjustment sensor 2 Defective adjust ment motor 2 Replace the adjustment motor 2 Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Adjustment motor 1 problem optional document finisher The adjustment sensor 1 does not turn on off within specified time of the adjust ment motor 1 turning on The adjustment sensor 1 adjust ment motor 1 con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable
285. eitet m ssen Einstellungen durchgef hrt werden Das Verfahren ist auf den folgenden Seiten beschrieben Bevor das Bild vom DP gepr ft wird ist das Bild von der Maschine zu pr fen und einzustellen Einzelheiten sind der Wartungsanleitung der Maschine zu entnehmen Controllo del funzionamento 1 Per controllare il funzionamento della macchina preparare un originale di formato A3 a dove sono state tracciate quattro linee b a 20 mm dai bordi e una linea c centrale 2 Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione della macchina alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e accendere l interruttore principale di alimentazione 3 Collocare l originale a nel DP e fare una copia di prova per controllare il funzionamento della macchina e l esempio di copia 4 Se la differenza tra l originale a e la copia di prova supera il valore di riferimento eseguire le regolazioni Per la procedura leggere le seguenti pagine Prima di controllare l immagine dal DP controllare e regolare l immagine dalla macchina Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d istruzioni della macchina ZIERA 1 MEI AS 20mm 4 262 b FIERA JR a CK OA 1 amp 0 2 HNL ASE BL AAA 3 a BUE DP E 52 TU BR VE AD AZ 4 WRF a ED PEAS fh RSL RY A RETA F RAJ iA TOUS SESS ANA A Be SALES LANE FA E
286. elect the item to be set 2 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Text Y Brightness in the text mode 1 to 100 90 Text C Color differential in the text mode 1 to 100 90 Photo Y Brightness in the photo mode 1 to 100 90 Photo C Color differential in the photo mode 1 to 100 90 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting Send 1 Select Text Photo or HC PDF 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting Text Y 1 to 5 Brightness in the text mode 1 to 100 30 40 51 70 90 Text C 1 to 5 Color differential in the text mode 1 to 100 30 40 51 70 90 Photo Y 1 to 5 Brightness in the photo mode 1 to 100 30 40 51 70 90 Photo C 1 to 5 Color differential in the photo mode 1 to 100 30 40 51 70 90 HC PDF Y 1 to 3 Brightness of high compression PDF 1 to 100 15 25 60 HC PDF C 1 to 3 Color differential of high compression PDF 1 to 100 15 25 60 4 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 81 2K5 1 Maintenance item No Description U470 Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is d
287. ely Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of lift motor 1 and the connector YC23 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of lift motor 1 Replace lift motor 1 Defective lift motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace lift motor 1 Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of lift switch 1 and the connector YC23 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective lift switch 1 Check if YC23 B12 on the engine PWB goes low when lift switch 1 is turned off If not replace lift switch 1 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 22 Lift motor 2 error After cassette 2 is inserted lift switch 2 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected four times successively Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of lift motor 2 and the connector YC23 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of lift motor 2 Replace lift motor 2 Defective lift motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace lift motor 2 Poor contact in the connector te
288. enance item 0000 Load paper Y Y Exit maintenance mode Install the toner container Y Y Print out the user setting list Install the waste toner box Y Y Make test copies Install the optional original cover or the DP Y Attaching the language label 230 V specifications only Y Completion of the machine installation 2K5 When moving the machine pull out the four carrying handles on the right and left sides and hold them Moving the machine Carrying handle Mf 0 50 Wy y 00 RN Carrying handle DA Y o y 0 BO y JI Carrying handle Figure 1 2 2 1 2 3 2K5 Unpacking Machine Outer case Inner frame Skid Bottom front left pad Bottom front right pad Bottom rear left pad Bottom rear right pad Bottom pad Top pad Machine cover gt 1 2 4 Caution Place the machine a level surface 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Figure 1 2 3 Unpacking Document tray Power cord Plastic bag Operation guide Size plates USB host label Plastic bag Cursor pins Hinge joints Paper storage bags 2K5 Remove the eject spacer and tapes 1
289. ensor Reinsert the connector Also check for conti isher belt solenoid con nuity within the connector cable If none The belt sensor does not turn on off nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable within specified time of the belt solenoid contact Trig one Defective belt sen Replace the belt sensor sor Defective belt sole Replace the belt solenoid noid Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check main PWB for correct operation C8140 Tray elevation motor problem The tray elevation Reinsert the connector Also check for conti optional document finisher The tray low limit sensor or paper sur face sensor 1 2 cannot be detected to be on within 10 s since the tray elevation motor is activated motor connector makes poor con tact nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The tray elevation motor malfunc tions Replace the tray elevation motor The tray lower limit sensor paper sur face sensor 1 2 connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective tray lower limit sensor paper surface sen sor 1 2 Replace the sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 29 2K5 Remarks rede Causes Check procedur
290. epair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective PF paper drive motor Replace the PF paper drive motor Defective PWB Replace the PF main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation 2K5 Remarks rede ontents Causes Check procedures corrective measures C3100 Scanner carriage problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 on The home position is not correct when connector termi the scanner PWB and the connector of the the power is turned on or at the start of nals home position switch and the connection of copying using the table connector YC3 on the scanner PWB and the connector on the scanner motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective home Replace the scanner home position switch position switch Defective scanner Replace the scanner motor motor The mirror frame Check if the mirror flames and exposure exposure lamp or lamp are on the rail And check the scanner scanner wire is wire winds correctly defective Defective PWB Replace the scanner PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation C3200 Exposure lamp problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on When in
291. equired carry out the adjustment Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U072 U404 P 1 3 73 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0073 Checking scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions Purpose To check scanner operation Start 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated Display Description SCANNER MOTOR Scanner operation HOME POSITION Home position operation DUST CHECK Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on DP READING DP scanning position operation Setting SCANNER MOTOR 1 Select SCANNER MOTOR 2 Select the item 3 Change the setting using the keys Display Operating conditions Setting range ZOOM Magnification 25 to 400 SIZE Original size See below LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp O off or 1 on Original sizes for each setting in SIZE Setting Paper size Setting Paper size 5000 A4 5000 A5R 4300 B5 7800 Folio 5100 11 x 8 1 2 10200 11 x 17 10000 A3 9000 11 x 15 8600 B4 8400 8 1 2 x 14 7100 A4R 6600 8 1 2 x 11 6100 B5R 5100 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 4 Press the start key Scanning starts under the selected conditions 5 To stop operation press the stop key
292. er Replace the fuser thermistor 2 thermistor 2 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation C6050 Abnormally low fuser thermistor cen Defective fuser Replace the fuser heater 1 or 2 ter temperature heater 1 or 2 Fuser thermistor us detected 100 T Installation defec Check the mounting state of the fuser ther 212 F less then 1 s continuously during n E tiveness on fuser mistor 2 If any problem is found repair it copying thermistor 2 Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation C6120 Abnormally high fuser thermistor Installation defec Check the mounting state of the fuser ther edge temperature tiveness on fuser mistor 1 If any problem is found repair it Fuser thermistor 1 is detected 240 C thermistor 1 464 F or more for 40 ms Defective fuser Replace the fuser thermistor 1 thermistor 1 Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation C6150 Abnormally low fuser thermistor edge Defective fuser Replace the fuser heater 1 or 2 temperature heater 1 or 2 Fuser thermistor 1 13 detected 30 ps Installation defec Check the mounting state of the fuser ther 176 F less than 1 s continuously during Ls tiveness on fuser mistor 1 If any problem is found repair it copying thermistor 1 Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation C6400
293. er code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the preset value using the numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Setting the delivery date Description Enter delivery date in month day and year Purpose To operate when installing the machine Perform this to confirm the delivery date Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select TODAY 3 Press the start key The delivery date is set Clearing 1 Select CLEAR 2 Press the start key The delivery date is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the digital dot coverage report on reporting Purpose According to user request changes the setting Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press COVERAGE Select ON or OFF Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 65 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0326 Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the contact
294. er feed motor PFM speed adjust 40 to 40 2 ment EJECT MOTOR Eject motor EM speed adjustment 40 to 40 POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor PM speed adjustment 20 to 20 DF MOTOR Paper conveying motor PCM speed 40 to 40 adjustment Optional Adjustment 1 Press the system menu key 2 Press the start key to output an A3 Ledger VTC pattern A Correct values for an A3 Ledger output are 350 1 4 mm B 250 1 0 mm Figure 1 3 7 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys A Main motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction and decreasing it makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction B Polygon motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and decreasing it makes the image longer in the main scanning direction 5 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 1 3 26 Maintenance item No Description 2K5 U055 Setting the motor periodic drive Description Specifies ON OFF the drum small rotation mode Purpose Set to ON if dribbling occurs on the image Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Drum small rotation
295. er name or the IP address and press OK Press keys to enter the LDAP port number using the numeric keys Press Name 1 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed and press OK 11 Follow steps 7 and 8 above to set Name 2 Press E mail Address Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e mail address and press OK Press Search Timeout to set the amount of time to wait before time out Press or the numeric keys to enter the time Press LDAP Security to select the type of encryp tion according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server Select Off LDAP over SSL or LDAPv3 TLS and press OK 15 Job accounting Enabling Disabling Job Accounting 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Change of Job Accounting Press On To disable job accounting press Off Press OK Adding an Account 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Register Edit of Accounting List and then Add Press Change of Account Name Enter the account name and press OK The Account screen reappears Follow steps 3 and 4 above to enter the Account ID Activate or deacti
296. eration Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration Adjusting the center line 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting the printing area for folio paper Length Width 330 210 Checking the operation of the fan motors Adjusting the deflection in the paper 0 50 50 40 10 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed 0 1 0 2 2 8 0 Setting the motor periodic drive OFF Setting fan mode 45 Optical Turning the exposure lamp on Adjusting the shading position 0 Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction Auxiliary scanning direction 0 0 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0 0 Adjusting the scanner center line 0 0 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0 0 Adjusting the DP magnification 0 0 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0 0 0 0 Adjusting the DP center line 0 0 Checking scanner operation Adjusting the DP input light luminosity 0 Setting the economy mode 60 Adjusting the correct exposure 0 0 0 Setting DP reading position modification operation 125 125 125 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Setting the exposure density gradient 0 0 0 0 0 Adjusting original size detection Factory initial setting 1 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 2 40 30 20 40 30 20 40 30 20 19 19 19 185 Section Co
297. erbinder 22 der Finisher Druckablage E gerade ziehen 18 Die Finisher Druckablage E von der Vorderseite der Maschine einf hren und die Haken 23 auf der rechten und linken Seite der Ablage E in die Maschine einh ngen Die Steckverbinder der Finisher Druckablage E durch die Offnung auf der Riickseite der Maschine f hren 17 Allungate i cavi dei connettori 22 del tabella di elaborazione del finitore E 18 Inserite la tabella di elaborazione del finitore E dal lato anteriore della macchina e appendete i ganci 23 a destra e a sinistra del tabella E sulla macchina Fate passare i connettori della tabella di elaborazione del finitore E atttraverso l apertura sul lato posteriore della macchina 17 FERT a R a Ah E fis D HAE 22 1E 18 LAS 2 1 aie ab SE E EEA 23 Lo REET 2 7 BIE E ARAN EV 17 74 gt 4 E Da KY HERR 22 xo Sz 18 74 E A 07 y 0 23 alo AZAR E 19 At the rear side of the machine connect the connector 24 of the finisher process table to the connector 25 of the paper conveying unit 20 Connect the connector 26 of the finisher process table to YC4 27 on the engine PWB 21 Replace the cover 16 using the screw 15 removed in step 8 19 Sur le c t arri re de
298. eric keys Press Default Gateway and enter the address using the numeric keys Check if all the address entries are correct and press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again TCP IP IPv6 Setup 1 9e 4090 RON Press Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Change of TCP IP Press On and then press OK Press Next of IPv6 Press Change of IPv6 Press On Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again m AA AA A Manual Setting IPv6 1 Press Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of IPv6 Press Next of Manual Setting Press IP Address Manual to enter IP address Press OK Press Keys of Prefix Length 0 128 to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys Press Default Gateway to enter the default gate way Check that all the entries are correct and Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again RA Stateless Settings 1 DIAN Press Next of Network and then Next of TCP IP Setting Press Next of IPv6 Press Change of RA Stateless Press On or Off of RA Stateless Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again DHCP IPv6 Settings 1 Press Next
299. erta frontal 1 26 Den in Schritt 2 entfernten B roklammerhalter 3 wieder anbringen 27 Die linke Abdeckung 1 2 und die Frontabdeckung 1 schlie en 26 Rimettete al suo posto il contenitore delle graffette 3 rimosso nel passo 2 27 Chiudete il coperchio sinistro 1 2 e il coperchio anteriore 1 26 FEA 2 PRTA 3 IRER o 27 005 1 2 UB AR 1 26 FI 2 CRYO VK L7 7 U v FAN 3 Gi WYO CO EU 5 27 4 30 73 1 2 BLUR 1 05 Attaching the finisher tray 28 Fix the front eject cover G and the rear eject cover H using an M3 x 6 screw N each Fixation du plateau du module de finition 28 Fixez le capot d jection avant G et le capot d jection arri re H l aide d une vis M3 x 6 N pour chaque capot Colocaci n de la bandeja de finalizador 28 Fije la cubierta de expulsi n frontal G y la cubierta de expulsi n trasera H utilizando un tornillo M3 x 6 N en cada lugar Anbringen der Finisher Ablage 28 Die Frontauswurfabdeckung G und die R ckauswurfabdeckung H mit je einer M3 x 6 Schraube N befestigen Montaggio del vassoio del finitore 28 Fissate il coperchio anteriore di espulsione carta G e il coperchio posteriore di espulsione carta H utilizzando una vite M3 x 6 N per ciascuno 24 9 Vxkb4O0H8BWUtltt 28 X 6 N 4 14 CHEM 2 2 5 amp 04 859 5 29 Insert the front and rear
300. es corrective measures C8170 Finisher front side registration motor The front side reg Reinsert the connector Also check for conti problem optional built in finisher istration motor con nuity within the connector cable If none When the front side registration home nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable position sensor is turned on during initial contact ization the sensor did not turn on while it 3 a has moved by 106 pulses Replace front side registration motor When the front side registration home position sensor is turned off during initial The front side reg Reinsert the connector Also check for conti ization the sensor did not turn on in istration home nuity within the connector cable If none position sensor remedy or replace the cable connector makes poor contact Defective front side Replace the front side registration home registration home position sensor position sensor Defective finisher Replace the finisher control PWB and check control PWB for correct operation C8180 Finisher rear side registration motor The rear side reg Reinsert the connector Also check for conti problem optional built in finisher istration motor con nuity within the connector cable If none When the rear side registration home nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable position sensor is turned on during initial contact ization the sensor did not turn on
301. ete is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 83 2K5 Maintenance Bagcription item No 0901 Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key The counts by paper feed locations are displayed Display Description MP TRAY MP tray CASETTE 1 Cassette 1 CASETTE 2 Cassette 2 CASETTE 3 Cassette 3 optional paper feeder CASETTE 4 Cassette 4 optional paper feeder DUPLEX Duplex unit When an optional paper feed device is not installed the corresponding count is not displayed Clearing 1 Select the counts to be cleared CASETTE 3 and CASETTE 4 cannot be cleared 2 Select the counts for all and press ALL CLEAR 3 Press the start key The counts is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 0903 Checking clearing the paper jam counts 1 3 84 Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations Purpose To check the paper jam status Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for selecting an item is displayed Display Description Count Displays cle
302. ey The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2K5 1 Maintenance item No Description 0252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications INCH Inch North America specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric Asia Pacific specifications AUSTRALIA Australia specifications CHINA China specifications KOREA Korea specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on 1 3 63 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U253 Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters Purpose Used to select according to the preference of the user copy service provider if A3 Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet single count or two sheets double count Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the count system Display Description ALL SINGLE Single count for all size paper DOUBLE COUNT A3 LEDGER Double count for A3 Ledger size or larger DOUBLE COUNT B4 Double count for B4 size or larger DOUBLE COUNT FOLIO
303. eys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Scanner leading edge margin 3 0 2 5 mm Scanner Scanner left margin right margin 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm 2 5 1 5 2 0 mm Scanner trailing edge margin 3 0 2 0 mm Figure 1 3 18 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U404 P 1 3 73 Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears Maintenance item No 2K5 Description 0404 Adjusting margins for scanning original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the DP is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U402 U403 P 1 3 71 P 1 3 72 Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step A MARGIN Left margin 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 5 mm B MARGIN Leading edge margin 0to10 0 2 5 0 5mm C MARGIN Right margin 0to 10 0 3 0 0 5mm D MARGIN Trailing edge margin 00100 4 0 0 5 mm Display Description Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key t
304. f Secure Protocol and then Change of IPP Security Press IPP over SSL Only or IPP or IPP over SSL Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again HTTP Security Setup 1 eom Press Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of HTTPS Security Press HTTP or HTTPS or HTTPS Only Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again LDAP Security Setup 1 S N Press Next of Network Next of Secure Protocol and then Change of LDAP Security Press Off LDAP over SSL or LDAPv3 TLS Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again IPSec Setting 1 69 79 Press Next of Network then Change of IPSec Press On Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again LAN Interface Setup 1 2 Press Next of Network and then Change of LAN Interface Select Auto 1OBASE T Half 10BASE T Full 100BASE TX Half or 100BASE TX Full as the LAN interface Press OK After changing the setting restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again 1 3 105 2K5 Interface Block Setting USB Host USB memory slot setting 1 Press Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of USB Host 2 If user login administrati
305. f engine PWB matches with that of main PWB Display Operation MACHINE No Displays the machine serial number If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB Display Operation MACHINE No MAIN Displays the machine serial number of main MACHINE No ENGINE Displays the machine serial number of engine Setting Carry out if the machine serial number does not match 1 Press EXECUTE 2 Press the start key Writing of serial No starts Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 17 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U019 1 3 18 Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB Purpose To check the part number or to decide if the newest version of ROM is installed Method Press the start key The ROM version are displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 1 Display Description MAIN MMI ENGINE ENGINE BOOT ENGINE POWER SCANNER BROWSER OPTION LANGUAGE DICTIONARY DBA Solution Framework DP 500x2PF 1000DF INNER DF FAX BOOT1 FAX APL1 FAX IPL1 FAX BOOT2 FAX APL2 FAX IPL2 Main ROM Operation ROM Engine ROM Engine booting Engine power Scanner ROM Browser ROM Optional language ROM Database connection Solution framework Optional DP ROM Optional paper feeder ROM O
306. from the heat roller by its separation claws and Fuser section is conveyed from the machine to eject and switchback section 2 1 14 4 1 M 11 3 Figure 2 1 18 Fuser section Left fuser frame Right fuser frame Heat roller Heat roller separation claws Fuser heater 1 FH1 Fuser heater 2 FH2 Fuser thermostat 1 FTS1 Fuser thermostat 2 FTS2 Fuser thermistor 1 FTH1 Fuser thermistor 2 FTH2 Press roller 2K5 FTH2 YC1 B14 FIXTHCEN 1 FTH1 YC1 pi2 FH1 yct p13 FUFMLTN J FUPWB N FTS1 Heat roller FTS2 NEUTRAL NEUTRAL gt l T 9 e e e MHEATN YC7AA 9 9 SHEATN YCT2 PSPWB Figure 2 1 19 Fuser section block diagram 2 1 15 2K5 2 1 8 Eject and switchback sections The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fixing has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the eject motor In duplex copying paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor When paper is transferred to the job separa tor or the internal finisher the feedshift solenoid FSSOL is turned on to activate the feedshift guide to switch the paper transfer path Figure 2 1 20 Eject and switchback
307. from the leading edge to the black belt b of the original at D E and F 5 6 7 8 9 10 Measurement procedure 1 Measure the length from the edge to the black belt b of the original at D 30 mm from the left edge E 148 5 mm from the left edge and F 267 mm from the left edge respectively 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained F 2 E 2 Enter the values solved using the keys in SUB LEAD ADJ Press the start key The value is set Measure the length G from the leading edge of the black belt b to the bottom of the N475 patch of the original Enter the measured value using the keys in SUB TAIL ADJ Press the start key The value is set To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 148 5 mm MAIN ADJ IM 775 SUB LEAD ADJ D F 2 E 2 SUB TAIL ADJ G Original for adjustment P N 302FZ56990 Figure 1 3 23 1 3 79 2K5 Maintenance item No U425 Setting DP Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt inside of the original at A Enter the measured value using the keys in LEAD Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt inside of the original at B Enter the measured value using the keys in MAIN SCAN Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge inside to the black belt of trailing edge inside of the original at C Enter the measured valu
308. g the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Procedure Removing the MP unit 1 Remove two screws and remove the scan ner right cover 2 Remove four hooks and remove the right upper cover Figure 1 5 10 Right upper 3 Open the front cover 4 Remove the screw and remove the front right cover Front right cover 5 Raise the top tray 6 Unhook ten hooks and remove the right lower cover Figure 1 5 12 2K5 7 Loosen two screws and remove two MP holder plates 8 Remove two screws MP holder plate Screw 9 Remove two connectors 10 Release the clamp 11 Remove the MP unit yes Connector ar d Figure 1 5 14 Removing the MP separation pulley 12 Reverse the MP unit and remove the spring and stop ring from the MP separation pulley shaft 13 Move the bush inside 14 Raise the MP separation pulley shaft Remove the holder plate and the bush and then remove the MP separation pulley 2K5 MP unit MP separation pulley shaft Stop ring p MP separation pulley shaft a 7 MPseparation N a ulle pulley P d Torque limiter MP separation n a pulley shaft P d a A di dit d Pd Figure 1 5 16 2K5 Removing the MP pa
309. ge setting FAX PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0 dark FAX PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 light Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U099 Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size sensor and sets the sensing threshold value Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size sensor malfunctions fre quently due to incident light or the like Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description DATA1 Displaying original size sensor transmission data B W LEVEL1 B W LEVEL setting original size sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Method Display the data for the sensor 1 Place the original and close the original cover or DP The detection sensor transmission data is dis played Display Description ORIG
310. glass when scanning from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to set The screen for setting each item is displayed Display Description BLACK LINE MODE Black line cleaning guidance ON OFF setting BLACK LINE COUNT Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication Setting BLACK LINE MODE 1 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Displays the cleaning guidance OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance Initial setting ON Setting count value is displayed only if the setting is ON 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting BLACK LINE COUNT 1 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting COUNT 1000 Setting counts of the cleaning guidance 0 to 255 8 indication x 1000 sheets When setting is 0 the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 66 Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U328 Side ejection setting Description Sets whether to eject to the side of the machine when an optional curl eliminator is installed Purpose Set according to the preference of the user Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON To eject
311. he con nector terminals of paper switch 1 2 or MP paper switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective paper switch 1 2 or MP paper switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off replace the switch Paper switch 1 YC23 B12 on the engine PWB Paper switch 2 YC23 A5 on the engine PWB MP paper switch YC7 6 on the engine PWB 16 The size of paper on the cassette 1 2 or MP tray is not dis played correctly 1 4 44 Poor contact in the con nector terminals of paper size length switch 1 2 paper size width switch 1 2 MP paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective paper size length switch 1 2 or MP paper size length switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off replace the switch Paper size length switch 1 YC23 B2 on the engine PWB Paper size length switch 2 YC23 A12 on the engine PWB MP paper size length switch YC7 13 on the engine PWB Defective paper size width switch 1 2 or MP paper size width switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not change when the width guide in the cassette 1 2 or insert guide on the MP tray
312. he finisher tray from the process table 1429 ms Paper length 91 Finisher cover open document finisher The finisher cover becomes open during paper is run ning Paper is remaining in paths at power on 92 Eject paper sensor non arrival jam docu ment finisher In the straight mode the eject paper sensor EPS is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sensor PES was turned on 1 4 7 2K5 1 Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional finisher 1 4 8 93 Reverse sensor jam document finisher The reverse sensor SBS does nat turn on within speci fied time of paper entry sensor PES turning on unfin ished reversing canceled 719 ms The reverse sensor SBS is not turned on within speci fied time unfinished reversing set 431 ms The reverse sensor SBS is not turned off within speci fied time its turning on resident reversing canceled 3000 ms The reverse sensor SBS is not turned off within speci fied time its turning on resident reversing set 700 ms 94 Paper entry sensor stay remaining jam document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned off within specified time its turning on 2250 ms 95 Paper conveying sen sor jam document fin isher The paper conveying sensor PCS is not turned off within specified time its turning on reversing canceled 225
313. he maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range COUNT Time for maintenance due indication 0 to 9999 Remaining number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 70 2K5 Maintenance BascripHoh item No 0402 Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step LEAD Printer leading edge margin 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm A Printer left margin 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm Printer right margin 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm TRAIL Printer trailing edge margin 0 to 10 0 3 9 0 1 mm TRAIL DUP Printer trailing edge margin Oto 10 0 40 0 1 mm second side TRAIL MPT Printer trailing edge margin 0to 10 0 40 0 1 mm MP tray Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Incre
314. he screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 87 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0917 Setting backup data reading writing Description Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine or writes the data from the USB memory to the machine Purpose To store and write data when replacing the HDD Method 1 Press the power key on the operation panel and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off switch off the main power switch Insert USB memory in USB memory slot Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select Export or Import Display Description Export Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine Select the item Display Description Depending data Address Book Address book Job Accent Job accounting FAX Forward FAX transfer information Job accounting user management and docu ment box information One Touch Information on one touch Address book User User managements Job accounting Shortcut Shortcut information Job accountings user managements and docu ment box information Document Box Document box information Job accountings and user managements Program Program information Job accountings user managements and docu ment box information ADDRESS BOOK Address book and Infor Address book and Information on one to
315. hould be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step SHADING POSITION Shading position 0 to 24 0 0 11 mm Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine left and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine right 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No Description 2K5 U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order U065 U065 main scanning auxiliary scanning direction direction U053 P 1 3 26 U067 P 1 3 31 Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted 0070 1 3 33 Display Description Setting Initial range
316. i installa nel 42 52 ppm solo per le macchine Applicare l etichetta della sezione funzionamento FAX E indicata da A Quando si installa nel 30 ppm solo per le macchine Applicare l etichetta della sezione funzionamento FAX E indicata da B Quando si installa nel 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm un macchinario a colori Applicare l etichetta della sezione funzionamento FAX E indicata da A T D fe ELE ERR 10 FAY EIER a IE T Js s INR AREA E o lt SRE 42 52 Kk CIR ALA n gt A EERE Fi at RE 305KkpUM EWM EY mae Vents E lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 5 KEN E gt A EE E FAX RILOR Y ft It 10 4 2A Foro 7 v LMT 5 lt 42 52 BUR E OOK CRET i268 A EFM amp dv C v5 FAX EMERI V F 0 2 lt 30 HE EY 90 CRET 6356 B 2 vC v FAX ANL F REO REO S lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 DILA 7 8 CRET DA 2 FAX BR amp IEREZ F REO ft ES D FAX BERT v F 260 RT nij nul lt 42 52 ppm gt lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm gt Attach the JATE label for 100 V model only 11 Perform this procedure for 100 V model only Fixer l tiquette JATE mod le 100 V seulement 11 Effectuer cette proc dure pour le mod le 100 V seulement
317. ie die Einstellschraube 17 entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn der Anpasser bewegt sich in der Pfeilrichtung gt und ziehen Sie 1 Schraube 16 fest 20 Per un esempio di un modello di prova a 20 20 Girare la vite di regolazione 17 in senso orario il regolatore si sposter nella direzione della freccia e serrare 1 vite 16 Per un esempio di un modello di prova b Girare la vite di regolazione 17 in senso antiorario il regolatore si sposter nella direzione della freccia 7 e serrare 1 vite 16 MARE a IN II 22 17 ARTA m EE 1 TRAE 16 MARE b IN UNER 22 1 AAA 0 27 507 RR 1 MZ 16 FARA a DAR WRR 17 ZA ICI L GARR Cm 27 ACB TUA Re 0 OF PERL 17 ZAE L GIRARE O n EX 60 1 BU S HTHH E 16 1 5 21 Gently close the cassette 22 Print a test pattern again 23 Repeat steps 19 to 22 until the gap of the center lines of paper and the test pattern shows the following reference value Reference value 2 0 mm or less 21 Refermer progressivement le tiroir 22 Imprimer nouveau une mire 23 R p ter les tapes 19 22 jusqu ce que l cart entre les lignes m dianes du papier et la mire corresponde bien la valeur de r f rence suivante Valeur de r f rence 2 0 mm ou moins 21 Cierre suavemente la bandeja 22 Vuelva a imprimir un patr n de prueba 23 Repita los pasos 19 a 22 hasta que la
318. iederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 0 mm Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 3 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento Valore di riferimento Entro 2 0 mm LUCRETIA EN 1 3 2 gt 2 Omm LAPS HJETA PURI AEF TI MOR 2 BEENA ETC FI 1 3 EY 215 lt gt 2 0mm BAI 17 2mm 3mm 2mm 3mm Checking the center line Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustment lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 2 0 mm For duplex copying Within 3 0 mm V rification de la ligne m diane V rifiez l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 2 0 mm max Copie recto verso 3 0 mm max Verificaci n de la l nea central Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente
319. ift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 1336 ms 47 Misfeed in fuser section duplex section The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2321 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 1336 ms Eject section 50 Misfeed in eject section The eject switch ESW does not turn off within specified time of the registration switch RSW turning off 2321 ms The eject switch ESW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2321 ms 51 Misfeed in job separa tor eject section The job separator eject switch JESW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing on 1350 ms The job separator eject switch JESW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing off 714 ms Paper length The job separator eject switch JESW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing on 1350 ms 1 4 5 2K5 1 Section Description Conditions Specified time Feedshift 52 The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within 1121 ms section Misfeed in feedshift specified time of the start of eject motor EM reverse sect
320. il line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values Reference value For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm 5 Effectuez nouveau une copie de test 6 R p tez les tapes 1 5 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max 5 Haga otra copia de prueba 6 Repita los pasos 1 a 5 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm 5 Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen 6 Die Schritte 1 bis 5 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt F r Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm F r Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm 5 Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia 6 Ripetere i passi da 1 a 5 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento lt Valore di riferimento gt Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm 5 Wk 6 5 2 HEREA o gt 3 LAW 4 Omm LIA 5 HET AMHaU Ei 6 2 SIE RS
321. ination address Error Not support protocol SMTP Protocol is set to OFF Check ON SMTP in Advanced SMTP General in COMMAND CENTER Error No Sender Info Sender address is not enter Enter the correct Sender Address in Advanced SMTP General in COMMAND CENTER Error Can not connect Select Other authenticate when authenticating POP before SMTP Select valid POP3 user other than Other The specified server is not SMTP server Enter the correct SMTP Server Name in Advanced SMTP General in COMMAND CENTER Network is not connected Check if the server is operating properly Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc Error Can not connect with timeout The server is unable to com municate Check if the server is operating properly Error Response wait with timeout The server is unable to com municate Check if the server is operating properly Error Network transfer Error occurs on the network Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc Error Network transfer with timeout Error occurs on the network Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc Error Response wait with timeout Response is not returned from the server above speci fied time Check the network connection cable net work condition within LAN etc
322. ing sleeve CN1 4 5 DHVSRUP CN1 10 m PHVYCLKC DHVADJC Developing bias CN1 5 22522 DEVPWB TS DEVDETN IUID1SCL IUIDSDA us CX IUIDIDETN YC8 A17 YC1 A16 EPWB 12 2 12 3 12 8 YC1 A9 YC1 B4 YC1 B3 YC1 B1 Figure 2 1 12 Developing section block diagram 2 1 10 2K5 1 Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system and reversal processing is performed with a charged drum a Si and a charged magnetic toner With the single component developing system toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and charged when it passes through the magnetic toner blade The toner that has passed through the magnetic toner blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole Then when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed On the other hand on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not
323. ing edges of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step FRONT Scanner leading edge registration 45 to 45 0 0 11 mm TAIL Scanner leading edge registration 45 to 45 0 0 11 mm rotate copying Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Scanner leading edge registration Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 10 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode 403 0071 U404 P 1 3 72 P 1 3 34 P 1 3 73 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U067 Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setti
324. ing switch Check if the eject roller or eject pulley is deformed Check and remedy 29 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying eject sensor non arrival jam Jam code 92 Defective eject sensor With 5 V DC present at CN5 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN5 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the eject sen sor Check if the paper convey ing motor malfunctions Check Check if the eject roller and eject pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the eject guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 30 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying reverse sensor jam Jam code 93 Defective reverse sensor With 5 V DC present at CN14 5 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the reverse sensor Check if the reverse motor malfunctions Check Check if the reverse roller and reverse pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the reverse guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 31 A paper jam in
325. ing the original for adjustment Before performing this adjustment be sure to adjust the angle of leading edge and the angle of trailing edge see pages 7 and 10 1 Cut the trailing edge of an original for adjustment as shown in a figure 2 Place the original for adjustment in the DP with the F and R surface up 3 Enter the maintenance mode and run the maintenance item U411 Select DP FACE UP press INPUT and then press the start key Adjustments of the DP magnification DP leading edge timing and DP center line are performed automatically 4 When Complete is displayed the adjustments are properly completed If a problem occurs during automatic adjustments XX XX is replaced with an error code is displayed Check the original set position and repeat the steps 2 to 3 until Complete is displayed For details see the service manual R glage automatique en utilisant l original pour effectuer le r glage Avant d effectuer ce r glage veiller r gler l angle du bord avant et l angle du bord arri re se reporter aux pages 7 et 10 1 D coupez le bord arri re de l original utilis pour le r glage comme indiqu sur l illustration 2 Placez l original utilis pour le r glage dans le DP en orientant les surfaces F et R vers le haut 3 Passez en mode de maintenance et ex cutez l l ment de maintenance U411 S lectionnez DP FACE UP appuyez sur INPUT puis appuyez sur la touche de d marrer Les r glages de l agrandissemen
326. ion 1 Press Execute of System Initialization 2 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 3 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Initialization starts 4 Once the initialization ends the message Task is completed Turn the main power switch off and on appears Turn the main power switch off 9 Date Timer Date Time 1 Press Change of Date Time 2 Press or to enter the date and time respec tively 3 Press OK Date Format 1 Press Change of Date Format 2 Select MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY or YYYY MM DD and press OK 1 3 101 2K5 Time Zone 1 Press Change of Time Zone 2 Select the location 3 Press Off or On of Summer Time and press OK Auto Panel Reset 1 Press Change of Auto Panel Reset 2 Press Off or On 3 Press OK Panel Reset Timer 1 Press Change of Panel Reset Timer 2 Press or to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on You cannot use the number keypad to enter this value 3 Press OK Low Power Timer 1 Press Change of Low Power Timer 2 Press or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on 3 Press OK Auto Sleep ON OFF 1 Press Change of Auto Sleep 2 Press Off or On 3 Press OK Sleep Timer 1 Press Change of Sleep Timer 2 Press or the n
327. ion is indicated during copying jam in verti cal paper conveying section Jam code 18 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 8 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in optional paper feeder vertical paper con veying section Jam code 19 Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Broken PF feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective PF feed switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 8 on the PF main PWB check if YC2 7 on the PF main PWB remains low when the PF feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the PF feed switch 9 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in MP tray paper conveying section Jam code 20 Broken MP feed switch or registration switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run m
328. ion rotation During paper switchback operation the feedshift switch 4514 ms FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within 4514 ms specified time of the its turning on The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within 2321 ms specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on Duplex 60 The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does 2621 ms section Duplex paper convey not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch ing section 1 FSSW turning on The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does 2629 ms not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning off 61 The registration switch RSW does not turn on within 1636 ms Duplex paper convey specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch ing section 2 DUPPCSW turning on The registration switch RSW does not turn off within 1493 ms specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW turning off Optional 70 The DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn on within 1468 pulses DP No original feed specified time during the first sheet feeding Retry 5 times The DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn on within 1468 pulses specified time during the second sheet feeding Retry 5 times 71 DP timing switch DPTSW does not turn off within speci 9900 pulses An original jam in the fied time of the original conveying motor OCM turning original conveying se
329. ione del vassoio del separatore 15 Collegare il connettore 20 del separatore lavori al connettore 21 dell unit LED PWB B 16 Fare passare i cavi attraverso lo spazio 22 e fissare l unit LED PWB B utilizzando la vite x 6 I lavori 17 Inserire il supporto del vassoio C nelle due aperture 23 e poi fare scorrere il supporto a destra fino a che non si mette in posizione con un clic LED ERR E TEIL AR 15 BS AS 938i 20 LED AAA PF 21 E 16 4 rz 22 H 1 438822 M3 x 6 D LED EIRE LED 621 KORY ttIt 17 FERRE FHA 2 Ae 23 Saeba DE 15 2a 7TEXLI4DH I 24 20 amp LED f Y h B OAR 21 IBN 5 16 EX T 22 Z L EAMIX 6 1 1 KT LED h EH RI S 17 EPO 23 2 KUAF Y LEDO E js 18 Install the job separator tray D from the front side of the machine Left Insert the tray into the groove 24 Right Hang the hook 25 on the tray holder C 18 Installez le plateau du s parateur de travaux D depuis le c t avant de la machine Gauche Ins rez le
330. irror 1 frame 18 Move the mirror 1 and 2 frames to the machine left and insert the two frame secur ing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the frames in position 19 Hold the wires and fix each front and rear wire holder plate to mirror 1 frame with the screw 20 Remove the two frame securing tools 21 Refit all the removed parts Frame securing tool Figure 1 5 43 2K5 1 5 23 2K5 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU Procedure 1 Remove two screws and remove the scan ner right cover 2 Remove the contact glass Contact glass 3 Remove six screws and remove the FFC ground and ISU cover FFC ground Ss Figure 1 5 45 1 5 24 NDNA Remove the FFC from the connector Remove four screws and remove the ISU Replace the ISU Refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 46 2K5 1 5 25 2K5 4 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the toner container 3 Remove the waste toner box 4 Remove the screw and remove the front right cover 5 Remove the and remove the toner hopper wire cover 1 5 26 Front right cover Figure 1 5 47 y Toner hopper a DN wire cover Hook Toner hopper wire cover Figure 1 5
331. is moved replace the switch Paper size width switch 1 YC22 5 7 11 on the engine PWB Paper size width switch 2 YC22 6 8 12 on the engine PWB MP paper size width switch YC7 1 2 3 on the engine PWB Problem Causes 2K5 Check procedures corrective measures 17 A paper jam in the paper feed paper conveying fuser eject or duplex sec tion is indicated when the main power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch feedshift switch eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch feedshift switch eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn each switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 18 The message requesting cover to be closed is dis played when the front cover or left cover 1 2 is closed Poor contact in the con nector terminals of safety switch 1 2 or left cover 2 switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective safety switch 1 2 or left cover 2 switch Check for continuity across each switch If there is no continuity when the switch is on replace it 19 Others
332. ismo tiempo Utilice BACK HEAD s lo si necesita ajustar individualmente el segundo lado de la copia duplex Einstellen des DP Vorderkanten Timings 1 Den Wartungsmodus aktivieren und den Wartungsposten U071 zur Einstellung ausf hren W hlen Sie FRONT HEAD um Simplex und Duplexkopie auf einmal einzustellen Verwenden Sie BACK HEAD nur wenn die zweite Seite der Duplexkopie individuell eingestellt werden muss Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione e avviare la voce di manutenzione U071 per la regolazione Selezionare FRONT HEAD per regolare simultaneamente entrambe le copie simplex e duplex Usare BACK HEAD solo se necessario regolare il secondo lato della copia duplex singolarmente x Bi E US SE BEEN 0071 XEFE FRONT HEAD FY Us A PP AU o CATE Vi Soo A T EE BACK HEAD o DP Hime 4 2 TRE 1 PUI Zey hL REBIS FRONT HEAD ERT 25 CA ial A AI D HAE 2 MEH OA IETS SBS IL HEAD BERT Change the setting value For copy example j Decrease the setting value For copy example k Increase the setting value Amount of change per step 0 08 mm Changez la valeur de r glage Pour de copie j Diminuez la valeur de r glage Pour de copie Augmentez la
333. isplay Description Copy Count Count value of copy Printer Count Count value of printer Fax Count Count value of fax Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Description Resets all of the counts back to zero Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE 3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared CAN NOT EXECUTE is displayed if the count cannot be cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 90 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts Purpose To check the machine life counts Method 1 Press the start key The current machine life counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U931 Setting the automatic toner install Description Sets automatic toner installation on or off when power is turned on Purpose Changed to off when deactivating automatic toner installation Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Automatic toner install function O
334. isplayed 1 3 21 2K5 Maintenance Description item No 0034 Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line Purpose 1 3 22 Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description LSU OUT TOP LSU OUT LEFT Leading edge registration adjustment Center line adjustment Adjustment Leading edge registration adjustment Select the item to be adjusted 1 Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from MP tray 10 0 to 0 0 1 mm MPT L when large size paper is used 30 0 LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from cassette 10 0 to 0 0 1 mm CAS L when large size paper is used 30 0 LSUOUT TOP Duplex mode second 10 0 to 0 0 1 mm DUP L when large size paper is used 30 0 LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from MP tray 10 0 to 0 0 1 mm MPT S when small size paper is used 30 0 LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from cassette 10 0 to 0 0 1 mm CAS S when small size paper is used 30 0 LSUOUT TOP Duplex mode second 10 0 to 0 0 1 mm DUP S when small size paper is used 30 0 Large size 218
335. isplayed 1 3 38 Setting the economy mode Description Sets the level in the economy mode Purpose To increase or decrease the image density in the eco print mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting ECO MODE Exposure is toner economy mode 0 to 100 60 Increasing the setting makes the image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode which is activated by pressing the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U081 Adjusting the correct exposure Description Adjusts the correct exposure in text and photo mode text mode or photo mode Purpose To be executed as required Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting MIX ADJ Adjusts the correct exposure in text and photo mode 3 to 3 0 TEXT ADJ Adjusts the correct exposure in text mode 3 to 3 0 PHOTO ADJ Adjusts the correct exposure in photo mode 3 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the image darker decr
336. isplayed Adjusting laser power output Description Adjusts the laser output power Purpose Performed when the quality of dots lines or low density has dropped Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select Set Density EmitTime Dot 3 Select the item Display Description 0 100 LSU laser output 100 1 90 LSU laser output 90 2 80 LSU laser output 80 3 70 LSU laser output 70 Initial setting 0 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 82 Setting the image processing mode Description Sets the detection level for scanning printed matter outputted with the confidential document guard function Also sets the process PDF images are rotated Purpose To change the detection level when the confidential document guard is not printed well for detection in scan ning Also changes the process of how PDF images are rotated Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description Conf Doc Detection Confidential document guard detection level PDF Rotate Processing the rotation of PDF images Setting Conf Doc Detection 1 Change the setting value using or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Conf Doc Confidential document guard detection 1to5 1 Detection level A smaller v
337. itch 2 LSW2 Paper size length switch 1 PLSW1 Paper size length switch 2 PLSW2 Turns the AC power on and off Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover 1 is opened Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 1 Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 2 Detects lift reaching the upper limit in cassette 1 Detects lift reaching the upper limit in cassette 2 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 1 Detects the length of paper in the cassette 2 Detects the width of paper in the cassette 1 Detects the width of paper in the cassette 2 Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray Detects the length of paper on the MP tray Detects the width of paper on the MP tray Controls feed clutch 1 drive timing 2 2 3 2K5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Feed switch 2 2 Controls feed clutch 2 drive timing Feed switch 3 Controls feed clutch 3 drive timing MP feed switch MPFSW Controls MP feed clutch drive timing Home position switch HPSW Detects the optical system in the home position Original detection switch ODSW Operates the original size detection sensor Original size sensor OSS Detects the size of the
338. ken feedshift switch or job separator eject switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item 0031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch job separator eject switch 16 A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying jam in feed shift section Jam code 52 Check if the feedshift sole noid malfunctions Run maintenance item U033 and select the feedshift solenoid on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the feedshift solenoid Check see page 1 4 42 Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 42 17 A paper jam in the duplex section is indi cated during copying jam in duplex paper conveying section 1 Jam code 60 Broken
339. l unit di alimentazione della carta assicurarsi di spegnere l interruttore principale di alimentazione della macchina e scollegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a muro della rete elettrica DUAR E EE H Fo RBA HG AD EEE NA Ja RET E BSR AR TET OST VY CW BG PILLS RYO IT AAR 7 4 SBAIL BA y F OFF ICL BRS TZ Zl CP Precaution for unpacking Hold the positions shown in the figure and remove the paper feeder from the outer case Pr caution pour le d ballage Saisir les emplacements indiqu s sur Pillustration et retirer le bureau papier du boitier ext rieur Precauciones para el desembalaje Sujete por las posiciones indicadas en la figura y desmonte el alimentador de papel de la caja de embalaje VorsichtsmaBnahme beim Auspacken Halten Sie den Papiereinzug an den in der Abbildung gezeigten Stellen und heben Sie ihn aus dem u eren Karton heraus Precauzioni per il disinballaggio Mantenere le posizioni indicate nella figura e rimuovere l unit di alimentazione della carta dall involucro esterno FAM AES Bla EAR RARO BARS 4 7 A b ONL ERR TIT DILO HF
340. la memoria DIMM opzionale J nello slot della memoria 3 al livello inferiore FLS Installare con il lato IC rivolto verso il basso Inserirla nella direzione della freccia finch non scatta in posizione 3 Sostituire il coperchio 2 utilizzando 1 vite 1 Procedere con il punto 4 a pagina 5 KATH DIMM 1 REIH DIMM J dO FRE FLS WA edd 3 SEIN IC WEH F Both A BEE WEN TS o 1 1 HR 2 MATES 34 E0928 4 2b 2 AY DIMM ERM AF SV avoreyY DIMM J Z FEE FLS Ay 3 CHO HITS AISI DF vy ERT SE CRIMINAL 3 EX DIA C WA 2 Zm V LO fF Do 5 x V FJIB 4 SHES B Installing the memory DIMM lt 30 ppm Monochrome machine gt 1 Remove 2 screws 1 and then remove the cover 2 Installation de la m moire DIMM lt 30 ppm Machines monochromes gt 1 D posez les 2 vis 1 puis enlevez le couvercle 2 Instalaci n de la memoria DIMM lt 30 ppm Maquinas monocromaticas gt 1 Quite 2 tornillos 1 y despu s desmonte la cubierta 2 Installation der DIMM Speichermodule lt 30 ppm Monochrommaschinen gt 1 Entfernen Sie 2 Schrauben 1 und nehmen Sie dann die Abdeckung 2 ab Installazione della memoria DIMM lt 30 ppm solo per le macchine gt 1 Rimuovere 2 viti 1 e quindi rimuovere il coperchio 2 SCR AR DIMM lt 30 SU ALAS gt 1 2 AR 1 RR
341. lay 3 Relay 1131 5 1 24VSL 3 MPFLENGTH 13 2 2 2 MPPLSW Key card 212 H 412 KEYCN NC 4 5VSL 12 HE Connector 1 1 37 connector 73 313 3 GND GND 5 Key counter 2717 i KEYENBN 1 1 115 5VSL MPFFECL 11 11 1 Relay 2 option 7 YC29 2 HH cometas Ft MPFCL 7 17 1 1 TXD 2 MPFPAPCL 9 1 Relay 2 1 RXD 3 ZST 5 8 M 1 MPPFCL NC 4 3 GND 5 GND TY 7 E 7 3 3 MPFPAPS 66 8 6 2 2 MPPSW pa AAA YC28 5VSL 5 5 3 1 1 5VSL 1 1 4 VPP 2 LSU GND 1 RLSOLN WRSO 3 MPFSIZE2 2 SLSOLN WRSI 4 MPFSIZE1 MPPWSW 3 SCLK SCK 5 l 5 5 3 1 3 1 5vsL 1 MPFSIZEO mu 4 LOPSDI ERSTN 6 PON 2 2 2 ww PDPWB 1 NA 5 LOPSDO GND 7 H scwp 1 3 113 5 1 Bult in finisher LOPRDY 1 YC2 1 8 GND YC27 oa AMS 9 5VSL 33 3V 1 1 10 GND VPP 2 1 11 GND WRSO 3 Yc12 12 24VSL WRSI 4 5VSL 12 12 TL 13 24VSL SCK 5 THVDRN 1111 2 12 ERSTN 6 1 THVADJC 10 Po 1 3 3 GND 7 1 SHVISELN 9 414 21 Lo DHVADJC 8 4 5 5 1 2 GND 7 6 6 2 YC36 1 GND 6 H 7 7 HVPWB 3 MHVDRN 5 8 8 4 4 PDN 111 SHVDRN 4 9 9 5 PTAO GND 212 612 SGND DHVCLKC 3 10 10 6 PTAS OUTPEN 313 5 3 OUTPEN DHVSRUP 2 11 11 7 GND SAMPLEN 474 414 SAMPLEN 24VIL2 1 0 12 12 8 33V VDOP 5 5 VDON eee VOOR 9 PRO Laser diode 5VSL 717 7 5VSL Eject unit
342. le count Less then 420 mm 2 Legal Single count 356 mm or less 3 Folio Single count Less the 330 mm Billing counting timing Temperature machine inside Temperature machine outside Relative temperature machine out side Absolute temperature machine out side 1 3 15 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U000 Description Supplement Fixed assets number Job complete judgment timeout time setting for local interface Media type attributes Weight settings 1 to 28 Not used 18 19 20 0 Light 1 Normal 1 2 Normal 2 3 Normal 3 4 Heavy 1 5 Heavy 2 6 Heavy 3 7 Extra Heavy Fuser settings 0 High 1 Middle 2 Low 3 Vellum Duplex settings 0 Disable 1 Enable RFID information RFID reader writer version information Maintenance information Drum serial number Black Cyan Magenta Yellow Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode Purpose To exit the maintenance mode Method Press the start key The normal copy mode is entered 1 3 16 Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport position in which the
343. leep mode when the value is between 1 and 4 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 68 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the paper feed location for the printer Two or more cassette can be selected Display Description CASSETTE 1 Cassette 1 CASSETTE 2 Cassette 2 CASSETTE 3 Cassette 3 optional paper feeder CASSETTE 4 Cassette 4 optional paper feeder When an optional paper feed device is not installed the corresponding count is not displayed 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U342 Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location Purpose According to user request sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Sets res
344. lieren der Papierf rdereinheit 10 Die Papierf rdereinheit A von der Vorderseite der Maschine einf hren und nach links schieben 11 Die Papierf rdereinheit A mit zwei Stiften befestigen Vorn Den gro en Stift L verwenden Hinten Den kleinen Stift M verwenden Montaggio dell unit di trasporto della carta 10 Inserite l unit di trasporto della carta A dal lato anteriore della macchina e fatelo scivolare verso sinistra 11 Fissate l unit di trasporto della carta A utilizzando due perni Lato anteriore utilizzate il perno grande L Lato posteriore utilizzate il perno piccolo M dex E IR f 10 SY o 11 F A L HEEL 10 5 b ARRABAL ANA TA ETS 11 5553 v amp CLz24clSxE 2 Bill LA L fill vo Releasing the lever holding plate 12 Loosen the screw 18 of the paper conveying unit A and release the lever holding plate 19 in the direction of arrow 13 Tighten the screw 18 Lib ration de la plaque de support de levier 12 Desserrez la vis 18 de l unit de transport du papier A et lib rez la plaque de support de levier 19 dans le sens de la fl che 13 Resserrez la vis 18 Aflojado de la placa de soporte de palanca 12 Afloje el tornillo 18 de la unidad de transporte de papel A
345. lkabel 4 in die Ger tebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschlie en Das mitgelieferte Modularsteckerkabel B f r die 100 V 120 V Australien oder China Modelle verwenden eines separaten Telefons zu verhindern Sigillare il terminale 3 Pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con alcol e fare aderire la guarnizione terminale C I terminale del telefono sulla scheda a circuiti FAX installata su OPT2 non disponibile invalido Sigillare il terminale saldamente per prevenire a un utente di Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 4 Inserire il cavo connettore modulare 4 nel terminale della linea e quindi collegare l altro terminale alla linea del telefono Per modelli da 100 V 120 V Australia o Cina utilizzare il cavo connettore modulare B in dotazione collegare un telefono separato LET EH 3 FRAP EER He TRER ZETE OPT2 AU AN EA RT RO A TRAER i BE AU SON ONE T REL EE 27 ILO RE U ft UT 3 TEL 277 ML JV AHO EIT 5 OPT2 ZH 0 Abit Te FAX SEARO TEL AR HY 125 2 PMR CIMT IT Wan amp Bee L 72 X SEREH HIF 2 E 13 4 MFP ERES EE ARA 2 M T4355 d Be HER 100 V 120 V HKALE Ee et
346. ller Check Replace Replace if a problem occurs P 1 5 41 Heat roller separation claw Maintenance part location Check Clean Replace User call Clean with alcohol Replace if claw is deformed Points and cautions P 1 5 40 Eject section Section Eject roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol Switchback roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol Eject pulley Check Clean Clean with alcohol Feed pulley Maintenance part location Check Clean User call Clean with alcohol Points and cautions Duplex section Section Upper duplex feed roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol Lower duplex feed roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol Duplex feed pulley Maintenance part location Check User call Clean with alcohol Points and cautions Covers Covers Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Original platen Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth 2 4 5 2K5 1 Section Maintenance part location User call 300K Points and cautions Other 2 4 6 Right filter Check Clean Check Clean Vacuum Ozone filter 1 Replace Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets P 1 5 51 Ozone filter 2 Replace Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets P 1 5 52 Image q
347. lo inferiore FLS 55 50 ppm Installare con il lato IC rivolto verso il basso Inserirla nella direzione della freccia finch non scatta in posizione 3 Ricollocare il coperchio superiore posteriore 2 2 utilizzando le 9 viti 1 e quindi ricollocare il coperchio del filtro 2 1 Procedere con il punto 4 a pagina 5 2 DIMM REEE DIMM J 2 HH FLS lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 gt FLS lt 55 50 gt Qo Perd 3 E TC ETE TET Ro VERO GEAR AMES 3 9 PUR 1 E sib 2 2 RAR a AREA 2 10 HITR 5 WEIS 4 2 AY DIM D EK Zya DAY DIM HEY FLS lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 gt FE FLS lt 55 50 gt DAEVAR y 3 INO S IC MTARFA E 5 3 EXA DIRT EHS 2 2 nl 0 SEU TEE Z AIA S 2 1 EA HY HIS 5 N V FJIB 4 Ed Remove the cover 4 Remove two screws 4 and then remove OPT1 cover 5 Retirer le couvercle 4 Retirer les deux vis 4 puis le couvercle OPT1 5 Desmonte la cubierta 4 Quite dos tornillos 4 y desmonte la cubierta OPT1 5 Entfernen der Abdeckung Install the FAX circuit board 5 Insert the FAX circuit board A along the groove in OPT1 and secure the board with two screws 4 that have been removed in step 4 Do
348. lor 1 Apoye el finalizador de documentos A sobre un lado saque los ocho tornillos 1 y saque dos piezas de herrajes 2 Die folgenden Schritte 1 bis 5 gelten nur f r Vollfarbenmaschinen 1 Den Dokument Finisher A auf die Seite legen die acht Schrauben 1 entfernen und die zwei Befestigungsteile 2 abnehmen seguenti passi da 1 a 5 sono solo per le macchine a colori 1 Collocare la finitrice di documenti A lateralmente rimuovere le otto viti 1 e rimuovere i due pezzi di raccordo 2 225 1 5 UE LARRETA A BEI BCE SF 8 MEE 1 WF 2 P bile 2 LANE 1 5 X 77v 22 2 002 1 Fea Aw hZa4m x EBA ICIS IEZ 1 8 RENAL AEE 2 2 Ae I 0 Hb TOSPEESESUHEAK JERRI AE 2 To align the document finisher with the paper outlet of the MFP slide the legs of the document finisher A to the uppermost positions indicated in the illustration attach the two pieces of fittings 2 that have been removed in step 1 and secure them using the eight screws 1 Pour aligner le retoucheur de document sur la sortie de papier du MFP faire glisser les pieds du retoucheur de document A jusqu aux positions les plus hautes indiqu es sur l illustration fixer les deux pi ces de fixation 2 qui avaient t retir es auparavant l tape 1 et les fixer l aide des huit vis 1 Para alinear el finalizador de documen
349. low temperature and low humidity an abrupt change in the environmental temperature and cool or hot direct air Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowance inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as mer cury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine based organic solvents Select a well ventilated location Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine Machine front 1000 mm 39 3 8 Machine rear 100 mm 3 15 16 Machine right 300 mm 11 13 16 Machine left 400 mm 15 3 4 100 mm 3 15 16 Y lt 2400 mm 15 3 4 gt gt 300 mm 11 13 16 2 1000 mm 39 3 8 Figure 1 2 1 Installation dimensions 1 2 1 2K5 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation 1 Installation procedure 1 2 2 4 Start b Y Y Unpack Install other optional devices Y Y Remove the eject spacer and tapes Connect the power cord Y Install the optional paper feeder Y Y Installing toner Release the scanner pins Y Y Setting the delivery date maintenance item U278 Release of cassette lift plate Y Y Output an own status report maint
350. lts will be displayed Confirm the count and press Close Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The counter is reset Each Job Accounting Resetting the Counter 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and Check of Each Job Accounting Select the account to check the count Press Detail Press Check at the function to check the count The results will be displayed Confirm the count and press Close Press Execute of Counter Reset to reset the counter Press Yes on the screen to confirm the reset The counter will be reset Counting by Paper Size 1 RO If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting Change of Count by Paper Size Change of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then On Select the paper size Press Media Type to specify media type Select the media type and press OK Press Close Printing an Accounting Report 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting
351. m to be set 3 Change the setting using the keys Display Setting Setting range Initial setting LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330 WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 24 Checking the operation of the fan motors Description Drives the fan motors Description To check the operation of the fan motors Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the fan motor to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Operation Right Fan Developing fan motor DEVFM is turned on Rear Fan Fuser fan motor FUFM is turned on Conveying Fan Paper conveying fan motor 1 2 PCFM1 2 are turned on Power Source Fan Power source fan motor PSFM are turned on Eject Fan Eject fan motor EFM is turned on ALL All fan motor are turned on 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper Description Adjusts the deflection in the paper Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly or if the copy paper is Z folded Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted
352. main power switch off then on and execute initialization using maintenance item U021 Error codes Codes Description ERROR 01 Configuration initialization error ERROR 02 Counter initialization error ERROR 03 One touch initialization error ERROR 04 Panel program initialization error ERROR 05 Event log initialization error ERROR 06 Account initialization error ERROR 07 Address book initialization error ERROR 08 Department initialization error ERROR 09 Document box initialization error ERROR 0a Permissibility initialization error ERROR 0b Job log initialization error ERROR 20 Engine initialization error ERROR 40 Scanner initialization error HDD formatting Description Initializes the HDD In addition the following settings are also initialized by initializing the HDD System menu user login administration job accounting address book one touch keys and document box etc shortcuts and panel programs Initializing the HDD will cause installed applications to be deleted Reinstall applications as necessary after initializing the HDD Purpose To initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD after shipping Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key to initialize the hard disk 4 Turn the main power switch off and on 1 3 19 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U030 Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor Purpose
353. manual de servicio Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals Bevor diese Einstellung durchgef hrt wird muss der Winkel der Vorder und Hinterkante eingestellt werden siehe die Seiten 7 und 10 1 Die Vorderkante eines Originals f r die Einstellung einschneiden wie in der Abbildung gezeigt 2 Das Original f r die Einstellung mit der Fl che F und R nach oben in den DP einlegen 3 Den Wartungsmodus aktivieren und den Wartungsposten U411 ausf hren DP FACE UP wahlen INPUT dr cken und dann die Start dr cken Die Einstellungen von DP Vergr Rerung DP Vorderkanten Timing und DP Mittellinie werden automatisch durchgef hrt 4 Wenn Complete angezeigt wird sind die Einstellungen ordnungsgem abgeschlossen Falls w hrend der automatischen Einstellungen eine St rung auftritt wird XX XX wird durch einen Fehlercode ersetzt angezeigt Die Original Einlegeposition berpr fen und die Schritte 2 bis 3 wiederholen bis Complete angezeigt wird Einzelheiten sind der Wartungsanleitung zu entnehmen Regolazione automatica eseguita con l originale Prima di eseguire questa regolazione verificare che l angolo del bordo principale e l angolo del bordo di uscita siano regolati vedere le pagine 7 e 10 1 Tagliare il bordo di uscita di un originale per la regolazione come si vede nel disegno 2 Collocare l originale per la regolazione nel DP con la superficie F e R rivolta verso l alto 3 Entrare in modalit manutenzione e avvia
354. matic grayscale 0 to 99900 ADJUST 100 adjustment The setting can be changed by 100 per step Clearing 1 Select the item to be cleared To clear all items select ALL CLEAR 2 Press the clear key 3 Press the start key The setting value is cleared Setting 1 Select the item to be changed 2 Enter the setting value using the or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 61 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U251 1 3 62 Checking clearing the maintenance count Description Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count and automatic grayscale adjustment count Purpose To verify the maintenance counter count and automatic grayscale count Also to clear the count during main tenance service Method Press the start key The maintenance count is displayed Display Description Setting range Maintenance Count A Count value for maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 COUNT GRAY ADJUST Automatic grayscale adjustment count 0 to 9999999 Clearing 1 Select the item to be cleared To clear all items select ALL CLEAR 2 Press the clear key 3 Press the start key The count is cleared Setting 1 Select the item to be changed 2 Enter the count using the numeric keys 3 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop k
355. mode ON OFF Drum small rotation mode OFF Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting fan mode Description Sets the time of period cooling fan motor 1 is driven Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting FAN1 Time of period the fan is driven after printing is O to 250 s 45 completed 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 27 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U061 Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on Purpose To check the exposure lamp Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select CCD 3 Press the start key The lamp lights 4 To turn the lamp off press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 28 Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position of the scanner Purpose Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate To prevent this problem the shading position s
356. modello di prova 15 Se la distanza tra le linee 14 e 15 supera il valore di riferimento continuare con il passo 19 Valore di riferimento fino a 2 0 mm 18 MUA VARA puc 14 Emp EL Seg ZR 15 AE SE 19 WOES 22 Omm EA FF 1 18 9 4 0 14 PODER O Gt lt gt 2 Omm LAF LFALRNE YOEYA FA VY b AMET PII 19 0 33 x 725 Adjusting the center line 19 Pull the cassette out and loosen the screw 16 of the adjusting plate R glage de la ligne m diane 19 Tirer le tiroir vers l ext rieur et desserrer la vis 16 de la plaque de r glage Ajuste de la l nea central 19 Abra la bandeja y afloje el tornillo 16 de la placa de ajuste Einstellen der Mittellinie 19 Die Kassette herausziehen und die Schraube 16 der Einstellplatte l sen Regolazione della linea centrale 19 Estrarre il cassetto e allentare la vite 16 della piastra di regolazione FIDE 19 MEERA WEB 14 522 16 4 19 Dey 5 HL MORO EA 1601 ERED D
357. motor problem optional built in finisher C8210 Stapler problem optional document finisher Finisher stapler problem optional built in finisher C8320 Adjustment motor 2 problem optional document finisher C8330 Adjustment motor 1 problem optional document finisher C8350 Roller motor problem optional document finisher 1 4 18 2K5 Contents Slide motor problem optional document finisher Sensor adjusting problem optional document finisher EEPROM problem optional document finisher DP EEPROM error optional DP Measures against the service codes detecting fuser problems If one of the following service codes is detected take actions to clear the cause of the trouble and perform maintenance item U163 to reset the service code Contents Fuser heater break Abnormally high fuser thermistor center temperature Abnormally low fuser thermistor center temperature Abnormally high fuser thermistor edge temperature Abnormally low fuser thermistor edge temperature Zero cross signal error Fuser unit fuse cut problem 1 4 19 2K5 2 Self diagnostic codes Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Fax control PWB system problem Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Main PWB type mismatch error Defective PWB Run m
358. move the inner cover lid 10 Remove two connectors 11 Pull the developing lever Connectors Inner cover lid 12 Remove the screw and remove the drum unit 13 Replace the drum unit and install the unit 14 When the drum unit is replaced with a new one carry out the following procedure 15 Perform maintenance mode U410 Adjust ing the halftone automatically see page 1 3 75 Figure 1 5 60 1 5 32 2K5 2 Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit Procedure 1 Open the front cover Figure 1 5 61 2 Pull the main charger unit Drum unit 3 While pressing the lock lever and remove the main charger unit 4 Replace the main charger unit and install the unit The main charger unit when fully inserted must be set aside towards the drum unit Main charger unit Figure 1 5 62 1 5 33 2K5 3 Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claws Procedure 1 Remove the drum unit see page 1 5 34 2 Remove two screws and remove the lower cleaning seal i 3 Release the inserted parts and remove the drum separation claws 4 Replace the drum separation claws and Install the claws 5 Refit all the removed parts Drum separation claw Lower cleaning seal 1 5 34 Lower cleaning seal
359. n bis sie den Boden erreichen und dann so einstellen dass die Maschine waagerecht steht Regolazione dell altezza 13 Ruotare i quattro piedini regolabili 13 sino a quando vengono a contatto con il pavimento e poi regolarli in modo da livellare la macchina 9 8 13 4 MAIS 13 A LEE LEA 13 4 BOT Z x A 13 EFC BH SEK TER UL MERA RARE Attaching the stays For 110V 120 V and 220 240 V specifications 14 Attach two stays F at the rear side of the paper feeder using an M4 x 20 screw G for each Also attach two stays F at the left side using an M4 x 10 screw H for each Do not attach the stays F at the left side when installing the document finisher Fixation des supports pour sp cifications 110 V 120 V et 220 240 V 14 Fixer deux supports F sur le c t arri re du bureau papier l aide d une vis M4 x 20 G pour chaque support Fixer aussi deux supports F sur le c t gauche a l aide d une vis M4 x 10 pour chaque support Ne pas fixer les supports F sur le c t gauche lors de l installation du retoucheur de document Colocaci n de las bases especificaciones de 110V 120V y 220 240V 14 Coloque las dos bases F en el lado trasero del alimentador de papel utilizando un tornillo M4 x 20 G para cada uno Adem s coloque dos bases F en el lado izquierdo utilizando un tornillo M4 x 10 H para cada u
360. n alcol e poi applicate il sigillo mascherina Eds E fiie C 32 JE K ILO AK Y fb ES DOS 32 7 104 ZREN EU gt Checking the operation 1 Connect the power plug of the machine to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on 2 Make a proof copy in the staple mode to check the finishing and stapling V rification du fonctionnement 1 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension 2 Effectuez une copie de test en mode d agrafage pour v rifier la finition et l agrafage Verificaci n del funcionamiento 1 Conecte el enchufe el ctrico de la m quina en un tomacorriente de la pared y conecte el interruptor principal 2 Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapas para verificar el finalizado y grapado Uberpr fen des Betriebs 1 Den Netzstecker der Maschine in die Steckdose stecken und den Betriebsschalter einschalten 2 Eine Probekopie im Heftermodus anfertigen um die Verarbeitung und Heftung zu berpr fen Verifica di funzionamento 1 Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione della macchina alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e accendere l interruttore principale di alimentazione 2 Nel modo graffatrice eseguite una copia di prova per verificare la cucitura e la rifinitura 1 2 BU Hf SE if Nd ern 1793 ITA o 2 WEFT ELE MURT ITE U
361. n appuyant sur PORT2 et la touche D part dans cet ordre en mode de maintenance U698 et ex cuter le mode de maintenance U600 Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se agreg a OPT2 para inicializar la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX en OPT2 Inicialice el OPT2 presionando PORT2 y la tecla de Inicio en ese orden en el modo de mantenimiento U698 y ejecutando el modo de mantenimiento U600 Wenn die FAX Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugef gt worden ist um die FAX Leiterplatte in OPT2 zu initialisieren initialisieren Dazu PORT2 und die Start Taste im Wartungsmodus U698 in dieser Reihenfolge dr cken und den Wartungsmodus U600 ausf hren Se la scheda a circuiti stata aggiunta all OPT2 per inzializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX nell OPT2 Inizializzare OPT2 premendo PORT2 e il tasto Avvio in questo ordine nel modo di manutenzione U698 ed eseguendo il modo di manutenzione U600 TE OPT2 OPT2 f 3C OPT2 1698 WRA F 2 DAT EE REA 0600 Me v a gt LEYS 0PT2 O FAX SEA VE AVF PY 0698 CIPORT2 A 4 X oJBIC fT AVF Fv AE F 0600 Z UL FAX d MES 5 If ALL is selected in U698 both OPT1 and OPT2 are initialized For details see the service manual Refer to the operation guide to create a FAX Box Si ALL
362. n den mitgelieferten Teilen B F G e H non sono in dotazione Quando si installa il Dual FAX sono necessari A C Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite F 6 ah o CREAR RATIS E E AIR nn Er Ay p x DER 2500036 0 O X AMA S C 38 0 EPA VIF AR DA DME ERS a CES Y BED O CW SE IMPED A Precautions Be sure to turn the MFP switch OFF and unplug the MFP from the power supply before installing the fax system The illustration of the MFP body in the Installation Guide is the 42 52 ppm model Pr cautions Veiller mettre l interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et a d brancher le MFP de la prise secteur avant d installer le systeme fax L illustration du corps du MFP dans le guide d installation correspond au mod le 42 52 ppm Precauciones Asegurese de apagar el MFP colocando el interruptor principal a OFF y desenchufe el MFP del suministro de red el ctrica antes de instalar el sistema de fax La ilustraci n del cuerpo del MFP en la Guia de instalaci n corresponde al modelo de 42 52 ppm VorsichtsmaBnahmen Schalten Sie den Netzschalter des MFP aus und trennen Sie den MFP vom Netz bevor Sie das Faxsystem installieren Die Abbildung des MFP Ger ts in der Installationsanleitung stellt
363. n error ERROR 11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge detection error ERROR 12 Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1 5 error ERROR 13 Maintenance request error ERROR 14 Main scanning direction center line error ERROR 15 Main scanning direction skew 1 5 error ERROR 16 Main scanning direction magnification error ERROR 17 Service call error ERROR 18 DP JAM error ERROR 19 PWB error ERROR 1a Original error Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed 1 3 77 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U425 1 3 78 Setting the target Description Enters the lab values that is indicated on the back of the chart P N 302FZ56990 used for adjustment Also enters the measurement value of the chart P N 302AC68243 used for adjustment Purpose Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment Method 1 2 Select the item to be set Press the start key Display Description CCD DP Entering the target values of the chart P N 302FZ56990 used for adjustment Entering the measurement value of the chart P N 302AC68243 used for adjustment Setting CCD 1 Select the item to be set Display Description N875 N475 N125 CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW RED GREEN BLUE ADJUST ORIGINAL Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment
364. n motor YC6 1 on the power source PWB 1 4 41 2K5 Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 5 The developing fan motor fuser fan motor eject fan motor or paper con veying fan motor 1 2 does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the motor Defective motor Run maintenance item U037 and check if the motor operates when the following terminals on the PWB goes low If not replace the corresponding motor Developing fan motor YC2 6 on the engine PWB Fuser fan motor YC13 2 on the engine PWB Eject fan motor YC37 2 on the engine PWB Paper conveying fan motor 1 YC8 B16 on the engine PWB Paper conveying fan motor 2 YC8 B18 on the engine PWB Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U037 and check if following terminals on the PWB goes low If not replace the engine PWB Developing fan motor YC2 6 on the engine PWB Fuser fan motor YC13 2 on the engine PWB Eject fan motor YC37 2 on the engine PWB Paper conveying fan motor 1 YC8 B16 on the engine PWB Paper conveying fan motor 2 YC8 B18 on the engine PWB 6 The controller fan motor or operation fan motor does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Als
365. na 10 Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 3 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 4 0 mm Para verificar el cambio de tamafio vea la p gina 14 Valor de referencia Dentro de 1 5 96 Para verificar la sincronizaci n del borde inferior vea la p gina 16 Valor de referencia Dentro de 2 0 mm Para verificar la l nea central vea la p gina 18 Valor de referencia Copia simple dentro de 2 0 mm Copia duplex dentro de 3 0 mm Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste puede hacerse un ajuste autom tico del cambio de tama o sincronizaci n del borde superior y l nea central al mismo tiempo Para el ajuste autom tico utilizando el original para el ajuste vea la p gina 20 berpr fen des Bilds vom DP Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchf hren Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgef hrt werden Angaben zur Pr fung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 7 lt Bezugswert gt Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 4 0 mm Angaben zur Pr fung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 10 lt Bezugswert gt Simplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 4 0 mm Angaben zur Pr fung der Vergr erung auf Seite 14 lt Bezugswert gt Innerhalb 1 5 96 Angaben zur Pr fung des Vorderkanten Timings auf Seite 16 lt Bezugswert gt Innerhalb 2 0 mm Angaben zur Pr fung der Mittellinie auf Seite 18 lt Bezugswert gt Simplexkopie innerhalb 2 0 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 3 0 mm
366. nal B y vuelva a colocar vea los pasos 4 y 5 en la p gina 3 Die in Schritt 2 entfernte Abdeckung 7 wieder anbringen Die Originalmatte B abnehmen und wieder anbringen siehe Schritte 4 und 5 auf Seite 3 Reinserire il coperchio 7 rimosso nel passo 2 Rimuovere il coprioriginale B e reinserirlo vedere i passi 4 e 5 a pagina 3 AC 2 Ui P Has 7 AURA ERA ZUR 3 5 HUC E 2 CHV ALIA 7 mM Y NI ORAS gt h B AMALIA IO FIR 4 5 20285 C HE 0 75 3mm 4mm _ 3mm 4mm Make a proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values lt Reference value gt For simplex copying Within 3 0 mm For duplex copying Within 4 0 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 6 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die
367. nd check the cartridge and the sta pling section of the stapler Remove the staple if any Defective stapler section With 5 V DC present at YC2 24 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 19 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high If it does replace the stapler section 28 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying eject sensor stay jam Jam code 83 Document finisher Defective eject sensor With 5 V DC present at CN5 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN5 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the eject sen sor Check if the paper convey ing motor malfunctions Check and remedy Check if the eject roller and eject pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the eject guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 15 2K5 Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 28 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying eject sensor stay jam Jam code 83 Built in finisher Defective paper conveying switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 23 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off Ifit does replace the paper convey
368. nd replace any deformed guide Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place Repair or replace 4 The scanner does not travel Check if the scanner wire is loose Reinstall the scanner wire see page 1 5 19 The scanner motor malfunctions See page 1 4 42 5 Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time 1 4 46 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the separation pulley is worn Replace the separation pulley if it is worn see page 1 5 3 Check if the MP separation pulley is worn Replace the MP separation pulley if it is worn see page 1 5 6 Problem Causes check procedures 2K5 Corrective measures 6 Paper jams Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace any deformed guides Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the contact between the feed roller and feed pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed Clean or replace the press roller Check if the contact between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct Repair if any springs are off the separation claws Check if the contact between the eject roller an
369. ndling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press OK 4 The previous screen appears To set the handling for a different error repeat steps 2 and 3 Paper Output 1 Press Next of Paper Output 2 Press Change of Copy Custom Box Printer FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2 3 Select Output Tray For Finisher Tray select Face Up print surface up or Face Down print surface down as the paper orientation at output 4 Press OK Orientation Confirmation 1 Press Change of Orientation Confirmation 2 Select the default for Off or On 3 Press OK Function Defaults 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Orientation 2 Select Top Edge Top or Top Edge Left for the default 3 Press OK 2K5 Continuous Scan 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Continuous Scan 2 Select Off or On for the default Use the proce dure below to select the default quality setting for originals 3 Press OK Original Image 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Original Image 2 Select the Text Photo Photo Text for OCR or Printed Document as the default 3 Press OK Scan Resolution 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults and then Change of Scan Resolution 2 Select the default resolution 3 Press OK Color Selection 1 Press cursor
370. necte el conector 3 del cable de se al en la m quina Anschlie en des Signalkabels 6 Den Stecker 3 des Signalkabels an die Maschine anschlie en Collegamento del cavo del segnale 6 Collegare il connettore 3 del cavo del segnale alla macchina ERES 6 ER SRIK 3 Adhering the labels 7 After cleaning with alcohol adhere caution label Face Up F and label A Operation procedure G or label B H of the corresponding language within the reference value range Apposition des tiquettes 7 Apr s avoir nettoy la surface a l alcool apposez l tiquette de pr cautions Face vers le Haut F et l tiquette A Proc dure d utilisation G ou l tiquette B H dans la langue voulue dans les limites de la plage des valeurs de r f rence Pegado de etiquetas 7 Despu s de limpiar con alcohol pegue la etiqueta de precauci n Cara Arriba F y la etiqueta A Procedimiento de funcionamiento G o la etiqueta B H del correspondiente idioma dentro del rango del valor de referencia Anbringen der Aufkleber 7 Nach der Reinigung der Klebefl chen mit Alkohol den Warnaufkleber Vorderseite Oben F den Aufkleber A Bedienungsverfahren G oder den Aufkleber B H der entsprechenden Sprache im Bezugswertebereich anbringen Applicazione delle etichette 7 Dopo aver pulito con alcol applicare l etichetta di avvertenza Faccia Ins F e l etichetta Procedure di funzioname
371. nement 21 puis serrez la vis 20 pour fixer le support de crochet D Instalaci n de la tabla de proceso de finalizador 14 Afloje el tornillo 20 aprox 3 giros No gire demasiado el tornillo 20 porque puede caerse dentro de la m quina 15 Encaje el soporte de gancho D en el tornillo 20 16 Encaje el orificio del soporte de gancho D en la saliente de proyecci n 21 y apriete el tornillo 20 para fijar el soporte de gancho D Installieren der Finisher Druckablage 14 Die Schraube 20 um etwa 3 Umdrehungen l sen Die Schraube 20 nicht zu weit l sen weil sie sonst in die Maschine fallen kann 15 Den Hakenhalter D an der Schraube 20 anbringen 16 Das Loch des Hakenhalters D auf den Positioniervorsprung 21 ausrichten und dann die Schraube 20 zur Befestigung des Hakenhalters D festziehen Installazione del tabella di elaborazione del finitore 14 Allentate di 3 giri circa la la vite 20 Non girate troppo la vite 20 altrimenti potrebbe cadere nella macchina 15 Montate il supporto a gancio D sulla vite 20 16 Montate il foro del supporto a gancio D sulla posizione 21 e poi stringete la vite 20 per fissare il supporto a gancio D ZERO DANA 14 FAZ 1 454 20 413 A AAA 43225 20 GUS EUR AAA AR 15 HEBE D HA 1 MERZ Q0 16 21 AE 0 FLAN FA 1 RAE 20 74 F LA ORY tlt 14 EX 20 1 44420 5 613 E
372. ng 1 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 5 2K5 3 Contents of the maintenance mode items Maintenance item No U000 Description Outputting an own status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items and paper jam and service call occurrences Outputs the event log or service status page Also sends output data to the USB memory Printing a report is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when Pause All Print Jobs is pressed to halt printing Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items or paper jam or service call occurrences Before initial izing or replacing the backup RAM output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output Display Output list MAINTENANCE USER STATUS SERVICE STATUS List of the current settings of the maintenance modes Outputs the user status page Outputs the service status page EVENT NETWORK STATUS ALL Outputs the all reports Outputs the event log Outputs the network status page 3 Press the start key The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output When A4 Letter paper is available a report of this size is output If not specify the paper feed location When output is complete the screen for selecting an item is displayed The
373. ng value per step FRONT Scanner center line 40 to 40 0 0 08 mm ROTATE Scanner center line rotate copying 40 to 40 0 0 08 mm Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Scanner center line Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 11 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U067 403 0072 U404 P 1 3 72 P 1 3 36 P 1 3 73 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 31 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U068 1 3 32 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP Performs the test copy at the four scanning positions after adjusting Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed Setting 1 Press the start key Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step DP READ Starting po
374. ngrese en el tem de mantenimiento U070 para ajustar Para el primer lado Seleccione MOTOR ADJ FRONT Para el segundo lado Seleccione MOTOR ADJ BACK Einstellen der DP VergroRerung 1 Den Wartungsmodus aktivieren und den Wartungsposten U070 zur Einstellung ausf hren F r erste Seite MOTOR ADJ FRONT w hlen F r zweite Seite MOTOR ADJ BACK w hlen Regolazione dell ingrandimento DP 1 Entrare in modalit manutenzione e avviare la voce di manutenzione U070 per la regolazione Per il primo lato selezionare MOTOR ADJ FRONT Per il secondo lato selezionare MOTOR ADJ BACK 133 DP 25 2518 1 WEA 0070 RET ATAR HE MOTOR ADJ FRONT WEE MOTOR ADJ BACK o DP S Bia 1 10070 EY b LRA RIAS OWES MOTOR ADJ FRONT HIRT 5 EMOA MOTOR ADJ BACK Z RRT A X X x 5195419 Change the setting value For copy example h Increase the setting value For copy example i Decrease the setting value Amount of change per step 0 21 mm Changez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie h Augmentez la valeur de r glage Pour l exemple de copie i Diminuez la valeur de r glage Quantit de changement par pas 0 21 mm Cambie el valor de configuraci n Para la copia de muestra h aumente el valor de configuraci n Para la co
375. nillos de sujeci n M4 x 10 F de modo que los espacios frontal y trasero entre el piso y el ret n del carril C sean de aproximadamente 8 0 mm a Cuando se utiliza el alimentador de papel de 3000 hojas b Cuando se utiliza el alimentador de papel de 500 hojas x 2 Bringen Sie die Schienenhalterung C am MFP mit zwei M4 x 10 Verbundschrauben F so an daB die vorderen und hinteren Abstande zwischen Boden und Schienenhalterung C etwa 8 0 mm betragen a Bei Verwendung des Papiervorschubs f r 3000 Bl tter b Bei Verwendung des Papiervorschubs f r 500 Bl tter x 2 Assicurare il fermo della guida C all MFP utilizzando le due viti di serraggio M4 x 10 F in modo che la distanza anteriore e posteriore tra il pavimento ed il fermo della guida C sia di circa 8 0 mm a Quando si utilizza l alimentatore di carta da 3000 fogli b Quando si utilizza l alimentatore di carta da 500 fogli x 2 MA 14 EARE E EG C E JIN C 8 0 ZK a 3000 sk HEAR b EH 500 x 2 MARY 2 piti 256 8 0mm 272 2 E 912 VERT Ze MFP ARIZ E AMA X147 F P 2A CHET 5 a 3000 fp 23 7 4 EDGAR b 500 2 37 4 08 G 10 Insert the guide rail D into the bottom of the document finisher A 10 Ins rer la glissi re D en bas du retoucheur de document A
376. nnector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC12 5 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if main charging takes place when CN1 8 on the high volt age PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB 11 No developing bias is output The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC12 2 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item 0101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if developing bias is output when CN1 11 on the high volt age PWB goes low while maintenance item 0101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB 12 Transfer charging is not performed The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC12 11 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging
377. nnnm enne 1 6 2 1 6 3 Remarks on main and engine PWB 1 6 2 2 1 Mechanical construction 2 1 1 2 1 2 Paper feed sectioni ier a cota di 2 1 1 1 Cassette paper feed 2 4 11 0 00000 000000000000 nnn nn cnn cnn anar cnn nana nr ener nete 2 1 1 2 MP tray paper feed section comico doi 2 1 3 Mainicharging SECO La E ERE E A 2 1 4 2 13 0 reia 2 1 5 1 Mage scanner Secta A 2 1 5 2 Laser scanner Section isis 2 1 7 2 14 Developing ECN ii d a 2 1 9 1 Single component developing 2 1 11 2 1 5 Transfer and separation 2 1 12 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing 2 1 13 2 127 PUSERSECHON P E 2 1 14 2 1 8 Eject and switchback 77 2 1 16 2 1 9 D plex Section 2 5 o Tei iE Etiquette a ee 2 1 17 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex 2 1 19 2 2 Electrical Parts Layout 2 221 Electrical parts l yoUut 1 etti AAA luta 2 2 1 AQUI EP 2 2 1 2 Switches and sernsors cuicos cli 2 2 3 S MOLOMS 25 faces 2 2 5 4 Clutches and Solenoids T e rea a a a
378. no No instale las bases F en el lado izquierdo cuando instale el finalizador de documentos Anbringen der Stiltzen F r 110 V 120 V und 220 240 V Spezifikationen 14 Die zwei St tzen F mit je einer M4 x 20 Schraube G auf der R ckseite des Papiereinzugs befestigen Au erdem zwei St tzen F mit je einer M4 x 10 Schraube auf der linken Seite befestigen Bei Installation des Dokumentenfinishers die St tzen F nicht auf der linken Seite anbringen Inserimento delle sospensioni specifiche solo per 110 V 120 V e 220 240 V 14 Inserire le due sospensioni F nel retro dell unit di alimentazione della carta utilizzando una vite M4 x 20 G per ciascuna Inserire inoltre due sospensioni F nel lato sinistro utilizzando una vite M4 x 10 H per ciascuna Non inserire le sospensioni F nel lato sinistro quando si installa la finistrice di documenti Bale e fF B ed EAF 110V 120V 220 240V 14 2 1 438822 MA x 20 G ZEE TE DEAE LAY 2 Ab 1 4 MA X 10 2 EA ARETES D ASEH ALS SOE U 17 10V 120V 220 240V EDA 14 A M4 X 20 0 4 1 ACHR AIL F EA 7 4 HI 2 ATIC HT S 10 0 4 amp 1 ACER F 2037 4 FE fill 2 PNC RU 5 2 6 02 F ORY Checking the center line 15 Connect the power plug of the machine to
379. not directly touch the FAX circuit board A terminal Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board A Direct the label 6 on to the FAX circuit board A as indicated in the illustration and insert the board along the groove Installer la carte a circuits FAX 5 Ins rer la carte a circuits FAX A le long de la rainure dans 1 et la fixer l aide des deux vis 4 retir es l tape 4 Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte circuits FAX A Tenir les parties inf rieure et sup rieure de la carte a circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour ins rer la carte a circuits FAX A Orienter l tiquette 6 de la carte a circuits FAX A comme illustr et ins rer la plaquette le long de la rainure Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax 5 Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax A a lo largo de la ranura de OPT1 y aseg rela con los dos Ei tornillos 4 que ha quitado en el paso 4 No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos del fax A Sujete las partes superior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax A Oriente la etiqueta 6 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustraci n e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura nbauen der FAX Leiterplatte 5 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen un
380. not start within specified time 30 s Secondary paper feed of arrival of paper at the registration section does not start Paper 10 Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within the speci 1864 ms feed No paper feed from fied time of paper feed clutch 1 PFCL1 turning on the section cassette 1 clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 11 Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within the speci 2121 ms No paper feed from fied time of paper feed clutch 2 PFCL2 turning on the cassette 2 clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 12 Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within the speci No paper feed from fied time of PF paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on optional cassette 3 the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time Left cover 3 is opened in prior to feed switch 3 FSW3 is turned on 13 The PF feed switch PFFSW does not turn on within the No paper feed from specified time of PF paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 turn optional cassette 4 ing on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time Left cover 3 is opened in prior to the PF feed switch PFFSW is turned on 14
381. nsert the FAX circuit board A along the groove in OPT2 and secure the board with two screws 1 that have been removed in step 1 Installer la carte circuits FAX i W L f y 24 Do not directly touch the FAX circuit board A terminal Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board A Direct the label 3 on to the FAX circuit board A toward left side and insert the board along the groove Ne pas toucher directement la borne de la carte Retirer le couvercle 1 Retirer les deux vis 1 puis le couvercle OPT2 2 Desmonte la cubierta 2 Ins rer la carte a circuits FAX A le long de la rainure dans l OPT2 et la fixer a l aide des deux vis 1 retir es l tape 1 circuits FAX A Tenir les parties inf rieure et sup rieure de la carte circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour ins rer la carte circuits FAX A Orienter l tiquette 3 de la carte circuits FAX A comme illustr et ins rer la plaquette le long de la rainure No toque directamente el terminal de la tarjeta 1 Quite dos tornillos 1 y desmonte la cubierta OPT2 2 Entfernen der Abdeckung 1 Die beiden Schrauben 1 herausdrehen und Abdeckung OPT2 2 abnehmen Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax 2 Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax A a lo largo de la ranura de OPT2 y aseg rela con los dos tornillos 1 que ha
382. nstalled Setting KEY DEVICE 1 Select the optional counter to be installed Display Description KEY CARD The key card is installed KEY COUNTER The key counter is installed OFF Not installed Initial setting OFF 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Setting MESSAGE 1 Select the KEY DEVICE or COIN VENDOR 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on 1 3 55 2K5 Maintenance Bagcription item No U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender Also sets the details for coin vender operation such as mode and unit price This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary 0207 Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 COUNTO is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights 3 As the keys lined in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bot tom the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1 When all the keys in that line ar
383. ntenance T Toner container 00 Black M Maintenance kit 00 MK 671 Example TOO 1 The toner container has been replaced once 1 3 11 2K5 Maintenance item No U000 Description Service status page 1 Service Status Page MFP 2 09 08 2009 12 00 3 4 5 1 Firmware version 2K5_2000 000 000 2009 08 09 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX PT tS Controller Information Memory status 6 Total Size 1 0 GB 27 FRPO Status Default Pattern Switch B8 0 Default Font Number C5 10000 C2 100 C3 00000 Time 7 Local Time Zone 01 00 Tokio 8 Date and Time 17 06 2009 08 40 9 Time Server 10 183 53 13 Installed Options 10 Document Processor Installed 11 Paper feeder Cassette 12 Finisher 1000 Finisher 13 Job Sparator Installed 14 Security Kit Not Installed Data Security Kit E Software Type II Digital Dot Coverage 15 Average Usage Page A4 Letter Conversion 16 Total K 1 10 1111111 11 17 Copy K 1 10 1111111 11 18 Printer K 1 10 1111111 11 19 FAX K 1 10 1111111 11 20 Period 03 11 2009 27 10 2009 08 40 21 Last Page 96 1 00 22 FAX Information Slot1 Slot2 23 Rings Normal 3 24 Rings FAX TEL 3 z 25 Rings TAD 3 e MPS error control 26 Option DIMM Size 28 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Figure 1 3 2 1 3 12 2K5 Maintenance item No U000 Description Service status page 2 Service Status Page MF
384. ntenance item No Description U167 Checking clearing the fuser counts Description Displays and clears the fuser counts for checking Purpose To check the fuser count after replacement of the fuser unit Also to clear the counts after replacing unit Method 1 Press the start key The fuser counts is displayed Clearing 1 Select CLEAR 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Setting 1 Change the count using the or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 52 Setting the fuser drive control Description Specifies ON OFF the fuser drive control Purpose Countermeasure against black dots which is caused by toner adhering to the heat roller separation claws Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Fuser drive control ON OFF Fuser drive control OFF Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 1 Description U198 Setting the fuser phase control Description Enables or disables fuser phase control Purpose Turn to OFF to reduce the audible sound that may be generated by the power source PWB Depending on the environment of installation this may cause a voltage drop p
385. ntent of maintenance item 2K5 Initial setting High voltage Setting the main high voltage Setting the other high voltages 26 58 50 89 1 115 91 68 40 92 Checking the drum count Setting separation charger mode MODE3 Checking the drum number Displaying the drum history Developing Initial setting for the developing unit Checking toner motor operation 100 30 100 Setting toner near end mode OFF Setting toner loading operation 0 5 30 Checking sensors for toner Checking the developing drive time Checking the developing count Fuser and cleaning Setting the fuser control temperature 110 165 155 165 0 Resetting the fuser problem data Checking clearing the fuser counts Setting the fuser drive control ON Setting the fuser phase control ON Checking the fuser temperature Operation panel and support equipment Turning all LEDs on Initializing the touch panel Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Checking DP operation Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter OFF KEY DEVICE Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Checking the operation panel keys Setting the USB host lock function Setting the IC card type Operation panel lock Panel sheet extension Limiting job separator output Setting the limit for the ejection section
386. nter Figure 1 2 21 1 3 1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine 1 Executing a maintenance item Press the status Job cancel key Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys Y Press the start key Y The selected maintenance item is run Y Press the stop key Repeat the same maintenance item Run another maintenance item Enter 001 using the cursor up down keys or numeric keys and press the start key End Maintenance mode is entered The maintenance item is selected Maintenance mode is exited 2K5 1 3 1 2K5 2 Maintenance modes item list Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting General Outputting an own status report Exiting the maintenance mode Setting the factory default data Setting the service telephone number kkk kk kk kk kk kkk k Displaying the machine number Displaying the ROM version Initialization Initializing counters and mode settings HDD formatting Drive paper feed paper conveying and cooling system Checking motor operation Checking switches for paper conveying Checking clutch operation Checking solenoid op
387. nto G o l etichetta B H redatte nella lingua corrispondente all interno del campo del valore di riferimento 1 ARPA SAILOR Y ttt 7 TOMA RECT Checking the operation 1 To check the machine operation prepare an A3 size original a where four lines b are drawn 20 mm from the edges and one line c is drawn at the center 2 Connect the power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on 3 Set the original a in the DP and make a proof copy to check the operation and the copy example 4 If the gap between the original a and the copy example exceeds the reference value perform adjustments For the procedure see the following pages Before checking image from the DP check and adjust image from the machine For details see the service manual of the machine V rification du fonctionnement 1 Pour v rifier le fonctionnement de la machine pr parez un original de format A3 a sur lequel quatre lignes b ont t trac es 20 mm des bords et sur lequel une ligne c a t trac e au centre 2 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension 3 Placez l original a dans le DP et effectuez une copie de test pour v rifier le fonctionnement et l exemple de copie 4 Si l cart entre l original a et l exemple de copie est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez les r glages n cessaires Pour la marche
388. o 400 1 increments Auto mode Preset zoom Printing A4 Letter 30 sheets min A4R LetterR 22 sheets min A3 Ledger 15 sheets min B4 Legal 15 sheets min B5 30 sheets min B5R 20 sheets min ASR 14 sheets min First copy time 5 1 s or less Warm up time Room temperature 22 C 71 6 F 60 RH Power on 29 s orless Low power mode 10 s or less Sleep mode 15 s or less Paper Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m2 MP tray 200 sheets 80 g m Output tray capacity Top tray 250 sheets 80 g m When built in finisher installed 100 sheets 80 g m When job separator installed 150 sheets 80 g m Continuous copying 1 to 999 sheets Light source Inert gas lamp Scanning system Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor a Si drum diameter 30 mm Image write system Semiconductor laser and electrophotography Charging Single positive corona charging Developing system Dry reverse developing single component system Developer 1 component magnetism toner Toner replenishing automatic from a toner container Transfer system
389. o S Tite M4 x 10 K 3 Die F hrungsplatte G mit der Bundschraube L und einer S Tite Schraube M4 x 10 K befestigen 3 Fissare la piastra della guida G utilizzando la vite a colletto L e la vite S Tite M4 x 10 K 3 L x 105 45 ge Sx gt 3 24 MR ERE ER D LEA MX 105 4 1 ACHETS WZI MT 22 x 21 AN 54 MMMM QUU 4 Fit the fixing plate F H and the fixing plate R 1 to the left cover 3 using two S Tite screws M4 x 10 K for each and fit the cover AT J to the fixing plate F H using two S Tite screws M4 x 10 K 4 Fixer la plaque de fixation avant H et la plaque de fixation arri re I sur le couvercle de gauche 3 l aide de deux vis S Tite M4 x 10 K chaque et fixer le couvercle AT J sur la plaque de fixation avant H l aide de deux vis S Tite M4 x 10 K 4 Encaje la placa de fijaci n F H y la placa de fijaci n R 1 en la cubierta izquierda 3 utilizando dos tornillos S Tite M4 x 10 K para cada una y encaje la cubierta AT J en la placa de fijaci n F H utilizando dos tornillos S Tite M4 x 10 K 4 Die Fixierplatte F H und die Fixierplatte R I mit je zwei S Tite Schrauben M4 x 10 K an der linken Abdeckung 3 anbringen und die Abdeckung AT J mit zwei S Tite Schrauben 4 x 10 an der Fixierplatte F H anbringen 4 M
390. o be modified where mobility in toner is inferior or when printing materials of very high density Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description Setting Initial range setting TONER CARRY Toner feed motor TFM TONER SUPPLY Toner feed clutch TNFCL CARRY ON TIME Toner feed motor drive on time 0 to 255 SUPPLY ON TIME Toner feed clutch on time 0 to 255 SUPPLY OFF TIME Toner feed clutch off time 0 to 255 Method 1 Select TONER CARRY or TONER SUPPLY 2 Press the start key The operation starts 3 To stop operation press the stop key Setting Low toner mobility 1 Select CARRY ON TIME 2 Increasing the setting value using the key 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting Printing very high density materials 1 Select SUPPLY ON TIME 2 Increasing the setting value using the key 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 48 Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U136 Setting toner near end mode Description Sets whether to restrict printing operation when the toner is empty Purpose To set to ON to remove restrictions on printing operation when toner empty is detected Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Do n
391. o check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the motor 7 The paper feed clutch 1 2 feed clutch 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch MP feed clutch reg istration clutch duplex feed clutch or toner feed clutch does not operate Broken clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the clutch Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the engine PWB goes low If not replace the engine PWB Paper feed clutch 1 YC8 A13 on the engine PWB Paper feed clutch 2 YC8 A15 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 1 YC8 B8 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 2 YC8 A12 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 3 YC8 A5 on the engine PWB MP paper feed clutch YC7 9 on the engine PWB MP feed clutch YC7 11 on the engine PWB Registration clutch YC8 B15 on the engine PWB Duplex feed clutch YC8 B9 on the engine PWB Toner feed clutch YC8 A17 on the engine PWB 8 The feedshift sole noid does not oper ate 1 4 42 Broken solenoid coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the solenoid Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connect
392. o de FAX 10 Limpie la superficie de la etiqueta que aparece en la figura con alcohol y pegue la etiqueta de la secci n de funcionamiento de FAX E del correspondiente idioma Cuando instale en 42 52 ppm Maquinas monocromaticas gt Pegue la etiqueta de la secci n de funcionamiento de FAX E indicada en A Cuando instale en 30 ppm Maquinas monocromaticas gt Pegue la etiqueta de la secci n de funcionamiento de FAX E indicada en B Cuando instale en 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Maquinas a todo color Pegue la etiqueta de la secci n de funcionamiento de FAX E indicada en A Anbringen des Aufklebers f r den FAX Bedienungsabschnitt 10 Die in der Abbildung gezeigte Klebefl che des Aufklebers mit Alkohol reinigen und den Aufkleber f r den FAX Bedienungsabschnitt E der entsprechenden Sprache anbringen Bei Einbau in 42 52 ppm Monochrommaschinen gt Den bei A gezeigten Aufkleber f r den FAX Bedienungsabschnitt E anbringen Bei Einbau in 30 ppm Monochrommaschinen gt Den bei B gezeigten Aufkleber f r den FAX Bedienungsabschnitt E anbringen Bei Einbau in 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierers gt Den bei A gezeigten Aufkleber f r den FAX Bedienungsabschnitt E anbringen Fissare l etichetta della sezione funzionamento FAX 10 Pulire con alcol la superficie dell etichetta indicata nella figura e applicare l etichetta della sezione funzionamento FAX E della lingua corrispondente Quando s
393. o make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Leading edge margin 3 0 1 5 mm 4 Left margin Right margin 2 0 1 0 mm l 20 1 0 mm Trailing edge margin 2 0 1 0 mm Figure 1 3 19 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 73 2K5 1 Maintenance item No Description U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying Purpose Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 U402 U066 U403 0071 1 3 22 1 3 71 1 3 30 1 3 72 1 3 34 0404 0407 1 3 73 Adjustment 1 Press the start key Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA Leading edge registration for memory 47 to 47 0 0 1 mm image printing Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make
394. o start scanning 13 5 11 3 2 2 1 10 8 7 9 1 nu 6 4 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Vermeer aS Sa DS Figure 2 1 7 Image scanner section Mirror 1 frame Mirror 2 frame Exposure lamp EL Mirror 1 Mirror 2 Mirror 3 ISU Lens CCD PWB CCDPWB Original size sensor OSS Original detection switch ODSW Home position switch HPSW Slit glass 2 1 5 2K5 Original X 3 oss gt Lens CCDPWB CCD image sensor Image scanner unit 5 z INPWB go 2 59 9 YC5 1 6 LAMPN YC6 5 OPSWN Serial communication data signal 4 SPWB YC6 8 ORGLSWN YC3 1 ISMDA YC3 2 ISMDNB YC3 3 ISMDNA YC3 4 ISMDB Figure 2 1 8 Image scanner section block diagram 2K5 2 Laser scanner section The image data scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB is processed on the main PWB MPWB and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit LSU By repeatedly turning the laser on and off the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surfac
395. o the front to remove Remove the screw 13 to remove the cover 14 Lib rez le verrou 11 l aide d un tournevis t te plate puis faites glisser le capot 12 vers l avant pour le d poser Retirez la vis 13 pour d poser le capot 14 Suelte el pestillo 11 utilizando un destornillador de cabeza plana y deslice la cubierta 12 hacia delante para desmontarla Saque el tornillo 13 para desmontar la cubierta 14 Die Raste 11 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen und die Abdeckung 12 nach vorn schieben um sie abzunehmen Die Schraube 13 herausdrehen um die Abdeckung 14 abzunehmen Rilasciate il fermo 11 utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta e fate scivolare il coperchio 12 verso il lato anteriore per rimuoverlo Togliete la vite 13 per rimuovere il coperchio 14 TIERRA TIERRA 11 2 MERITAJ Fo DR 1 13 W Fi 14 Bod 11 Zza FA RIAS RETO MRL DNS 12 EPI NO CHRD 13 1 KEL HS 04 04 o Remove the screw 15 from the rear side of the machine to remove the cover 16 Retirez la vis 15 du c t arri re de la machine pour d poser le capot 16 Saque el tornillo 15 del lado trasero de la m quina para desmontar la cubierta 16 Die Schraube 15 auf der R ckseite der Maschine herausdrehen um die Abdeckung 16 a
396. of the built in finisher Checking the operation of the DP motors Checking the DP switches Checking messages Setting the finisher Setting the paper feed device Factory initial setting 1 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 3 2K5 1 Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting Mode setting Setting the maintenance cycle Checking clearing the maintenance count Setting the destination Switching between double and single counts DOUBLE COUNT A3 LEDGER Selecting the timing for copy counting After ejection Setting OEM purchaser code Setting the delivery date Setting service status page ON Setting the black line cleaning indication Side ejection setting Setting the size conversion factor Setting the drum heater ON OFF 0 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Setting the ejection restriction ON Switching between duplex simplex copy mode OFF Setting the value for maintenance due indication 0 Image processing Adjusting margins of image printing 4 0 3 0 3 0 3 9 4 0 4 0 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing 0 Adjusting the halftone automatically
397. old the plug itself Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped If necessary protect it with cable cover or other appropriate Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks Remove toner completely from electronic components 0 7 A Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged O After maintenance always check that all the parts screws connectors and wires that were removed have been refitted correctly Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector trapped wire and missing screws a a a a Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Q Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on Always wash hands afterwards Never dispose of t
398. on 2 Press Auto or Default Paper Source 3 Press OK Auto Paper Selection 1 Press Change of Auto Paper Selection 2 Press Most Suitable Size or Same as Original Size 3 Press OK Auto Priority 1 Press Change of Auto Priority 2 Select the default for Off or On 3 Press OK Reserve Next Priority 1 Press Change of Reserve Next Priority 2 Select the default for Off or On 3 Press OK Preset Limit 1 Press Change of Preset Limit 2 Press or or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies 3 Press OK Quick Setup Registration 1 Press Next of Quick Setup Registration 2 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 3 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 4 Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirma tion screen appears Press Yes 2K5 4 Sending Settings Quick Setup Registration 1 Press Next of Quick Setup Registration 2 Press Change of the function to be registered in Quick Setup 3 Select a key 1 6 allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen Press Off to delete a key from the Quick Setup 4 Press OK If you overwrite the setting a confirma tion screen appears Press Yes Color Type 1 Press Change of Color Type 2 Select RGB or SRGB 3 Press OK Setting the Default Send Screen 1
399. on is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 3 Press Block 4 Press OK USB Device USB interface setting 1 Press Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of USB Device 2 Press Block 3 Press OK Optional interface Optional interface card setting 1 Press Next of Interface Block Setting and then Change of Optional Interface 1 or Optional Inter face 2 Press Block 3 Press OK N Document Guard Setting 1 Press and then Change of Document Guard 2 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 3 Press Activate 4 Press OK Optional Functions Starting Application Use 1 Press Next of Optional Function 2 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 3 Select the desired application and press Activate You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail 4 In the license key entry screen press Official Some applications do not require you to enter an license key If the license key entry screen does not appear go to Step 4 To use the application as a trial press Trial without entering the license key 5 When the confirmation screen appears press Yes
400. oner or toner bottles in fire Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fe N f rmace etc cdi d a Should smoke be seen coming from the copier remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme e nij 3 Miscellaneous WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol other than the specified refiner it may generate toxic This page is intentionally left blank 2K5 CONTENTS 1 1 Specifications 174171 SpeciflCatlOniS ito Len O A evo 1 1 1 131 2 Parts names iet IT TO FUE HEURE SERE TUS eR NERA ERE URL MSN SUE SA Mee RUNE LED 1 1 3 1 Machine rrr RR EROR etr P E ER REPE RC REPERI RS 1 1 3 2 Operation panel 7 5 m inicio cid 1 1 6 1 1 3 Machine cross section uere cete tete ee EL eee Pe go doe d eee dre edo 1 1 7 1 2 Installation 1 2 1 Installation envio Med aiii edere boc eon de ele eee ei io Eee e ei det ates tee 1 2 1 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation 1 2 2 1 Installation procedure ti 1 2 2 2 Setting initial copy MOTOS viii e cia 1 2 11 1 2 3 Installing the key counter 1 2 12 1 3 Maintenance Mode 1 3 1 Maintenance mode iii A ease 1 3 1 1 Executing a maintenance item ccecccceeecce
401. ontare la piastra di fissaggio F H e la piastra di fissaggio R 1 sul coperchio sinistro 3 usando due vite S Tite M4 x 10 K per ciascuna di esse e montare il coperchio AT J sulla piastra di fissaggio F H usando due vite S Tite M4 x 10 K 4 EE s D AA 2 MATA 22 x 10S MERA AT J 2 1111822 108 EEE F H E 4 EXER FH amp PEAK RO 7 777 3 CEA M4 108 24 b 424 CAE LHAT J FEA M X108 ZA F K 2 K THER FH CHET E 5 o 5 Fit the latch catch B to the fixing plate F H and the fixing plate R I using two S Tite screws M4 x 10 K Attach with the upper screw holes underneath fixing plates F and R I When using a full color machine Proceed to step 7 on page 5 5 Fixer le pontet du loquet B sur la plaque de fixation avant H et sur la plaque de fixation arri re 1 Paide de deux vis S Tite M4 x 10 Fixer partir des trous de vis sup rieurs se trouvant sous les plaques de fixation avant H et arri re I Lors de l utilisation de la machine enti rement en couleurs passer l tape 7 de la page 5 5 Encaje el cerrojo B en la placa de fijaci n F y la placa de fijaci n 1 utilizando los dos tornillos S Tite M4 x 10 K Fije con los orificios para tornillos superiores debajo de las placas de fijaci
402. oor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC36 on ASIC detects a BD error A for 4 s after connector termi the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the polygon motor rotation has been sta nals the continuity across the connector termi bilized nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit motor Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation C6000 Fuser heater break Defective fuser Replace the fuser heater 1 or 2 1 4 26 Fuser thermistor 1 detected less than 40 C 104 F for 14 s during warm up and ready in Fuser thermistor 2 detected less than 70 C 158 F for 14 s during warm up and ready in heater 1 or 2 Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Check the mounting state of the fuser ther mistor 1 or 2 If any problem is found repair it Defective fuser thermostat Replace the fuser thermostat Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation 2K5 Remarks rede Causes Check procedures corrective measures C6020 Abnormally high fuser thermistor Installation defec Check the mounting state of the fuser ther center temperature tiveness on fuser mistor 2 If any problem is found repair it Fuser thermistor 2 is detected 230 C thermistor 2 446 F or more for 40 ms Defective fus
403. operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sections and the related parts are serviced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press Execute 3 Press the start key to reset partial operation control 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U908 Checking the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value Purpose To check the total counter value Method 1 Press the start key The screen for total count value is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheet Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select EXCUTE 3 Press the start key The accumulated black ratio data is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes Purpose To check the counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed Completion Press the stop clear key T
404. or Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable 3 Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U033 and check if the solenoid operates If not replace the engine PWB Problem Causes 2K5 Check procedures corrective measures 9 The exposure lamp does not turn on or off Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective scanner PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC5 1 and YC5 6 on the scanner PWB goes low If not replace the scanner PWB If YC16 1 and 16 6 on the scanner PWB is always low replace the scanner PWB Defective inverter PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with CN1 1 and CN1 6 on the inverter PWB go low If not replace the inverter PWB If the exposure lamp does not turn off with CN1 1 and CN1 6 on the inverter PWB high replace the inverter PWB Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp even if checking or correcting other measures 10 Main charging is not performed Broken main charger wire Replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 33 Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the co
405. original Registration switch RSW Controls the secondary paper feed start timing Eject switch Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section Feedshift switch FSSW Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy Toner sensor 5 Detects the toner density in the developing unit Toner container detection switch TOD Wiesmann fir Detects the presence of the toner container Toner container sensor TCS Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container Overflow sensor Detects when the waste toner box is full Fuser thermistor 1 FTH1 Detects the heat roller temperature Fuser thermistor 2 2 Detects the heat roller temperature Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW 2 Eth Detects a paper jam in the duplex section Left cover 2 switch LC2SW Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 2 Humidity sensor HUMS Detects absolute humidity Temperature sensor TEMS Detects inner temperature 2 2 4 2K5 3 Motors Machine front 22 Machine inside C Machine rear 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Figure 2 2
406. ormato carta utilizzato nella macchina TES E BUSR AS SII TTE TH 8 SINS AEK OR HART b E c RARO ARA A amp CHRO z7 b EH UC T amp v Precautions Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts Before installing the paper feeder be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Pr cautions Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Avant d installer le bureau papier veiller mettre la machine hors tension et d brancher le c ble d alimentation de la prise murale Precauciones Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Antes de instalar el alimentador de papel aseg rese de desconectar el interruptor principal de la m quina y desenchufar el cable el ctrico del tomacorriente de la pared VorsichtsmaRnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Schalten Sie unbedingt den Betriebsschalter der Maschine aus und trennen Sie das Netzkabel von der Netzsteckdose bevor Sie den Papiereinzug installieren Precauzioni Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite Prima di installare
407. ot display an error or restrict printing operation when the toner is empty OFF Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Display an error and restrict printing operation when the toner is empty Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying Toner is forcibly evacuated in case the average print ing ratio for the number of printed pages assigned by PAGE is lower than the ratio defined by RATIO Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting MODE PAGE RATIO Toner loading operation Number of pages set Printing ratio 1 ON 0 OFF 1 to 50 10 to 40 0 5 30 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 49 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0155 Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the on off status of each sensor or switch related to toner Purpose To check if the sensors and switches operate correctly Method 1
408. otentially resulting in flickering fluorescent tubes etc Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF using the cursor up down keys Display Description ON Fuser phase control present OFF Fuser phase control absent Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the fuser temperature Description Displays the fuser temperature the external temperature and the absolute humidity Purpose To check the fuser temperature the external temperature and the absolute humidity Method 1 Press the start key The fuser temperature C F external temperature C F and the absolute humidity are displayed Display Description FIX CENTER TEMP Fuser center temperature C F FIX EDGE TEMP Fuser edge temperature C F SURROUND TEMP External temperature C F HUMIDITY Absolute humidity Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light Method 1 Press the start key All the LEDs on the operation panel light 2 Press the stop key The LEDs turns off Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed
409. ould this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the begin ning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items Error Codes Codes Description ERROR 01 Black band detection error scanner leading edge registration ERROR 02 Black band detection error scanner center line ERROR 03 Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction magnification ERROR 04 Black band is not detected scanner leading edge registration ERROR 05 Black band is not detected scanner center line ERROR 06 Black band is not detected scanner main scanning direction magnification ERROR 07 Black band is not detected scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification ERROR 08 Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction magnification far end ERROR 09 Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction magnification near end ERROR 0a Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge ERROR Ob Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge original check ERROR 0 Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge ERROR Od Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge 2 ERROR 0e DMA time out ERROR 0f Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error ERROR 10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge detectio
410. ounting eit te eiit 1 3 107 1 4 Troubleshooting 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection iii eee dee redet eder e oe dee erede tede thee dct 1 4 1 1 Paper misteed Iridicatlon iie lic 1 4 1 2 Paper misfeed detection 1 4 2 3 Paperimisfeeds vuestra e 1 4 9 1 4 2 Self diagnosls 4 5 2 HE A ont Loo a a eae 1 4 18 1 Self diagnostiC function seit 1 4 18 2 Self diagnostic Codes orte reete ceda 1 4 20 1 4 3 Image formation 1 4 34 1 No image appears entirely 1 4 35 2 No image appears entirely 1 4 35 3 Image sto WOM eR 1 4 36 4 Background iS MSIE ci a e cede 1 4 36 5 A white line appears 1 4 36 6 A black line appears 1 4 37 7 A black line appears 1 4 37 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the en 1 4 37 9 Black dots appear on the IMAGE 1 tritico ica 1 4 37 10yImage is Dl rred 2 2 lec 1 4 38 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original 1 4 38 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original
411. output status is displayed Display READY ACTIVE COMPLETE ERROR Description Standing by for output including while outputting other reports Performing output processing Output processing completed normally Output processing terminated with an error Method Send to the USB memory 1 Press the power key on the operation panel and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off switch off the main power switch Insert USB memory in USB memory slot Turn the main power switch on Enter the maintenance item Press the start key Select the item to be send Select TEXT or HTML Display Output list Print Outputs the report To USB TEXT To USB HTML Sends output data to the USB memory text type Sends output data to the USB memory HTML type Press the start key Output will be sent to the USB memory 1 3 6 2K5 Maintenance item No U000 Description Event log Event Log MFP 2 9 Aug 2009 08 40 4 1 Firmware version 2K5_2000 000 000 2009 08 09 XXXXXXXX O XXXXXXXX AAA 7 Paper Jam Log 8 Service Call Log Count Event Descriprions Count Service Code 16 9876543 10 01 08 01 01 7881214 01 0060 15 666554 10 01 08 01 02 578944 01 0120 14 4988 10 01 08 01 01 5296 01 4000 13 4988 10 01 08 01 02 5295 01 3100 12 4988 2099 01 2000 11 4988 1 0 01 08 1054 01 2000 10 1103 Ta Thy fai 809 01 2200 1103 b 0 30 01 2500
412. panel X position signal BOT Y Touch panel Y position signal RIGHT X Touch panel X position signal SGND Ground SGND Ground B5 MSB 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal B4 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal B3 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal Ground B2 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal B1 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal BO LSB 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal SGND Ground G5 MSB 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal G4 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal G3 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal Ground G2 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal G1 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal GO LSB 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal SGND Ground R5 MSB 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal R4 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal R3 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal Ground R2 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal R1 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal RO LSB 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal SGND Ground DE 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal SGND Ground LR 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal U_D 0 3 3 V DC LCD control signal SGND Ground DCLK 0 3 3 V DC pulse LCD clock signal NC Not used SGND Ground 5V 5 V DC power output to LCD 5V 5 V DC power output to LCD 5V 5 V DC power output to LCD 5V 5 V DC power output to LCD SGND Ground SGND Ground 2 Connected to the LCD OMAN Oa HR ON gt A Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N 2 aa 23 3 2 2 3 o O Oo HFA TDW AN DA 0 gt O
413. paraci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Dentro de 1 5 96 berpr fen der Vergr erung Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen berschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren Bezugswert Innerhalb 1 5 96 Controllo dell ingrandimento Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione Valore di riferimento Entro 1 5 96 SA SEG Wir ouf a Be 1 2 MAREA TE lt ERMETE gt 1 5 1 2 DTN AER MIME ARIS lt gt 1 5 DM 5 TE 14 Adjusting the DP magnification 1 Enter the maintenance mode and run the maintenance item U070 to adjust For first side Select MOTOR ADJ FRONT For second side Select MOTOR ADJ BACK R glage de l agrandissement du DP 1 Passez en mode de maintenance et ex cutez l l ment de maintenance 0070 pour effectuer le r glage Pour le recto S lectionnez MOTOR ADJ FRONT Pour le verso S lectionnez MOTOR ADJ BACK Ajuste del cambio de tama o 1 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e i
414. per feed pulley 15 Remove the connector 16 Release three clamps and remove the wire 17 Remove the screw and remove the MP unit cover 1 5 10 ZN M 4 IN Figure 1 5 17 Figure 1 5 18 9 RS N A 18 Remove the stop ring bush Figure 1 5 19 19 Remove the stop ring 20 Raise the MP paper feed pulley shaft and MP paper feed MP paper feed remove the MP paper feed pulley pulley shaft pulley MP paper feed pulley shaft Figure 1 5 20 2K5 Removing the MP forwarding pulley 21 Remove the sponge 22 Remove the stop ring and MP paper feed clutch When refitting insert the cutout in the MP paper feed clutch over the stopper on the machine 23 Remove the screw and move the cam and the bush toward the inner side 1 5 12 Stop ring gt feed clutch Figure 1 5 21 Figure 1 5 22 2K5 24 Remove the stop ring and slide the bush in the direction of the arrow Figure 1 5 23 25 Slide the MP forwarding pulley shaft tempo rarily toward the rear side and then raise it to remove from the MP unit Remove the shaft while raising the actuator of the MP paper switch MP forwarding lt C gt pulley shaft MP unit Figure 1 5 24 1 5 13 2K5 26 Remove the bush and cam 27 Remove the stop ring 28 Slide the MP forwarding pulley with the for warding pulley retainer from the shaft to remove it 29 Replace the M
415. peration panel to off Make sure that the power indicator and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet 2 Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key counter retainer using two screws and nut 3 Fitthe key counter mount to the key counter cover using two screws 4 Fitthe key counter retainer to the key counter mount using two screws 1 2 12 M4 x 6 screw Key counter retainer B4A04060 302GR03020 M4 x 6 screw B4A04060 E M3nut N 7BC1003055 H01 M4 x6 J B4A04060 22 Key counter EF mount 3066060041 4 x 6 screw B4A04060 Key counter socket assembly screws Key counter cover 7BB003306H 3066060011 Figure 1 2 16 2K5 5 Remove two screws and remove the scan Screw O Scanner ner right cover n right cover 6 Cutout the aperture plate on the upper right cover using nippers 7 Pull the key counter wire out wire Right upper cover 8 Seat the hook of the key counter cover 7 MAS retainer in the aperture in the right upper oS cover 9 Fit the key counter cover retainer using two Right upper cover screws cover retainer 302GR03010 Hook G NE CN M4 x 20 screw SN 7BB100420H M3 x 8 screw gt 5MBTPB3008PW R Figure 1 2 18 1 2 13 2K5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
416. pia de muestra i reduzca el valor de configuraci n Cantidad de cambio por paso 0 21 mm Den Einstellwert ndern F r Kopienmuster h Den Einstellwert erh hen F r Kopienmuster i Den Einstellwert erniedrigen Anderungsbetrag pro Stufe 0 21 mm Cambiare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia h aumentare il valore dell impostazione Per un esempio di copia i diminuire il valore dell impostazione Variazione graduale 0 21 mm Wi xg f SERRA h E TEC SERRA 1 1 5 Z 0 21mm z ELA 9 2 aE HYT h OYF 7 i OBA FIPS LAF vy 0 21mm B co Roe Make a proof copy again Repeat steps 1 to 3 until line 2 of copy example shows the following the reference values Reference value Within 1 5 Effectuez a nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 a 3 jusqu ce que la ligne 2 de de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence 1 5 max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 3 hasta que la linea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Dentro de 1 5 Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist Bezugswert Innerhalb 1 5 Eseguire di nuovo una prov
417. plateau dans la rainure 24 Droite Suspendez le crochet 25 au support de plateau C 18 Instale la bandeja de separador de trabajos D desde el lado delantero de la m quina Izquierda Inserte la bandeja en la ranura 24 Derecha Cuelgue el gancho 25 en el soporte de bandeja C 18 Das Job Separator Fach D von der Vorderseite der Maschine installieren Links Das Fach in die Nut 24 einf hren Rechts Den Haken 25 in den Fachhalter C einh ngen 18 Installare il vassoio del separatore lavori D dal lato anteriore della macchina Lato sinistro inserire il vassoio nell incavo 24 Lato destro appendere il gancio 25 sul supporto del vassoio C 18 TE NEA Cd D NETT 6 A EA 24 REPAIR 25 EERE 18 Za 7 EXL 2 bv D ERRATA SHA LO OD 2414 1 24 HATS All v 7 25 RLA AVS 12819802 2 Installing the left front cover 19 Release two latches 26 of the cover 6 removed in step 3 using flat head screwdriver to remove the lower clip holder 27 20 Attach the lower clip holder 27 to the left front cover E Installation du capot avant gauche 19 Lib rez les deux verrous 26 du capot 6 retir auparavant lors de l tape en utilisant un tournevis a t te plate pour retirer le support de pince inf rieur 27 20 Fixez le support pince inf rieur 27 sur le capot avant gauche E Instalaci n de
418. pot 8 retir auparavant lors de l tape 4 22 Installez le capot avant gauche E l aide des deux vis 4 retir es auparavant lors de l tape 3 23 Remettez en place le support pince 3 retir auparavant lors de l tape 2 24 Refermez le capot gauche 1 2 et le capot avant 1 21 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta 8 desmontada en el paso 4 22 Instale la cubierta delantera izquierda E utilizando los dos tornillos 4 sacados en el paso 3 23 Vuelva a colocar el soporte de clip 3 desmontado en el paso 2 24 Cierre la cubierta izquierda 1 2 y la cubierta frontal 1 21 Die in Schritt 4 entfernte Abdeckung 8 wieder anbringen 22 Die linke Frontabdeckung E mit den in Schritt 3 entfernten zwei Schrauben 4 installieren 23 Den in Schritt 2 entfernten Buroklammerhalter 3 wieder anbringen 24 Die linke Abdeckung 1 2 und die Frontabdeckung 1 schlie en 21 Rimettere a posto il coperchio 8 rimosso nel passo 4 22 Installare il coperchio frontale sinistro E utilizzando due viti 4 rimosse nel passo 3 23 Rimettete al suo posto il contenitore delle graffette 3 rimosso nel passo 2 24 Chiudete il coperchio sinistro 1 2 e il coperchio anteriore 1 21 FA 8 2 3 BURY 2 SRY 4 EZ i 23 2 Vi MEA 3 BARET 24 PH Acai 1 0 AUR 1 21 4 CIO PL EWAN 8 0 LO NOD 22 FI 3 TLEE
419. power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on 2 Check that the paper is fed and that the document finisher A operates correctly V rification du fonctionnement 1 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation du MFP ou imprimante dans la prise murale et mettre l interrupteur principal sous tension 2 V rifier que le papier est fourni et que le retoucheur de document A fonctionne correctement Comprobaci n operacional 1 Inserte el enchufe del MFP o impresora en el recept culo de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal 2 Aseg rese de que avance el papel y verifique que el finalizador de documentos A funcione correctamente Betriebstest 1 Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP oder Drucker in die Netzsteckdose ein und schalten Sie den Hauptschalter ein 2 Vergewissern dass der Papiervorschub funktioniert und dass der Dokument Finisher A einwandfrei funktioniert Controllo del funzionamento 1 Inserire il cavo di alimentazione dell MFP o stampatore nella presa di rete e quindi premete il pulsante generale di accensione 2 Verificare che la carta di prova sia alimentata e controllare che la finitrice di documenti A funzioni correttamente AVISE 1 AMERO tds Sit A Ja 2 WU AISA IF EUR Q8 4T IE IE o T ak m EA ERES 1 RROD MIR SS EY LA ERAT y FR 051295 2 AMES A dal R6 Peake Vv
420. precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property These symbols are described below AADANGER High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol AAWARNING Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol AACAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle A4 symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol NM General warning Warning of risk of electric shock A Warning of high temperature Q indicates a prohibited action The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol General prohibited action Disassembly prohibited eo indicates that action is required The specific action required is shown inside the symbol General action required Remove the power plug from the wall outlet Ga Always ground the copier 1 Installation Precautions WARNING Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections to one outlet they may cause fire or electric shock When using an extension cable always
421. ptional cassette 4 10 0 to 0 1 mm CAS 4 10 0 LSUOUT LEFT Duplex mode second 10 0 to 0 1 mm DUP 10 0 Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value Center line of printing within 0 5 mm Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 5 6 Press the start key The value is set Remark If the setting value for feeding from the MP tray is changed the difference from the former value is added to or subtracted from the values of other items 1 3 23 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U034 Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U034 U067 0072 1 3 31 1 3 36 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the ite
422. ptional document finisher ROM Optional built in finisher ROM Optional fax control PWB booting port 1 Optional fax control PWB APL port 1 Optional fax control PWB IPL port 1 Fax control PWB booting port 2 optional dual FAX Fax control PWB APL port 2 optional dual FAX Fax control PWB IPL port 2 optional dual FAX Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U021 Initializing counters and mode settings Description Initializes all settings except those pertinent to the type of machine namely each counter service call history and mode setting Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination Refer to 1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initial ized based on the destination setting 4 Turn the main power switch off and on An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error When ERROR 09 occurred turn main power switch off then on format the hard disk using maintenance item U024 and execute initialization using maintenance item U021 For other errors occurred turn
423. puede no moverse cuando se separa el finalizador de documentos Anbringen und Einstellen der F hrungsschieneneinheit 11 Die F hrungsschiene D gegen den Dokument Finisher A gedr ckt halten so dass der Abstand zwischen der F hrungsschiene D und dem Boden ca 10 mm betr gt und mit zwei M4 x 6 Befestigungsschrauben E sichern Hinweis Falls die F hrungsschieneneinheit nicht korrekt eingestellt ist bewegt sie sich beim Trennen des Dokument Finishers eventuell nicht Montaggio e regolazione della guida della rotaia 11 Mentre si tiene premuta la guida della rotaia D alla finitrice di documenti A in modo che lo spazio tra la guida della rotaia D e il pavimento sia di circa 10 mm fissarla a mezzo di due viti di serraggio M4 x 6 E Nota Se la guida della rotaia non regolata correttamente potrebbe non muoversi quando il separatore la finitrice di documenti verr staccato S S Ir zoe ud SP qu HCA 10 EXA M4 x 6 il 5 RT E BEAT TALE o was ae 23 EE n RARE ET HU AER AY BESS Ac AE Se HUA BET SH RETE DC o BA F v VORA 11 34 FLA D REMO RTI 2 10mm 72 5 KIC AA D ERRATA Loy YY A LEY CRBS EA MAX 6 34 YK G2 CBE E L lt LABEL RIA Hy YH OW HELE RETARD RV RMA do wey DE o D HARTA BER 12 Secure the guide rail D with th
424. put value at the time of exposure connector termi the scanner PWB and the connector on the lamp illumination does not exceed the nals inverter PWB and the continuity across the threshold value between 5 s connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective exposure Replace the exposure lamp lamp Incorrect shading Adjust the position of the contact glass position shading plate If the problem still occurs replace the home position switch Defective PWB Replace the scanner PWB or inverter PWB and check for correct operation C3300 Optical system AGC problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC26 on After AGC correct input is not obtained connector termi the main PWB and the connector on the at CCD nals CCD PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective exposure Replace the exposure lamp lamp Defective PWB Replace the main PWB or CCD PWB and check for correct operation C3500 Communication error between scan Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC26 on ner and SHD An error code is detected connector termi nals the main PWB and the connector on the CCD PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the main PWB or CCD PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 25 2K5 Rema
425. quality from 1 Low Qual ity to 5 High Quality Press OK High Comp PDF Image 1 Press cursor down key and Next of Function Defaults Press cursor down key twice and Change of High Comp PDF Image Select the default for Compression Ratio Priority Standard or Quality Priority Press OK Color TIFF Compression Settings 1 wn Press cursor down key and Next of Function Defaults Press cursor down key twice and then Change of Color TIFF Compression Select TIFF V6 or TTN2 Press OK Repeat Copying 1 N Press cursor down key and Next of Function Defaults Press cursor down key twice and Change of Repeat Copy Select the default for Off or On Press OK Collate Offset 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key twice and then Change of Col late Offset Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respec tively Press OK JPEG TIFF Print 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key twice and then Change of JPEG TIFF Print 2 Select the default for Fit to Paper Size Image Resolution or Fit to Print Resolution 3 Press OK XPS Fit to Page 1 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key twice and then Change of XPS Fit to Page Select Off or On for the default 3 Press OK N 3 Copy Settings Paper Selection 1 Press Change of Paper Selecti
426. quitado en el paso 1 Installieren der FAX Leiterplatte 2 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT2 einsetzen und Leiterplatte mit den in Schritt 1 ausgebauten Schrauben 1 befestigen Installare la scheda a circuiti FAX de circuitos del fax A Sujete las partes superior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax A Oriente la etiqueta 3 en la tarjeta de circuitos del FAX A como se indica en la ilustraci n e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura Ber hren Sie die Anschl sse der FAX Platine A nicht mit den Fingern Die FAX Leiterplatte A bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten Die FAX Leiterplatte A so in die Nut einsetzen dass der Aufkleber 3 wie abgebildet zur Leiterplatte zeigt Non toccare direttamente il terminale della Rimuovere il coperchio 1 Rimuovere le due viti 1 quindi rimuovere il coperchio OPT2 2 iR 45 2 Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX A lungo l incavo nell OPT2 e fissare la scheda con le due viti 1 rimosse nell operazione 1 scheda a circuiti FAX A tenere l estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX O la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX Orientare l etichetta 3 sulla scheda a circuiti FAX A come indicato nell illustrazione e inserire la scheda lungo l incavo ANE e Pe TL BRA mT o FE EAE TL HB C J amp
427. r Remove the connector Remove the band Fuser unit cover Hook Figure 1 5 85 Remove the screw and remove the fuser Screw thermistor 2 Replace the fuser thermistor 2 and install the thermistor Refit all the removed parts Fuser thermistor 2 Figure 1 5 86 1 5 47 2K5 8 Detaching and refitting the fuser thermostats 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermostats 1 and 2 Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 37 2 Unhook four hooks and remove the fuser unit cover Fuser unit cover Figure 1 5 87 3 Remove four tabs Figure 1 5 88 1 5 48 2K5 Screw 4 Remove each two screws and remove two fuser thermostat holders Fuser 9 thermostat Screw Fuser thermostat holder 43 p Spacers 5 Remove two screws and remove fuser ther mostats 1 and 2 Screw 6 Replace the fuser thermostats 1 and 2 and install the thermostats 7 Refit all the removed parts ee S Fuser thermostat Fuser thermostat holder Figure 1 5 90 1 5 49 2K5 9 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral squareness Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fuser unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fuser section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer Procedure Place the original on the contact glass Press the start key and make a te
428. r paper feeder document finisher built in finisher job separator key counter fax kit expansion memory internet fax kit data security kit and printed document guard kit Printer functions Printing Same as copying speed First print time sss 5 8 s or less 600 Operating Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Apple Macintosh OS 10 x A ete USB interface connector 1 USB Hi speed Network interface 1 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Page description language PRESCRIBE Scanner functions Operating system Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Windows Vista System requirements CPU 600 MHz or higher RAM 128 MB or more 4 222222 600 400 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x 100 dpi 200 x 400 File format eme TIFF MMR JPEG compression JPEG XPS PDF MMR JPEG compression PDF high compression Scanning 4 300 dpi Image quality Text Photo original Single sided B W 50 images min Color 15 images min Interface cete Ethernet 10 BASE T 100 BASE TX Network protocol TCP IP Transmission system PC
429. r is indicated dur ing copying jam between finisher and machine Jam code 96 Defective paper conveying switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 23 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying switch Check if the eject roller or eject pulley is deformed Check and remedy 1 4 17 2K5 1 4 2 Self diagnosis 1 Self diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self diagnostic function When a problem is detected copying is disabled and the problem dis played as a code consisting of C followed by a number indicating the nature of the problem A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service After removing the problem the self diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back on List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason a system error will be indicated After a system error is indicated the error can be cleared by turning the power switch off and then on If the error is detected continuously however per form the operation shown in Table 1 4 1 If a system error occurs frequently a fault may have occurred Check the details of the C call to take proper measures System error Contents Operation 0420 Optional paper feeder communication problem System error service call partial operation
430. r the language you want to use 3 Press OK The touch panel language will be changed Default Screen 1 Press Change of Default Screen 2 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen 3 Press OK Sound 1 Press Next of Sound and then Next of Buzzer 2 Press Change of Volume Key Confirmation Job Finish Ready or Warning 3 Select the buzzer volume level or other sound options Original Paper Settings 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Original Size 2 Press Change of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 on which you wish to register the size 3 Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions 4 Press OK Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings and then Next of Custom Paper Size 2 Press Change of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4 on which you want to register the size 3 Press On and then press or numeric keys to enter X horizontal and Y vertical dimensions Press Media Type to select the type of paper and press OK if necessary 4 Press OK Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes 1 Press Next of Original Paper Settings Next of Cassette Setting Next of Cassette 1 to Cassette 4 on which you want to register the size and then Change of Paper Size 2 To detect paper size automatically press Auto
431. raccord l aide de deux vis A droite Utiliser la vis 8 retir e auparavant l tape 8 A gauche Utiliser la vis M3 x 6 D 10 Instale la placa de uni n C utilizando dos tornillos Derecho Utilice el tornillo 8 quitado en el paso 8 Izquierdo Utilice el tornillo M3 x 6 D 10 Die Verbindungsplatte C mit zwei Schrauben befestigen Rechts Die in Schritt 8 entfernte Schraube 8 benutzen Links Die M3 x 6 Schraube D benutzen 10 Montare la piastra di giunzione C utilizzando due viti Destra utilizzare la vite 8 rimossa nel passo 8 Sinistra utilizzare la vite M3 x 6 D 10 H 2 R72 s XE Be A ADS EK 2 8 3822 X 60 10 EX 2A C EY TU S ERI 8 CA UTE EA 8 A EA M3 X 6 D 11 11 11 11 11 11 Pass the wires 12 through the clamp 11 Be sure to pass the wires 12 through the clamp 11 because the wires 12 may touch the motor Faire passer les fils 12 par le collier 11 Veiller faire passer les fils 12 par le collier 11 car les fils 12 risqueraient d entrer en contact avec le moteur Pase los cables 12 por la m nsula 11 Asegurese de pasar los cables 12 por la m nsula 11 porque los cables 12 pueden tocar el motor Die Kabel 12 durch die Klemme 11 f hren Die Kabel 12 m ssen unbedingt durch die Klemme 11 gef hrt werden weil sie sonst
432. re la voce di manutenzione U411 Selezionare DP FACE UP premere INPUT e poi premere il tasto di avvio Le regolazioni dell ingrandimento DP della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e della linea centrale del DP saranno eseguite automaticamente 4 Quando Complete viene visualizzato le regolazioni sono state completate correttamente Se durante le regolazioni automatiche si verifica qualche problema nel display viene visualizzato XX XX viene sostituito da un codice di errore Controllare la posizione d impostazione dell originale e ripetere i passi da 2 a 3 fino a che Complete non viene visualizzato Per ulteriori dettagli vedere il manuale d istruzioni 181139 uit tr 2039 decl etd OANE RT THRE SES 7 WAM 1001 ERAS DIE Ji t o 2 WA FAR AA AE DP 3 ee age 0411 DP FACE UP 4 F INPUT HZ E ETE SEHE PERA x 4 GAIA Complete den PGT HAE AERE osi XX s TAU SEA Five MEJ VET i ESSE BRE SE AUR DISSE LES mR 45 CRD CDS RMT 6 0 4 7 10 72 18 feline ROL DICH Y RTA FoR aH 3v Cv S Me Etc UC Ee DP CE v SD AVFFYAE EE 3 25 DP FACE UP ER 1 TINPUT RA RET AEE RE Sen 4 UT eV Ae FF A MED ANAND 4 E Complete MER ANA EULER EU E y MEA MEL
433. rective measures 4 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from optional cassette 3 Jam code 12 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley forwarding pulley and separation pulley of optional cassette 3 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if PF paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with PF paper feed clutch 1 Check see service manual of paper feeder 5 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from optional cassette 4 Jam code 13 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley forwarding pulley and separation pulley of optional cassette 4 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken PF feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective PF feed switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 8 on the PF main
434. ress Change of Orientation 2 Press Portrait or Landscape 3 Press OK 1 3 100 Form Feed Timeout 1 Press cursor down key and Change of Form Feed Timeout 2 Press or to set the Form Feed Timeout You can set the timeout delay in seconds You cannot use the number keypad to enter this value 3 Press OK LF Action 1 Press cursor down key and Change of LF Action 2 Press LF Only LF and CR or Ignore LF 3 Press OK CR Action 1 Press cursor down key and Change of CR Action 2 Press CR Only LF and CR or Ignore CR 3 Press OK Paper Feed Mode 1 Press cursor down key and Change of Paper Feed Mode 2 Press Auto or Fixed 3 Press OK 7 Printing Reports Sending Notice Printing Reports 1 Press Next of Print Report 2 Press Print for the report you want to print Print ing starts A confirmation screen appears Press Yes Send Result Report 1 Press Next of Result Report Setting Next of Send Result Report and then Change of E mail Folder Press Off On or Error Only 3 Press OK N 8 Adjustment Maintenance Copy Density Adjustment 1 Press Next of Copy Density Adjustment 2 Press Change of Auto or of Manual 3 Press 3 3 Lighter Darker to adjust density 4 Press OK Send Box Density Adjust 1 Press and Next of Send Box Density Adjust 2 Press Change of Auto or of Manual 3 Press 3 3 Lighter D
435. restriction mode If Counter Limit is selected press or numeric keys to select the number of pages Press OK Repeat steps 3 to 5 for other accounts to be restricted Press Register The restricted account is added Applying Limit of Restriction 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Apply Limit Select Immediately Subsequently or Alert Only Press OK Default Counter Limit 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login 1 3 108 Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Next of Default Counter Limit Press Change for the item you want to modify and then press or or use the numeric keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets Press OK To set another default restriction repeat steps 3 to 4 Total Job Accounting Resetting the Counter 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Next of Total Job Accounting Press Check at the function to check the count The resu
436. retire la cubierta trasera superior 2 2 Installation der DIMM Speichermodule lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Vollfarbenkopierers gt 1 Entfernen Sie die Filterabdeckung 2 1 Entfernen Sie danach die 9 Schrauben 1 und nehmen Sie dann die obere hintere Abdeckung 2 2 ab Installazione della memoria DIMM lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm un macchinario a colori gt 1 Rimuovere il copercio del filtro 2 1 Quindi rimuovere le 9 viti 1 e il coperchio superiore posteriore 2 2 A TEARS DIMM lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 REGULAR gt CD Je FEF 9 1 Pa 2 2 AE DIMM ORY 4414 lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 fct 7A 72 gt 1 FAME 3 73 2 1 ERU UI EA 2 AIL EDI 2 2 EMO MH lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40ppm gt 2 Install the memory DIMM or the optional memory DIMM J into the memory slot 3 on the middle level FLS lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 ppm gt the lower level FLS lt 55 50 ppm Install it with the IC side facing down Insert it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks 3 Replace the upper rear cover 2 2 using 9 screws 1 and then replace the filter cover 2 1 Proceed to step 4 on page 5 2 Installer la m moire DIMM 1 ou la m moire DIMM en option J dans la fente m moire 3 se trouvant au milieu FLS lt 25 25
437. ria DIMM I o la memoria DIMM opzionale J nello slot della memoria 3 al livello inferiore FLS Installare con il lato IC rivolto verso il basso Inserirla nella direzione della freccia finch non scatta in posizione 3 Ricollocare il coperchio 2 utilizzando le 2 viti 1 Procedere con il punto 4 a pagina 5 2 DIMM I RAIE DIMM J be FE FLS fA ted 3 C Fo REKA AAA BUR FH 2 5 El E R45 CI EIRIN 2 o TEH 4 4 onm it aS E B gt 2 ACY DIMO ERI ATV AVDA ES DIMM J FLS OX GY Ary 3 CRGO MIT Ss IC He FI e RC fU SCE BF YVEBRTAECRAAMICHHAT 25 3 EA 1 2 47 215 2 70180 HRY Hit Do 5 5 V FIE 4 Et 25 25 30 30 40 40 2 50 40 55 50 ppm 272 SS Installing the memory DIMM lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Full color machines gt 1 Remove the filter cover 2 1 Then remove 9 screws 1 and remove the upper rear cover 2 2 Installation de la m moire DIMM lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Machines entierement en couleurs gt 1 D poser le couvercle du filtre 2 1 Puis d poser les 9 vis 1 et le couvercle arri re sup rieur 2 2 Instalaci n de la memoria DIMM lt 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 40 55 50 ppm Maquinas a todo color gt 1 Quite la cubierta del filtro 2 1 Luego quite los 9 tornillos 1 y
438. riginal a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart est sup rieur la valeur de r f rence effectuez le r glage suivant Valeur de r f rence Copie recto seul 3 0 mm max Copie recto verso 4 0 mm max Verificaci n del ngulo del borde superior Verifique la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra Si la superaci n supera el valor de referencia haga el siguiente ajuste Valor de referencia Para copia simple Dentro de 3 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 4 0 mm Uberpriifen des Winkels der Vorderkante Die Abweichung der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 des Kopienmusters pr fen Uberschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert ist die folgende Einstellung durchzuf hren lt Bezugswert gt Fur Simplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Fur Duplexkopie Innerhalb 4 0 mm Controllo dell angolo del bordo principale Controllare la differenza tra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 della copia di esempio Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento effettuare la seguente regolazione lt Valore di riferimento gt Per copia simplex Entro 3 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 4 0 mm A EE MUS a E 1 26 2 WEB DARA gt 3 LIA 4 Omm DA AJ Fe bin FO HE dim a of 1 EAE PUY PV OR 2 OF WE lii 5 TOREO A LH 252020 direi gt FEDRA E 3 0mm LAP OWE 4
439. rks rede contents Causes Check procedures corrective measures C3900 Backup memory read write problem Defective backup Replace the scanner PWB and check for scanner PWB RAM or PWB correct operation Read and write data does not match C3910 Backup memory data problem scan Defective backup Replace the scanner PWB and check for ner PWB RAM or PWB correct operation Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values C4000 Polygon motor synchronization prob Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC36 on lem connector termi the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and The polygon motor does not reach the nals the continuity across the connector termi stable speed within 20 s of the START nals Repair or replace if necessary Signal Turing Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit motor Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation C4010 Polygon motor steady state problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC36 on Stable OFF is detected for 5 s continu connector termi the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and ously after polygon motor stability nals the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit motor Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation C4200 BD initialization problem P
440. rmi nals Check the connection of connector of lift switch 2 and the connector YC23 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective lift switch 2 Check if YC23 A5 on the engine PWB goes low when lift switch 2 is turned off If not replace lift switch 2 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Contents 2K5 Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures PF lift motor 1 error optional paper feeder After cassette 3 is inserted PF lift switch 1 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected four times successively Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC22 on the engine PWB and the connector on the PF main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of PF lift motor 1 Replace PF lift motor 1 Defective PF lift motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace PF lift motor 1 Defective PF lift switch 1 Check if YC1 5 on the PF main PWB goes low when PF lift switch 1 is turned off If not replace PF lift switch 1 PF lift motor 2 error optional paper feeder After cassette 4 is inserted PF lift switch 2 does not turn on within 12 s This error is detected four times successively Poor contact in the connector
441. rned on TC OFF Time of period since the registration clutch is turned 0 to 255 68 off until the transfer voltage is turned off SC ON Time of period since the registration clutch is turned 0 to 255 40 on until the separation voltage is turned on SC OFF Time of period since the registration clutch is turned 0 to 255 92 off until the separation voltage is turned off Increasing the DEV BIAS setting makes the image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter Increasing the DEV SBIAS setting makes the image darker Increasing the DEV DUTY setting makes the image lighter decreasing it makes the image darker Increasing the TC DATA TC DATA2 setting makes the transfer voltage higher and decreasing it makes the voltage lower Increasing the SC DATA setting makes the separation voltage higher and decreasing it makes the volt age lower 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 45 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U110 Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking Purpose To check the drum status Method 1 Press the start key The drum counter count is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 46 Setting separation charger mode Description Sets the separation charger mode Purpose To
442. rries the residual toner back to the waste toner box The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Also the toner quantity in the waste toner box is sensed with the overflow sensor OFS Cleaning spiral Cleaning roller 9 Sp Cleaning blade Cleaning 3 O M I9 H Drum Figure 2 1 16 Cleaning and charge erasing sections ERASE1N X ERASEZN 1 ERASE3N 7 6 N 1 5 OFS TONEFUL YC1 A2 Figure 2 1 17 Cleaning and charge erasing sections block diagram 2 1 13 2K5 2 1 7 The fuser section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2 1 18 When paper reaches the fuser section after the transfer process it passes between the press roller and heat roller which is heated by fuser heaters 1 or 2 FH1 or FH2 Pressure is applied by the fuser unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted fused and fixed onto the paper The heat roller is heated by fuser heaters 1 or 2 FH1 or FH2 inside it its surface temperature is detected by the fuser ther mistor 1 and 2 FTH1 2 and is regulated by the fuser heaters turning on and off If the fuser section becomes abnormally hot fuser thermostat 1 and 2 FTS1 2 operates shutting the power to the fuser heaters off When the fusing process is completed the paper is separated
443. rs longitudinally Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 33 Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 36 Foreign matter in the developing unit Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter see page 1 5 35 Dirty shading plate Clean the shading plate 6 A black line appears longitudinally Copy example Causes 2K5 Check procedures corrective measures Dirty platen Clean the platen Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 31 Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 31 Dirty scanner mirror Clean the scanner mirror Dirty main charger wire 7 A black line appears laterally Copy example Causes Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 33 Check procedures corrective measures Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 31 Dirty developing section Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid Leaking separation electrode 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other Copy example Causes Clean the separation electrode
444. s Veillez retirer les morceaux de bande adh sive et ou les mat riaux de rembourrage des pi ces fournies Avant d installer le s parateur de travaux veillez mettre la machine hors tension et d brancher le c ble d alimentation de la prise murale Precauciones Aseg rese de despegar todas las cintas y o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas Antes de instalar el separador de trabajos aseg rese de desconectar el interruptor principal de la m quina y desenchufar el cable el ctrico del tomacorriente de la pared VorsichtsmaRnahmen Entfernen Sie Klebeband und oder Dampfungsmaterial vollst ndig von den mitgelieferten Teilen Schalten Sie unbedingt den Betriebsschalter der Maschine aus und trennen Sie das Netzkabel von der Netzsteckdose bevor Sie den Job Separator installieren Precauzioni Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e o il materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite Prima di installare il separatore lavori assicurarsi di spegnere l interruttore principale di alimentazione della macchina e scollegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione dalla presa a muro della rete elettrica HEM LAA PEA O erat Cees fll BSH HER SS LE ET Y REA AS TV CW SH FILL HO AF E Va TESNL AA SBAIL BRA KO EGR AT y Fi OFF ICL EZI Y luv CP
445. see service manual of paper feeder Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 1 4 11 2K5 Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 11 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in MP tray conveying section Jam code 23 Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse MP feed switch 12 A paper jam in the paper conveying sec tion is indicated dur ing copying jam in registration transfer section Jam code 30 Broken feed switch 1 regis tration switch or MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item 0031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 registration switch MP feed switch The contact between the right and left registration rollers is not correct Check visually and replace 13 A paper jam in the fuser section is indi cated during copying jam in fuser section Jam codes 40 to 44 and 47 Broken eject switch or feed shift switch actuator Check visually and replace switch
446. seneeeecsteecosencesseceneesseetececeesenenenesseeensesentenensennnstesoeettees 1 3 1 2 Maintenance modes item 2 10 1 terrent nnne ken enne ite kan 1 3 2 3 Contents of the maintenance mode 1 3 6 1 3 2 Management Mode Pee Hae bat DECR ele dex debe nat eat 1 3 95 1 Using the management mode eese nono crecen rca 1 3 95 2 5 65 1 3 96 3 Adi 1 3 99 4 Sending Settings 2 2 bead e e ee getto eie Dh D 1 3 99 5 Document Box Settings eats teers einen 1 3 99 6 Printer Settings iia ai orita 1 3 100 7 Printing Reports Sending 1 3 100 8 Adjustment Maintenance c csesccsecedenerqecteseeoncusecdecetaeecednceensencecesceseeducnsepeeedtertesenaceesenocan iers 1 3 101 9 Date Timer 1 3 101 10 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch 1 3 102 11 Internet Browser Setup id nada 1 3 103 12 AppliCalions 5 2 ERU n UE 1 3 104 13 System Settings ii o cia 1 3 104 14 User Login 2 1 3 106 15 Job acc
447. separaci n entre las l neas del papel y del patr n de prueba muestra el siguiente valor de referencia Valor de referencia 2 0 mm o menos 21 Die Kassette sachte schlie en 22 Das Testmuster erneut drucken 23 Die Schritte 19 bis 22 wiederholen bis die Abweichung zwischen den Mittellinien des Papiers und des Testmusters innerhalb des folgenden Bezugswerts liegt Bezugswert maximal 2 0 mm 21 Chiudere delicatamente il cassetto 22 Stampare nuovamente un modello di prova 23 Ripetere i passi da 19 a 22 fino a quando la distanza tra le linee centrali della carta e del modello di prova indica il seguente valore di riferimento Valore di riferimento fino 2 0 mm 21 22 HAM AREA 23 x f i 2b 19 22 EOS f 8 PE 29 1E o lt REE 22 Omm LAF 21 bey NED LIAL 22 7 A ba vEBREIHN 5 23 HIRDE V ZSIL EFA EZIN EYEE A A EC FIE 9 22 VR OE lt gt 2 0mm LAF INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR DOCUMENT FINISHER Output Connector for Interconnecting Cable is non LPS Output 24 V 426 VA max Please use the item below Interconnecting Cables P N 305H180180 Supplied parts A Document finisher 2 2 2 1 Latch catch d C Rail retainer zd D Guide rail ES E Binding screw x 6
448. setting Change in value per step Y SCAN ZOOM Scanner magnification in the main 15 to 15 0 scanning direction X SCAN ZOOM Scanner magnification in the auxil 25 to 25 iary scanning direction 0 1 0 05 Adjustment Main scanning direction 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 8 5 Press the start key The value is set Adjustment Auxiliary scanning direction 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 9 5 Press the start key The value is set 1 3 29 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U065 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 30 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the lead
449. sinistro 1 GET MEMO cc 1 LED 1 EE co MEM 1 ELS E run RE 1 Ac cSAS qe aes 1 LED IRTE Y 1 C EUA ri re E EE 1 D DETFERLA UA eee 1 RIO IQT Em E Gm TIO rA m cu tu Blindfold seal 1 Large pin al Small pin 1 DLE A 1 Etiquette de 1 Grande goupille Petite goupille s MESURES SAA pr een Pasador grande Pasador pequefio TOMO MI Gries Blindaufkleber 1 Gro er Stift 41 Kleiner Stift 2 x 6 Schraube 1 Sigillo 1 Perno grande Perno piccolo 8 Vito MID conca acne 1 AM 1 is iia 1 eee 1 A 1 M3 6 1 ZB ANA iaa senate 1 D Ne EM REO PM 1 D EA tea one as 1 A eade 1 EAM Nui erica 1 Precautions Be sure to remove any tape and or cushioning material from supplied parts Before installing the job separator be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Pr caution
450. sition adjustment for 55 to 55 0 0 11 mm scanning originals BLACK LINE Scanning position for the test copy 0103 originals Select DP READ of the screen for selecting an item Change the setting using the or numeric keys When the setting value is increased the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased Press the start key The value is set Select BLACK LINE of the screen for selecting an item Select the scanning position using the or numeric keys Press the start key The value is set Set the original the one which density is known in the DP and press the system menu key The screen for the test copy mode is displayed Press the start key Test copy is executed Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2K5 Description U070 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step MO
451. situati sul lato anteriore sinistro e destro dell unit di alimentazione della carta stessa allineati ai fori 5 nella macchina Rc DU PR Zt di 4 E 5 5 epus EVLE GEAR amp A E OST 4 PROBED EY 4 amp 7 5 BF LINE ARAS MER 7 4 2 5 Fix the machine using two pins B 6 Insert cassette 2 3 into the machine 5 Fixer la machine a l aide de deux broches B 6 Ins rer le tiroir 2 3 dans la machine Fije la m quina utilizando dos clavijas Coloque la bandeja 2 3 en la m quina Die Maschine mit den zwei Stiften B befestigen Die Kassette 2 3 in die Maschine einsetzen Fissare la macchina utilizzando due perni B Inserire il cassetto 2 3 nella macchina 4244 sla poss EDL AE PEAR i 2 3 Ey B 2 A Chibi A De ETS HEY b 2 3 mm 0 HATS by SB gt 22 22 22 22 22 7 Remove the screw 6 at the rear side of the paper feeder to remove the cover 7 Retirer la vis 6 situ e sur le c t arri re du bureau papier pour retirer le couvercle 7 Quite el tornillo 6 en el lado trasero del alimentador de papel para desmontar la tapa 7 Die Schraube 6 auf der R ckseite des Papiereinzugs herausdrehen um die Abde
452. st copy at 100 magnification Is the image correct End 1 5 50 Tighten the two screws Refit the front left cover and close the front cover Open the front cover and remove the front left cover see page 1 5 37 Loosen the screw holding each of the fuser unit and adjusting spacer For copy example 1 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the white arrow gt to raise the front position of the fuser unit For copy example 2 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the black arrow to lower the front position of the fuser unit Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 5 91 Fuser unit Screw Adjusting spacer Figure 1 5 92 2K5 1 5 8 Others 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter 1 Procedure 1 Open the filter cover 2 Remove the ozone filter 1 3 Replace the ozone filter 1 and install the fil ter o Figure 1 5 93 1 5 51 2K5 2 Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter 2 Procedure 1 2 3 4 1 5 52 Remove the filter cover Remove the ozone filter 2 Replace the ozone filter 2 and install the fil
453. start key The selected operation starts Display Description MC Turning the main charger on LASER Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key when main charger output stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played 1 3 44 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U101 Setting the other high voltages Description Sets the developing bias control voltage the transfer control voltage and the separation control voltage or checks the output of these voltages Purpose To check the developing bias the transfer voltage and the separation voltage or to take measures against drop of image density or background fog Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting DEV BIAS Developing bias AC component frequency at image 20 to 32 26 formation DEV SBIAS Developing shift bias potential at image formation 0 to 255 58 DEV DUTY Developing bias AC component duty at image forma 0 to 100 50 tion TC DATA Transfer control voltage 0 to 255 89 SC DATA Separation control voltage 0 to 2 1 TC DATA2 Transfer control voltage for small sizes 0 to 255 115 TC ON Time of period since the registration clutch is turned 0 to 255 91 on until the transfer voltage is tu
454. stn Jil pt 2e 77 7v L yoy HEY HITS Seal the terminal for New Zealand model 8 Wipe the surface of the telephone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal C Perform this procedure for New Zealand model only Fermer herm tiquement la borne mod le pour la Nouvelle Z lande 8 Effectuer cette proc dure pour le mod le pour la Nouvelle Z lande seulement Selle el terminal para el modelo Nuevo Zeland s 8 Realice este procedimiento s lo para el modelo Nuevo Zeland s Versiegeln der Anschlussbuchse f r Neuseeland Modell 8 Dieses Verfahren nur f r das Neuseeland Modell anwenden Sigillare il terminale per il modello Nuova Zelanda 8 Eseguire questa procedura solo per il modello Nuova Zelanda LENTES 8 EDGE TIME 2 2 8 2ZOFMi Y 7 Y 2E 5 4 EMo Interrupt Logout Memory Attention 0 OPER c Clear QUAN Ente Attach the alphabet labels 9 Wipe the area above the numeric keys at the right side of the operation panel with alcohol and adhere the alphabet labels D here In Asia and Oceania use PQRS TUV WXYZ label and do not use PRS TUV WXY and OPER labels Fixer les tiquettes de l alphabet 9
455. t roller separation claws 5 Replace the heat roller separation claws and 8 install the claws 8 6 Refit all the removed parts Heat roller separation claw 8 Figure 1 5 75 1 5 40 2K5 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 37 2 Unhook four hooks and remove the fuser unit cover 3 Remove two connectors Fuser unit cover Figure 1 5 76 4 Remove four screws 5 Separate the right fuser frame and left fuser Screw O Screw aa 9 frame Right fuser frame SS Left fuser frame Figure 1 5 77 1 5 41 2K5 6 Remove the press roller 7 Replace the press roller and install the roller 8 Refit all the removed parts Figure 1 5 78 1 5 42 2K5 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser heater Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser heater Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 37 2 Unhook four hooks and remove the fuser unit cover 3 Remove two connectors Fuser unit cover Connector Hook Figure 1 5 79 4 Remove four screws pH Screw 5 Separate the right fuser frame and left fuser frame Right fuser frame Left fuser frame Figure 1 5 80 1 5 43 2K5 6 Remove two tabs Figure 1 5 81 ih hl the screw and rear fuser heater 8 Remove the screw and front fuser
456. t Une C t gauche Trois Fije el DP utilizando cuatro tornillos M4 x 14 E Derecho Uno Izquierdo Tres Den DP mit vier M4 x 14 Schrauben E befestigen Rechts Eine Links Drei Fissare il DP utilizzando quattro viti M4 x 14 E Destra Una Sinistra Tre FA 4 NIR X 14 E DP 1 Zc fill 34 EAM X 14 4 KC DP AET IS US Attaching the original mat 4 Place the original mat B with its hook and loop fasteners up over the platen Align original mat B corner that has 90 degrees of angle with the inner left corner 2 of the original instruction panel 5 Close the DP slowly to attach the original mat B onto it with the hook and loop fasteners Fixation du tapis d original 4 Placez le tapis d original B sur la glace d exposition avec son crochet et ses attaches boucle orient es vers le haut Aligner le coin du plateau d original B faisant un angle de 90 degr s avec le coin gauche 2 interne du panneau d instructions d original 5 Refermez progressivement le DP pour fixer le tapis d original B sur celui ci avec le crochet et les attaches boucle Colocaci n de la plancha de originales 4 Coloque la plancha de originales B en su gancho y fijadores de bucle sobre el crystal de exposici n Alinee la esquina que tiene un ngulo de 90 grados de la alfombrilla para originales con la esquina interior izquierda 2 del panel de instrucciones para el original 5
457. t diese Installation nicht mit Seite 14 fortfahren Instale el FAX dual Consulte la p gina 1 de las piezas suministradas Installieren des Dual FAX Die mitgelieferten Teile sind auf Seite 1 aufgelistet Applicare l etichetta di approvazione solo per il modello Australia Nuova Zelanda 12 Eseguire questa procedura solo per il modello Australia Nuova Zelanda Quando si installa il Dual FAX opzionale quando si aggiunge la scheda a circuiti FAX all OPT2 continuare con la seguente procedura Se non si esegue l installazione passare alla pagina 14 Installare il Dual FAX Fare riferimento alla pagina 1 per le parti in dotazione PAGE MIATA RE AS 12 HSA 2578 s e TAE O dd EE OA OPT2 TRU AERIS R38 14 XUI BER IATA 225314 081 Emit AP VY 5g HIIRI Y tH RUT 21 2 90 02 12 L OBJET A R7UT7 a 7 7 Y RIERRO 2 33 72 5 FAX 2 OPT2 159 5 9 KO E CHET SER Lg AIK 14 25 52 3 QILFAR E 1 AV ABRA VA JATE FV HO RD bla RETAZE 11 7 4 2 M Remove the cover 1 Remove two screws 1 and then remove OPT2 cover 2 Mf Install the FAX circuit board 2 I
458. t du DP de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP et de la ligne m diane du DP sont alors effectu s automatiquement 4 Lorsque Complete s affiche les r glages ont t accomplis correctement Si une anomalie se produit pendant la r alisation des r glages automatiques le message XX XX d signant le code d erreur s affiche V rifiez la position de mise en place de l original et r p tez les tapes 2 et 3 jusqu ce que Complete s affiche Pour plus de d tails reportez vous au manuel de service Ajuste autom tico utilizando el original para el ajuste Antes de hacer el ajuste aseg rese de ajustar el ngulo del borde superior y el ngulo del borde inferior vea las p ginas 7 y 10 1 Corte el borde inferior de un original para el ajuste como se indica en la figura 2 Coloque el original para el ajuste en el DP con la superficie F y R arroba 3 Entre en el modo de mantenimiento e ingrese en el item de mantenimiento U411 Seleccione DP FACE UP presione INPUT y presione la tecla de inicio Los ajustes de cambio de tama o de DP sincronizaci n de borde superior d DP y l nea central de DP se hacen autom ticamente 4 Cuando aparece Complete se completa correctamente el ajuste Si se produce un problema durante los ajustes autom ticos aparece XX donde XX cambia por un c digo de error Verifique la posici n de colocaci n del original y repita los pasos 2 a 3 hasta que aparezca Complete Para m s detalles vea el
459. t entry of a One Touch Key num ber The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited Changing the Registered Information 1 Press Register Edit 2 Select a new destination individual or group Pressing Detail shows the detailed information of the selected destination 3 Press OK 4 Press Yes on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key 2K5 Deleting the Registered Information 1 Press Delete 2 Press Yes on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key Sort Settings 1 Press Next of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Sort 2 Select No or Name 3 Press OK Narrow Down Settings 1 Press Next of Address Book Defaults and then Change of Narrow Down 2 Select the type of destination filter 3 Press OK 11 Internet Browser Setup Internet Browser Setting 1 Press Change of Internet Browser 2 Press On or Off 3 Press OK Browser Preferences 1 Press Next of Browser Environment 2 To set your home page press Change of Home Page press URL enter the URL and then press OK Press OK again 3 To set the text size press Change of Text Size select Large Medium or Small as the text size and then press OK 4 To set the display mode press Change of Display Mode select Normal Just Fit Rendering or Smart Fit Rendering as the display mode and then press OK 5 To specif
460. t more than 500 characters Press OK Check that the entries are correct and press OK Border Erase Default 1 3 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of Border Erase Default Press or for the Border and Gutter width to erase You can use the number keypad to enter the num ber directly Press OK Border Erase to Back Page 1 N Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of Border Erase to Back Page Press Same as Front Page or Do Not Erase Press OK Margin Default 1 3 Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of Margin Default Use the or to enter the margin widths for Left Right and Top Bottom You can use the number keypad to enter the num ber directly Press OK 1 3 98 Auto Image Rotation 1 N Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key and then Change of Auto Image Rotation Select the default for Off or On Press OK EcoPrint 1 N Press cursor down key Next of Function Defaults cursor down key twice and then Change of Eco Print Select Off or On for the default Press OK PDF TIFF JPEG Image 1 Press cursor down key and Next of Function Defaults Press cursor down key twice and then Change of PDF TIFF JPEG Image Select the default image
461. tact Address book open error contact Address book list error contact Address book list error contact Address book clear error group Address book open error group Address book list error group Address book list error group One touch open error One touch list error One touch list error Job accounting clear error Job accounting file open error Job accounting file open error Job accounting error in writing Job accounting list error Job accounting list error User managements backup error User managements clear error User managements file open error User managements file open error User managements file open error User managements error in writing User managements list error User managements list error User managements list error User managements list error User managements file open error User managements error User managements error User managements file open error User managements error User managements file open error User managements error Box file open error Box error in writing Box error in reading Box list error Box list error Box error Box error 321e002f 321 0030 321 0031 321 0032 321 0033 321 0034 321 0035 321 0036 321 0037 321 0038 321 0039 321e003a 321e003b 321e003c 321e003d 321e003e 321e003f 321e0040 32160041 32160042 32160043 321e0044 32160045 32140000 32140001 32140002 32140003 32140004 32140005 32140006 32140007 32140008 32140009 321d000a 3
462. taje de grapas puede deformarse Wichtig Wenn die Papierf rdereinheit A auf den Boden oder dergleichen gestellt wird muss sie auf den Kopf gestellt werden weil sonst die Heftermontageplatte verformt werden kann Importante Quando collocate l unit di trasporto della carta A sul pavimento o in un altro luogo simile accertatevi che sia posto capovolto perch la piastra di montaggio della pinzatrice potrebbe deformarsi PE JIM 79 ARE ROR BCE o TES B ZRA AA A TINA O T BR LICL lt lt Procedure Removing the covers 1 Open the front cover 1 and left cover 1 2 2 Remove the clip holder 3 3 Remove two screws 4 and release three latches 5 to remove the cover 6 Proc dure Retrait des capots 1 Ouvrez le capot avant 1 et le capot gauche 1 2 2 Retirez le support pince 3 3 Retirez deux vis 4 et lib rez trois verrous 5 pour retirer le capot 6 Procedimiento Desmontaje de las cubiertas 1 Abra la cubierta frontal 1 y la cubierta izquierda 1 2 2 Desmonte el soporte de clip 3 3 Saque los dos tornillos 4 y suelte los tres pestillos 5 para desmontar la cubierta 6 Verfahren Entfernen der Abdeckungen 1 Die Frontabdeckung 1 und die linke Abdeckung 1 2 ffnen 2 Den B roklammerhalter 3 entfernen 3 Die zwei Schrauben 4 herausdrehen und die drei Rasten 5 l sen um die Abdeckung
463. talling the job separator tray 17 Insert the tray holder C into two openings 23 and then slide the holder to the right until it clicks Installation du plateau du s parateur de 15 Branchez le connecteur 20 du s parateur de travaux au connecteur 21 de l unit LED PWB B 16 Faites passer les fils par l espace 22 et fixez l unit LED PWB B l aide de la vis M3 x 6 I Colocaci n de la unidad PWB LED travaux 17 Ins rez le support de plateau C dans les deux ouvertures 23 puis faites glisser le support vers la droite jusqu ce qu il s encliqu te Instalaci n de la bandeja de separador de 15 Conecte el conector 20 del separador de trabajos en el conector 21 de la unidad PWB LED B 16 Pase los cables por el espacio 22 y fije la unidad PWB LED B utilizando el tornillo x 6 I Anbringen der LED Platineneinheit 15 Den Steckverbinder 20 des Job Separators mit dem Steckverbinder 21 der LED Platineneinheit B verbinden 16 Die Kabel durch den Spalt 22 f hren und die LED Platineneinheit B mit der M3 x 6 Schraube 1 befestigen Montaggio dell unit LED PWB trabajos 17 Inserte el soporte de bandeja C en dos aberturas 23 y deslice el soporte a la derecha hasta escuchar un chasquido Installieren des Job Separator Fachs 17 Den Fachhalter C in die zwei Offnungen 23 einf hren und dann den Halter nach rechts schieben bis er mit einem Klicken einrastet Installaz
464. tch 7 using a flat head screwdriver to remove the cover 8 Lib rez le verrou 7 l aide d un tournevis a t te plate pour retirer le capot 8 Suelte el pestillo 7 utilizando un destornillador de cabeza plana para desmontar la cubierta 8 Die Raste 7 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen um die Abdeckung 8 abzunehmen Rilasciate il fermo 7 utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta per rimuovere il coperchio 8 A 22 TI RRA AR 7 UP i 2 7 BEVAFABIAA REC 1180 MERL D23 8 ALO FE SET P ANN Remove the screw 9 to remove the metal plate 10 The removed metal plate 10 is no longer required es i Retirez la vis 9 pour d poser la plaque m tallique 10 La plaque m tallique d pos e 10 n est plus n cessaire Quite el tornillo 9 para desmontar la placa de metal 10 La placa de metal desmontada 10 ya no es necesaria Die Schraube 9 herausdrehen um die Metallplatte 10 abzunehmen Die abgenommene Metallplatte 10 wird nicht mehr ben tigt Rimuovere la vite 9 per togliere la piastra di metallo 10 La piastra di metallo 10 rimossa non pi necessaria BI P 1 AR 9 BU PAESE 10 PARERI 0 QUIAE LU AH 10 CROAT BR 10 XB 0 Pit Zev Release the latch 11 using a flat head screwdriver and slide the cover 12 t
465. tected in the input data to inner thermistor Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC32 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective tempera ture sensor Replace the temperature sensor Toner hopper problem Toner emptiness is detected for 300 s three times during the toner replenish ment Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC1 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective toner sensor Replace the developing unit Developing unit connector insertion problem Absence of the developing unit is detected Developing unit connector inserted incorrectly Reinsert the developing unit connector if necessary Defective develop ing unit connector Replace the developing unit Drum unit connector insertion prob lem Absence of the drum unit is detected Drum unit connec tor inserted incor rectly Reinsert the drum unit connector if neces sary Defective drum unit connector Replace the drum unit 1 4 28 Broken external thermistor wire The thermistor output value is 4 5 V or more Drum EEPROM error Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on th
466. tenance item No 2K5 Description U203 Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP Purpose To check the DP operation Method 1 Press the start key 2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper 3 Select the item to be operated Display Description Setting range Initial setting CCD ADP Without paper single sided original NON P continuous operation CCD ADP With paper single sided original CCD RADP Without paper double sided original NON P continuous operation CCD RADP With paper double sided original SPEED Switching between normal reading 600 dpi 0 Normal and high speed reading 1 High speed 4 Press the start key The operation starts 5 To stop continuous operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description KEY DEVICE Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter MESSAGE Sets the message when optional equipment is not i
467. the adjustment Procedure Place the original on the contact glass Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass Press the start key and make a test copy at 100 magnification Remove the contact glass Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame For copy example 1 move the frame in the direction of the white arrow lt For copy example 2 move the frame in the direction of Is the image correct the black arrow m Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 5 55 Mirror 2 frame AA JO Figure 1 5 56 1 5 30 2K5 1 5 4 Drum section 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit Procedure Open the left cover 1 Open the front cover Remove the toner container Toner hopper Remove the waste toner box wire cover Unhook the hook and remove the toner hop per wire cover O9 RON Toner hopper wire cover Figure 1 5 57 6 Remove the connector 7 Remove three screws 8 Remove the toner hopper assembly ALAN IAS X e Toner hopper Screw assembly SS Figure 1 5 58 1 5 31 2K5 1 9 Unhook the hook and re
468. the cable Defective inverter PWB Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN1 1 and CN1 6 on the inverter PWB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run If not replace the inverter PWB Defective scanner PWB Check if YC5 1 and YC5 6 on the scanner PWB goes low when maintenance item 0061 is run If not replace the scan ner PWB 1 4 35 2K5 3 Image is too light Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Insufficient toner If the display shows the message requesting toner replenish ment replace the container Deteriorated toner Perform the drum refresh operation Defective transfer charging output 4 Background is visible Copy example The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC12 11 on the engine PWB goes low when main tenance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Causes Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 2 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Check procedures corrective measures Deteriorated toner Perform the drum refresh operation Dirty main charger wire 5 A white line appea
469. the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows A black colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the right side window xx The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera Mita branded toner container otherwise it is a coun terfeit See through the left window See through the right window e mMarking cc marking Validation viewer Validation viewer D a D a Side SIA NUES RS OSO os Brand protection cott protection seal seal A black colored band when A shiny or gold colored band when seen through the left side window seen through the right side window Figure 1 5 1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse Incision DCE Kun KYOCE Cut Figure 1 5 2 1 5 2 1 5 2 Paper feed section 2K5 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Procedure Removing the primary paper feed units 1 Open the front cover and pull out the cas settes 1 and 2 2 Remove the screw and remove the primary paper feed unit Removing the forwarding pulley 3 Remove the stopper from the primary paper feed unit 4 Raise the forwarding pulley
470. the original center 4 Background is visible See page 1 4 36 9 Black dots appear on the image See page 1 4 37 14 Offset occurs See page 1 4 39 5 A white line appears longitudi nally See page 1 4 36 10 lmage is blurred See page 1 4 38 15 lmage is partly missing See page 1 4 39 1 No image appears entirely white Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures 2K5 No trans fer charg ing The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC12 11 on the engine PWB goes low when main tenance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 2 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB No LSU laser is output Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 26 Defective main PWB Check if YC21 3 on the main PWB goes low when mainte nance item U100 is run If not replace the main PWB No devel oping bias output The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the
471. the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on 16 Load paper in each cassette Make a proof copy to check the operation V rification de la ligne m diane 15 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension 16 Mettre du papier dans chaque tiroir Effectuer une copie d essai pour v rifier le fonctionnement Verificaci n de la l nea central 15 Conecte el enchufe el ctrico de la m quina en un tomacorriente de la pared y conecte el interruptor principal 16 Coloque el papel en cada bandeja Haga una copia de prueba para verificar e funcionamiento berpr fen der Mittellinie 15 Den Netzstecker der Maschine in die Steckdose stecken und den Betriebsschalter einschalten 16 Papier in jede Kassette einlegen Eine Probekopie anfertigen um den Betrieb zu berpr fen Controllare la linea centrale 15 Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione della macchina alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e accendere l interruttore principale di alimentazione 16 Caricare la carta in ciascun cassetto Eseguire una copia di prova per controllare il funzionamento ROB TA 15 EUER EHLE AY Ha if A dif EA 16 A RAR EE o METTI SEED MU EZ EIN ERAS o FFERM 049 954 15 BRT 7 ERAT RINA 16 XE y NETA EY 975 FA RICA RIO 52
472. thin specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning off 1686 ms Fuser section 40 Misfeed in fuser section MP tray The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2321 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 1336 ms 41 Misfeed in fuser section cassette 1 The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2321 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 1336 ms 42 Misfeed in fuser section cassette 2 The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2321 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 1336 ms 43 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 3 The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2321 ms The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 1336 ms 44 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 4 The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2321 ms The feedsh
473. ting the original scan data 0403 D MARGIN Test chart P 1 3 72 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment the contact glass 15 0404 D MARGIN 1 3 73 0404 For copying originals from the DP Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data 0403 AMARGIN Test chart P 1 3 72 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment C MARGIN the contact glass 16 U404 AMARGIN P 1 3 73 U404 For copying originals from the DP i C MARGIN When maintenance item U411 Automatic adjustment in the scanner is run using the specified original P N 302FZ56990 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the scanner magnification U065 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0066 Adjusting the scanner center line U067 When maintenance item U411 Automatic adjustment in the DP is run using the specified original P N 302AC68243 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the DP magnification U070 Adjusting the DP leading edge registration U071 Adjusting the DP center line U072 Image quality Item Specifications 100 magnification Enlargement reduction Lateral squareness Leading edge registration Skewed paper feed left right difference Lateral image shifting Machine 0 8 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 0 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 5 mm 375 mm Using DP 3 0 mm 375 mm C
474. to the side of the machine OFF Not to eject to the side of the machine Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4 Letter size and to display the result in user simulation Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting Calculation Rate Size parameter 0 1 to 3 0 1 0 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 67 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U339 Setting the drum heater ON OFF Description Turns the drum heater on or off during sleep mode Purpose Set according to the preference of the user Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting MODE Setting the drum heater ON OFF 0 to 4 0 The drum heater is off at sleep mode when the value is 0 The drum heater is on at s
475. tos con la salida de papel del MFP deslice las patas del finalizador de documentos A a las posiciones superiores indicadas en la figura instale las dos piezas de herrajes 2 desmontadas en el paso 1 y aseg relos con los ocho tornillos 1 Um den Dokument Finisher auf den Papierauslass des MFP auszurichten die Beine des Dokument Finishers A auf die in der Abbildung gezeigte oberste Position schieben dann die zwei in Schritt 1 entfernten Befestigungsteile 2 anbringen und mit den acht Schrauben 1 befestigen Per allineare la finitrice di documenti con l uscita della carta dell MFP fare scivolare i piedini della finitrice di documenti A sulle posizioni pi in alto indicate nel disegno montare i due pezzi di raccordo 2 che sono stati rimossi nel passo 1 e fissarli utilizzando le otto viti 1 EA EMME CRE SERES 2 2 8 MIRET 1 8993559 74 A Off ee LORE MOR E CAAA FIL CRYO ALE 2 2 f ELO REO EA 184 TC m ol 3 Secure the guide plate G using the shoulder screw L and an S Tite screw M4 x 10 K 3 Fixez la plaque guide a l aide de la vis d paule L et d une vis S Tite M4 x 10 K 3 Asegure la placa gu a G utilizando el tornillo de hombro L y un tornill
476. transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP FTP over SSL E mail transmission SMTP Scan to E mail Twain scan WIA scan NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 2K5 Parts names 1 1 2 1 Machine Lam 4 fa A Lo 3 4 6 1 1 N N WS VS 2 mie lt 7 8 7 9 10 Figure 1 1 1 Original cover option 2 Original size indicator plates 3 Clip holder 4 Slit glass 1 5 Attention indicator 6 Receive indicator Left cover 1 7 Left cover 1 lever 8 2 jo lt NN gt gt oO oi 11 Contact glass 12 Operation panel 13 Cassette 1 14 Cassette 2 15 Duplex unit 1 1 3 2K5 22 18 23 21 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Figure 1 1 2 Toner container stopper Toner container Waste toner box Paper feed unit A2 Paper feed unit cover A3 Knob Cleaner rod Cleaning brush 2K5 Figure 1 1 3 USB memory slot A1 Front cover Paper width adjusting tab Paper length guide Top tray Main power switch Paper width guide MP tray multi purpose
477. tray Output stopper Filter F1 Optional interface slot OPT2 USB interface connector A2 USB interface connector B1 Network interface connector Optional interface slot OPT1 2K5 2 Operation panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 A DN System Menu Counter BPrint fiSend Receive Memory Attention Interrupt Logout peo 77719 O 50 Status Job Cancel 13 ej Cel 20 Program Send 14 3j QV Application Document Box 7 15 bo Esp Help Accessibility Display OS EA Clear Siro M eee 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Figure 1 1 4 1 System menu key indicator 15 Application key indicator 2 Counter key indicator 16 Help key indicator 3 Print indicator 17 Accessibility key indicator 4 Send indicator 18 Document box key indicator 5 Receive indicator 19 Send key indicator 6 Memory indicator 20 Copy key indicator 7 Attention indicator 21 Numeric keys 8 Interrupt key indicator 22 Clear key 9 Logout key indicator 23 Quick No search key 10 Energy saver key indicator 24 Enter key 11 Power key indicator 25 Start key indicator 12 Main power indicator 26 Stop key 13 Status Job cancel key indicator 27 Reset key
478. triction on the number of sheets OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets Initial setting ON Details of restriction number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed Condition Number of sheets When no optional ejection device is installed 250 sheets When the job separator is installed 150 sheets When the finisher is installed 100 sheets 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U343 Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy Purpose To be set according to frequency of use set to the more frequently used mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Duplex copy OFF Simplex copy Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 69 2K5 Maintenance item No Description 0345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of t
479. ts to replace the fuser thermostat Never substitute electric wires as the machine may be seri ously damaged When replacing battery on a PWB dispose properly according to laws and regulations When removing the hook of the connector be sure to release the hook Take care not to get the wire caught To reassemble the parts use the original screws If the types and the sizes of screws are not known refer to the PARTS LIST 2 Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surface to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F and at a relative humidity not higher than 85 RH Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum Do nat touch the drum surface with any object Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil clean it 3 Toner Store the toner container in a cool dark place Avoid direct light and high humidity 1 5 1 2K5 4 How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container As a means of brand protection the Kyocera Mita toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable visual validation A validation viewer is required to accomplish this Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container Through each window of the validation viewer
480. uality Check Adjust Chart of image adjustment procedures 2K5 iusti Maintenance mode Adjusting Item Image Description Original Page Remarks order Item No Mode Adjusting the magnification in the Polygon motor speed adjustment 0053 POLYGON MOTOR U053 test pattern P 1 3 26 main scanning direction printing 1 adjustment Adjusting the magnification in the Drive motor speed adjustment 0053 TMAIN MOTOR U053 test pattern P 1 3 26 auxiliary scanning direction print 2 ing adjustment Adjusting the center line of the MP Adjusting the LSU print start timing 0034 LSUOUT LEFT MPT 0034 test pattern P 1 3 23 To make an adjustment for duplex copying select tray printing adjustment LSUOUT LEFT DUP 3 dee e Adjusting the center line of the cas Adjusting the LSU print start timing 0034 LSUOUT LEFT CAS 1 0034 test pattern P 1 3 23 Cassette 1 select Center Feed 1 settes printing adjustment LSUOUT LEFT CAS 2 Cassette 2 select Center Feed 2 4 gt LSUOUT LEFT CAS 3 Cassette 3 select Center Feed 3 LSUOUT LEFT CAS 4 Cassette 4 select Center Feed 4 Adjusting the leading edge registra Registration motor turning on timing sec
481. uch ONE TOUCH mation on one touch 1 Since data are dependent with each other data other than those assigned are also retrieved or written in 2 When ADDRESS BOOK ONE TOUCH is selected editing with the Set up tool is not possible however Import Export in high speed mode is possible Press the start key Starts reading or writing The progress of selected item is displayed in 96 When an error occurs the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed see page 1 3 89 9 When normally completed Finished is displayed 10 Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting Import Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 88 Maintenance item No Description 2K5 U917 Error Codes Codes Description Codes Description 321e0001 321e0002 321e0003 321e0004 321e0005 321e0006 321e0007 321e0008 321e0009 321e000a 321e000b 321e000c 321e000d 321e000e 321e000f 32160010 32160011 32160012 32160013 32160014 32160015 32160016 32160017 32160018 32160019 321e001a 321e001b 321e001c 321e001d 321e001e 321e001f 321e0020 321e0021 321e0022 321e0023 321e0024 321e0025 321e0026 321e0027 321e0028 321e0029 321e002a 321e002b 321e002c 321e002d 321e002e Parameter error File write error File initialization error File error Processing error Address book clear error con
482. um Figure 1 5 40 6 Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the scanner unit 7 Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to fix the mirror 2 frame in posi tion Frame securing tool Frame securing tool 4 Figure 1 5 41 1 5 22 8 Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from below to above a 1 9 Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner 2 10 Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the left of the scanner unit winding from below to 3 11 Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from above EO DOPO tira 4 12 Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit 5 13 Hook the round terminals onto the scanner wire 60 6 Figure 1 5 42 14 Remove the two scanner wire stoppers and Frame securing tool frame securing tools 15 Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum move aside the wires to inside 16 Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position 17 Refit the m
483. umeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on 3 Press OK Auto Error Clear ON OFF 1 Press Change of Auto Error Clear 2 Press Off or On 3 Press OK Error Clear Timer 1 Press cursor down key and then Change of Error Clear Timer 2 Press or to enter the time until printing restarts You cannot use the number keypad to enter this value 3 Press OK Interrupt Clear Timer 1 Press cursor down key and then Change of Inter rupt Clear Timer 2 Press or to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer 3 Press OK 1 3 102 10 Editing Destination Address Book Adding One Touch Keys Adding a Contact 1 Press Register Edit of Address Book Add Con tact and then Next 2 To specify the address number press Change in Address Number 3 Press or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number 1 2500 To have the number assigned automatically enter 0000 Press OK The screen shown in step 2 reappears Press Change of Name Enter the destination name up to 32 characters to be displayed on the Address Book and press OK The screen shown in step 2 reappears Press E mail to add an e mail address SMB to add a folder on the computer or FTP to add an FTP folder The procedure differs depending on the transmis sion method selected E mail Address 1 Press Change of E mail Address enter the E mail address and press OK The table
484. unter signal Ground Key counter connection signal 5 V DC power output to key counter Connected to the paper size length switch 1 2 optional paperfeeder and MP feed switch 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 VA LX Oo A 0 N Oo 24VIL2PF2 24VIL2PF1 24VIL2 24VIL2 LODIG1 HIDIG1 LODIGO HIDIGO GND GND LODIG2 HIDIG2 GND 5VSL PFSEL 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC power output to PWSW2 24 V DC power output to PWSW1 24 V DC power output to PWSW2 24 V DC power output to PWSW 1 PWSW2 On Off PWSW1 On Off PWSW2 On Off PWSW1 On Off Ground Ground PWSW2 On Off PWSW1 On Off Ground 5 V DC power output to paper feeder Paper feeder select signal 2 3 9 2K5 Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC22 16 PFSCLK 0 5V DC pulse Paper feeder clock signal Connected 17 PFSDI 0 5 V DC pulse Paper feeder serial communication data signal M 18 PFSDO O 0 5V DC pulse Paper feeder serial communication data signal switch 1 2 19 PFREADY 0 5VDC Paper feeder ready signal optional 20 PFFEED O 0 5VDC Paper feeder feed signal PS D csi f GND 4 s Ground switch 22 BYPFEEDSW 0 5V DC MPFSW On Off 23 5VSL O 5VDC 5 V DC power output to MPFSW 24 NC J Not used YC23 A1 GND
485. uplex copying Within 3 0 mm Effectuez nouveau une copie de test R p tez les tapes 1 3 jusqu a ce que la ligne 2 de de copie corresponde aux valeurs de r f rence suivantes lt Valeur de r f rence gt Copie recto seul 2 0 mm max Copie recto verso 3 0 mm max Haga otra copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 3 hasta que la l nea 2 de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia lt Valor de referencia gt Para copia simple Dentro de 2 0 mm Para copia duplex Dentro de 3 0 mm Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen bis die Linie 2 des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt Fur Simplexkopie Innerhalb 2 0 mm Fur Duplexkopie Innerhalb 3 0 mm Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia Ripetere i passi da 1 a 3 fino a che la linea 2 dell esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento lt Valore di riferimento gt Per copia simplex Entro 2 0 mm Per copia duplex Entro 3 0 mm PUT MRAZ EN HERA IR 2 WENEN f n 2 LIA 3 0mm LIA HETARIC BIRD IAEA NMOE A AGA 2 BEANA EC FIBI 3 ROC ire gt 2 Omm LAP MMOs 3 LAP 19 A 149 x 5mm Automatic adjustment us
486. urn the main power switch off and on Error for stored status in the operation handle Error Not yet opened Error for stored status in the Turn the main power switch off and on operation handle Error Already opened Error for stored status in the Turn the main power switch off and on operation handle Error Memory Allocation Insufficient memory space Turn the main power switch off and on Error Socket Create Unable to create a communi Turn the main power switch off and on cation socket Error Unknown error Unable to determine the Turn the main power switch off and on cause 1 4 51 2K5 This page is intentionally left blank 1 4 52 2K5 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 Precautions Before starting disassembly press the power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the main power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Turning off the main power switch before pressing the power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk When fax kit is installed be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly When handling PWBs printed wiring boards do not touch parts with bare hands The PWBs are susceptible to static charge Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge Use only the specified par
487. urrence excesseds c 16 the oldest occur d rence is removed Paper type Paper size e Paper eject a Cause of paper jam Hexadecimal 04 Cover open 05 Secondary paper feed does not start 10 No paper feed from cassette 1 11 No paper feed from cassette 2 12 No paper feed from optional cassette 3 13 No paper feed from optional cassette 4 14 No paper feed from MP tray 18 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying section 19 Misfeed in paper feeder vertical paper conveying section 20 Misfeed in MP tray paper conveying section 21 Multiple sheets in paper feed section 23 Multiple sheets in MP tray conveying section 30 Misfeed in registration transfer section 40 Misfeed in fuser section MP tray 41 Misfeed in fuser section cassette 1 42 Misfeed in fuser section cassette 2 43 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 3 44 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 4 47 Misfeed in fuser section duplex section 50 Misfeed in eject section 51 Misfeed in job separator eject section 52 Misfeed in feedshift section 60 Duplex paper conveying section 1 61 Duplex paper conveying section 2 70 No original feed 71 An original jam in the original conveying section 1 72 An original jam in the original conveying section 2 73 An original jam in the original switchback section 74 An original jam in the original switchback feed section 75 An original jam in the original switchb
488. urt Suite 119 Wood Dale Illinois 60191 TEL 630 238 9982 FAX 630 238 9487 Western Region 14101 Alton Parkway Irvine California 92618 7006 TEL 949 457 9000 FAX 949 457 9119 KYOCERA MITA CANADA LTD 6120 Kestrel Road Mississauga Ontario L5T 158 Canada TEL 905 670 4425 FAX 905 670 8116 KYOCERA MITA MEXICO S A DE C V Av 16 de Septiembre 407 Col Santa In s Azcapotzalco M xico D F 02130 M xico TEL 55 5383 2741 FAX 55 5383 7804 2010 KYOCERA MITA Corporation http www kyoceramita com KYOCERG is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation Southeastern Region 1500 Oakbrook Drive Norcross Georgia 30093 TEL 770 729 9786 FAX 770 729 9873 Southwestern Region 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 550 8987 FAX 972 252 9786 National Operation Center amp National Training Center 2825 West Story Road Irving Texas 75038 5299 TEL 972 659 0055 FAX 972 570 5816 Latin America Division 8240 N W 52nd Terrace Dawson Building Suite 108 Miami Florida 33166 TEL 305 421 6640 FAX 305 421 6666 Printed in U S A
489. us concernent les machines monochromes seulement 1 Ouvrir le couvercle d jection 1 du MFP ou imprimante 2 Retirer les deux vis 2 fixant l assemblage de la glissi re d alimentation 3 puis retirer l assemblage Los pasos 1 a 6 a continuaci n son s lo para m quinas monocrom ticas 1 Abra la cubierta de expulsi n 1 del MFP o impresora 2 Quite los dos tornillos 2 que aseguran el ensamble gu a de la unidad de cambio de alimentaci n de papel 3 y luego el ensamble Die folgenden Schritte 1 bis 6 gelten nur f r Monochrommaschinen 1 Offnen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung 1 des MFP oder Drucker 2 Entfernen Sie die zwei Schrauben 2 die den Zuf hrungswechsel Bausatz 3 befestigen und dann den Bausatz seguenti passi da 1 a 6 sono solo per le macchine in bianco e nero 1 Aprire la copertura dell uscita carta 1 dell MFP o stampatore 2 Rimuovere le due viti 2 che fissano il gruppo di guida di cambio alimentazione 3 e quindi il gruppo FIR 1 6 MRSA 1 1 7 2 KWARE DWF HERR S SE 2H 3 HF SII 1 61177 OOH 1 MFP ARE EINES Y FARO A 1 2 9 lt 2 EX 2 2 REAL AIA A 3 MOA ZAS LIZO 62042504222 LELEN Ha 3 Fit the eliminator to the eject cover 1 such that the projections 4 on the cover fit into the two ends of the curl eliminator M 4 Secure the
490. usting magnification of the Original scanning speed U065 X SCAN ZOOM Test chart P 1 3 29 U065 For copying an original placed on scanner in the auxiliary scanning the contact glass 11 direction scanning adjustment 0070 MOTOR ADJ FRONT P 1 3 33 U070 For copying originals from the DP MOTOR ADJ BACK To make an adjustment for duplex copying select MOTOR ADJ BACK Adjusting the center line scanning Adjusting the original scan data 0067 FRONT Test chart P 1 3 31 U067 For copying an original placed on adjustment image adjustment ROTATE the contact glass To make an adjustment for rotate copying select 12 4 gt ROTATE 0072 FRONT P 1 3 36 U072 For copying originals from the DP BACK To make an adjustment for duplex copying select BACK Adjusting the leading edge registra Original scan start timing U066 FRONT Test chart P 1 3 30 0066 For copying an original placed on tion scanning adjustment 2 TAIL the contact glass 4 To make an adjustment for trailing edge registra 13 tion select TAIL U071 FRONT HEAD P 1 3 34 U071 For copying originals from the DP BACK HEAD To make an adjustment for duplex copying select BACK HEAD Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data 0403 B MARGIN Test chart P 1 3 72 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment the contact glass 14 0404 MARGIN 1 3 73 0404 For copying originals from the DP Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjus
491. vate restriction Press Register to add a new account on the Account List 1 3 107 2K5 Managing Accounts 1 2 3 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting and then Register Edit of Accounting List Select an account to change or delete Changing account information 1 2 3 4 Press Detail Refer to steps 3 to 5 of Adding an Account and steps 3 to 6 of Restricting Using the Machine to change account information Press Register Press Yes in the registration confirmation screen The account information is changed Deleting an account 1 2 Press Delete Press Yes To delete the account Managing the Copier Printer Counts 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Next of Default Setting and then Change of Copier Printer Count Press Total or Split Press OK Applying Restriction 1 If user login administration is disabled the user authentication screen appears Enter your login user name and password and then press Login Press Next of Job Accounting Setting Register Edit of Accounting List and then Ada Press Change for the item to be restricted Select the
492. ve feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch 1 Check see page 1 4 42 8 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from cassette 2 Jam code 11 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley of the cassette 2 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 2 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch 2 Check see page 1 4 42 1 4 9 2K5 Problem Causes check procedures Cor
493. verrous 29 du capot 6 retir auparavant lors de l tape 3 en utilisant un tournevis t te plate pour retirer le support de pince inf rieur 30 24 Fixez le support de pince inf rieur 30 sur le capot de l agrafeuse C Instalaci n de la cubierta de grapas 23 Suelte los dos pestillos 29 de la cubierta 6 desmontada en el paso 3 utilizando el destornillador de punta plana para desmontar el soporte de clip inferior 30 24 Coloque el soporte de clip inferior 30 en la cubierta de grapas C Installieren der Hefterabdeckun 23 Die zwei Rasten 29 der in Schritt 3 entfernten Abdeckung 6 mit einem Flachschraubenzieher l sen um den unteren B roklammerhalter 30 abzunehmen 24 Den unteren B roklammerhalter 30 an der Hefterabdeckung C anbringen Installazione del coperchio della pinzatrice 23 Rilasciate due fermi 29 del coperchio 6 rimosso nel passo 3 utilizzando un giravite a punta piatta per rimuovere il contenitore inferiore delle graffette 30 24 Montate il contenitore inferiore delle graffette 30 al coperchio della pinzatrice C SEDET BERN 23 TRACI UH 6 1002 ALMA 29 HR TOT AEF 30 24 Mer f F Q0 WERTER O Lo RFI TFWANKN ORY tlt 23 FJA CHROMA LED 23 6 DILDIAF 29 2 HATE VT FA CHEB LZ Y y TANF 30 RV IT 24 7 Y y FANT 30 AF7 H2S 5044025 25 Fix the staple cover C using three screws Upper
494. while it z 7 Defective rear side Replace rear side registration motor has moved by 106 pulses istrati t When the rear side registration home regieiranen position sensor is turned off during initial The rear side reg Reinsert the connector Also check for conti ization the sensor did not turn on in istration home nuity within the connector cable If none position sensor remedy or replace the cable connector makes poor contact Defective rear side Replace the rear side registration home registration home position sensor position sensor Defective finisher Replace the finisher control PWB and check control PWB for correct operation C8190 Finisher trailing edge registration The trailing edge Reinsert the connector Also check for conti 1 4 30 motor problem optional built in fin isher When the trailing edge registration home position sensor is turned on during initialization the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses When the trailing edge registration home position sensor is turned off during initialization the sensor did not turn on in 35 registration motor connector makes poor contact nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective trailing edge registration motor Replace trailing edge registration motor The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the conne
495. wn keys 3 Select the counts for all service call codes and press ALL CLEAR The individual counter cannot be cleared 4 Press the start key The count is cleared Method Total Count 1 Select Total Count The total number of service call counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of service call count cannot be cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 85 2K5 Maintenance item No Description U905 Checking clearing counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of DP or finisher Purpose To check the use of DP and finisher Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the device the count of which is to be checked 3 Press the start key The count of the selected device is displayed Display Description DP Counts of optional DP FINISHER Counts of optional document finisher or built in finisher DP Display Description ADP No of single sided originals that has passed through the DP RADP No of double sided originals that has passed through the DP Document finisher Built in finisher Display Description CP CNT No of copies that has passed STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 86 Resetting partial
496. xis of the pin 12 of the latch catch is aligned with the marking of the slot 13 of the document finisher A when the document finisher A is joined to the MFP viewed from the machine front Turning the adjustment bolt 14 clockwise lifts the document finisher A while turning it counterclockwise lowers the document finisher A 2 Desserrer les deux vis 11 de la roulette arri re droite du retoucheur de document A R gler la hauteur de la roulette arri re droite en tournant son boulon de r glage 14 l aide d un tournevis cruciformede mani re que l axe de la broche 12 du pontet du loquet soit align sur la marque de la fente 13 du retoucheur de document A lorsque le retoucheur de document A est fix au MFP vue partir de l avant de la machine Si l on tourne le boulon de r glage 14 dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre le retoucheur de document A s l ve si on le tourne dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d une montre le retoucheur de document A s abaisse 2 Afloje los dos tornillos 11 en la rueda trasera del finalizador de documentos A Ajuste la altura de la rueda trasera derecha girando su perno de ajuste 14 utilizando un destornillador de punta en cruz para que el eje del pasador 12 en el pestillo est alineado con la marca de la ranura 13 del finalizador de documentos A cuando el finalizador de documentos A est unido a el MFP vista del frente de la m quina Al girar el perno d
497. y if black lines appear on the copy image Exposure lamp Check Replace Replace if an image problem occurs P 1 5 15 Optical rail Check Grease Check noise and shifting and then apply scanner rail grease EM 50L Original size sensor Maintenance part location Check Clean User call 300K Clean the sensor emitter and sensor receiver with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a problem Points and cautions Page Transfer separation sections Section Transfer roller unit Check Replace Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets P 1 5 36 Separation electrode Maintenance part location User call Clean with a cleaning brush Points and cautions Page Developing section Section Developing unit Maintenance part location Check Replace User call Replace Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets Points and cautions P 1 5 35 Main charg ing drum section 2 4 4 Drum unit Check Replace Replace Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets Section Maintenance part location User call 300K Points and cautions 2K5 1 Page Fuser section Section Fuser unit Check Replace Replace Replace after feeding 300 000 sheets P 1 5 37 Heat roller Check Replace Replace if a problem occurs P 1 5 45 Press ro
498. y suelte la placa de soporte de la palanca 19 en el sentido de la flecha 13 Apriete el tornillo 18 Freigeben der Hebelhalteplatte 12 Die Schraube 18 der Papierf rdereinheit A l sen und die Hebelhalteplatte 19 in Pfeilrichtung freigeben 13 Die Schraube 18 festziehen Rilascio della leva che fissa la piastra 12 Allentate la vite 18 dell unit di trasporto della carta A e rilasciate la leva che fissa la piastra 19 nella direzione della freccia 13 Stringete la vite 18 RE XE S Bi 12 A AY 1 RAS 18 19025 Ty WM ES AY 19 13 Aa 1 422 18 L 3 SIE RE OD f B 12 dfe v A DEA 181474950 LME BRA 19 Do 13 EA 18 1 Installing the finisher process table 14 Loosen the screw 20 approx 3 turns Do not turn the screw 20 too far otherwise it may drop into the machine 15 Fit the hook holder D to the screw 20 16 Fit the hole of the hook holder D to the positioning projection 21 and then tighten the screw 20 to fix the hook holder D Installation de la table de processus du module de finition 14 Desserrez la vis 20 d environ trois tours Ne pas tourner la vis 20 excessivement sinon elle risquerait de tomber dans la machine 15 Placez le support de crochet D sur la vis 20 16 Faites coincider l orifice du support de crochet D avec la saillie de position
499. y the settings for accepting cookies press Change of Cookie select Accept All Reject All or Prompt before Accepting as your cookie accep tance policy and then press OK Proxy Settings 1 Press Change of Proxy and then press On To set a proxy server HTTP 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTP enter the proxy address and press OK 2 Press Keys and enter the port number To set a proxy server HTTPS 1 Press Keyboard of Proxy Server HTTPS enter the proxy address and press OK 2 Press Keys and enter the port number To set domains for which no proxy is used 1 Press Keyboard of Do Not Use Proxy for Fol lowing Domains enter the domain name and press OK 2 Press OK 1 3 103 2K5 12 Applications Installing Applications 1 2 3 Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot A1 Press Add Select the application to be installed and press Install You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing Detail When the confirmation screen appears press Yes Installation ofthe application begins Depending on the application being installed the installation may take some time Once the installation ends the original screen reappears To install another application repeat steps 3 to 4 To remove the USB memory press Remove Mem ory and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely removed mess

TASKalfa 300i

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents